a64l, abort, abs, acalloc, acceptable_password, acl_add_perm, acl_clear_perm,...

· Home

+ man pages

-> Linux

-> FreeBSD

-> OpenBSD

-> NetBSD

-> Tru64 Unix

-> HP-UX 11i

-> IRIX

· Linux HOWTOs

· FreeBSD Tips

· *niX Forums

man pages->Tru64 Unix man pages

a64l(3) -- convert long integer and base-64 ASCII string

These functions are used to maintain numbers stored in base-64 ASCII characters. The a64l() function converts a character string to a long integer. The l64a() function converts a long integer to a cha...

abort(3) -- Generates a software signal to end the current process

The abort() function sends a SIGABRT signal to the current process. This signal terminates the process unless both of the following conditions are true: (1) signal SIGABRT is being caught, and (2) the...

abs(3) -- Computes absolute value and division of integers

The abs() function returns the absolute value of its integer operand. The div() function computes the quotient and remainder of the division of the numerator numerator by the denominator denominator. ...

acalloc(3) -- arena memory allocator

The amalloc family of routines provides a main memory allocator based on the malloc(3) memory allocator. This allocator has been extended so that an arbitrary memory space ("arena") can be set up as...

acceptable_password(3) -- Determines if a password meets deduction requirements (Enhanced Security)

The acceptable_password() function determines if the given password is difficult to deduce from well known, passwordguessing heuristics. The cleartext (plaintext) password is passed as the first argum...

acl_add_perm(3) -- Adds a permission to a set of permissions belonging to an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_add_perm() function adds the permission specified by perm_d to the permission set referred to by the permset_d parameter...

acl_clear_perm(3) -- Clears a set of permissions in an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_clear_perm() function clears the permissions from the permission set in permset_d.

acl_copy_entry(3) -- Copies an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_copy_entry() function copies the contents of the individual ACL entry indicated by the src_d parameter to the individual...

acl_copy_ext(3) -- Copies the ACL from internal working space format to a contiguous, persistent form of the ACL

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_copy_ext() function copies the contents of the ACL in internal working space format, pointed to by acl_d, into the buffe...

acl_copy_int(3) -- Copies the ACL from contiguous, persistent format to internal working space format

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_copy_int() function copies the contents of the ACL from the buffer pointed to by buf_p to the working storage internal f...

acl_create_entry(3) -- Create a new ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_create_entry() function creates a new ACL entry in the ACL pointed to by the acl_p argument. If there is insufficient sp...

acl_delete_def_fd(3) -- Deletes the default access ACL from the designated directory

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_delete_def_fd() function deletes the default access ACL from the directory designated by fd.

acl_delete_def_file(3) -- Deletes the default access ACL from the designated directory

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_delete_def_file() function deletes the default access ACL from the directory designated by path_p.

acl_delete_entry(3) -- Deletes an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Deletes the designated ACL entry from the ACL that contains it.

acl_delete_perm(3) -- Delete permissions from a set of permissions belonging to an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_delete_perm() function deletes the specified permission in perm_d from the permission set. This function does not return...

acl_dup(3) -- Creates a duplicate copy of the ACL

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_dup() function creates a copy of the designated ACL. Once created, this copy is independent of the original ACL.

acl_first_entry(3) -- Resets the current ACL entry to be the first ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_first_entry() function sets the internal ACL entry offset pointer of the specified ACL such that a subsequent call to ac...

acl_free(3) -- Releases an ACL internal working storage area for an ACL

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_free() function releases the system working storage area associated with the ACL indicated by the acl_d descriptor. This...

acl_free_qualifier(3) -- Frees the storage for the qualifier for an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_free_qualifier() function releases the storage space pointed to by the argument tag_qualifier_p. The type of this space ...

acl_free_text(3) -- Releases an ACL text working storage

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_free_text() function releases the allocated memory area associated with the ACL text indicated by the buf_p descriptor.

acl_from_text(3) -- Converts the textual representation of an ACL to an internal representation

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_from_text() function converts the textual representation of the ACL into the working storage internal representation use...

acl_get_entry(3) -- Returns a descriptor to an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_entry() function returns a pointer to the next entry in the specified ACL. Following a call to the acl_get_fd(), acl...

acl_get_fd(3) -- Retrieves the specified ACL associated with the specified file or directory

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_fd() function retrieves the specified ACL for the given file descriptor. The acl_tag_t field designates if the ACL b...

acl_get_file(3) -- Given the pathname to a file or directory, retrieve the designated ACL

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_file() function retrieves the designated ACL via a pathname. The type of ACL being retrieved is designated in acl_ty...

acl_get_permset(3) -- Retrieves a pointer to the permissions for a given ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_permset() function sets the permset_p parameter to point to the permission set of the designated entry. The permset_...

acl_get_qualifier(3) -- Retrieves the tag qualifier (ID) for an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_qualifier() function retrieves ACL entry tag qualifier, which is the user or group ID associated with the entry. If ...

acl_get_tag_type(3) -- Retrieves the entry tag type identifier for an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_get_tag_type() function retrieves the tag type for the ACL entry and stores it in a location pointed to by tag_type_p. T...

acl_init(3) -- Allocate and initialize ACL internal working storage

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_init() function allocates and initializes working storage for an ACL of at least size bytes. A pointer to the working st...

acl_set_fd(3) -- Sets the ACL on the file or directory designated by the file descriptor

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given a file descriptor to a file or directory, the acl_set_fd() function sets the designated ACL. The type of ACL being set is ...

acl_set_file(3) -- Sets the ACL on the file or directory designated by the path name

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given a path name to a file or directory, the acl_set_file() function sets the designated ACL. The type of ACL being set is dete...

acl_set_permset(3) -- Sets permissions in a given ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given a pointer to an ACL entry, the acl_set_permset() function sets the permissions. Any permissions in the ACL entry before th...

acl_set_qualifier(3) -- Sets the tag qualifier (UID or GID) on an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given an ACL entry, the acl_set_qualifier() function sets the id in the ACL entry. If the tag type of the given ACL entry is ACL...

acl_set_tag_type(3) -- Sets the tag type in an ACL entry

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given a pointer to an ACL entry, the acl_set_tag_type() function sets the ACL entry tag type.

acl_size(3) -- Determines the size of the contiguous, persistent representation of the given ACL

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given an ACL, the acl_size() function determines the number of bytes required for storing the ACL if converted to contiguous, pe...

acl_to_text(3) -- Converts an ACL to an ASCII string

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. Given an ACL the acl_to_text() function converts it into a NULL terminated ASCII character string. The acl_to_text() function al...

acl_valid(3) -- Checks an ACL for validity

NOTE: This function is based on Draft 13 of the POSIX P1003.6 standard. The acl_valid() function checks the ACL for validity. An ACL is invalid if one or more of the following conditions are violated:...

acos(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

The sin(), sinf(), and sinl() functions compute the sine of x, measured in radians. The sind(), sindf(), and sindl() functions compute the sine of x, measured in degrees. The cos(), cosf(), and cosl()...

acosd(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

acosh(3) -- Compute inverse hyperbolic functions

The asinh(), asinhf(), and asinhl() functions return the hyperbolic arc sine of x, in the range [-infinity, +infinity] where asinh(x) = ln(x+ sqrt(x**2 + 1)). The asinh() function is the inverse funct...

acreate(3) -- arena memory allocator

AC_AuthCompute(3) -- Compute authorization (CDSA)

This function performs an authorization computation and returns the results as a group of tuple certificates. The computation is based on the following input values: One or more items that identify th...

AC_PassThrough(3) -- Call exported module-specific operations (CDSA)

This function allows applications to call authorization computation module-specific operations that have been exported. Such operations might include queries or services specific to the domain represe...

addch(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

The addch, waddch, mvaddch, and mvwaddch routines put the character ch into the window at the current cursor position of the window and advance the position of the window cursor. Their function is sim...

addchnstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

All of these routines copy chstr directly into the window image structure starting at the current or specified cursor position. The four routines with n as the last argument copy at most n elements, b...

addchstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

addnstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

These routines write the characters of the character string str on the given window. The four routines with n as the last argument write at most n characters. For the other routines, the string should...

addnwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

These routines write all the characters of the wchar_t character string wstr on the given window. The four routines with n as the last argument write at most n wchar_t characters. For the routines wit...

addstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

addwch(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

The addwch, waddwch, mvaddwch, and mvwaddwch routines put the character wch, holding a wchar_t character, into the window at the current cursor position of the window and advance the position of the w...

addwchnstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

All of these routines copy wchstr, which points to a string of wchar_t characters, directly into the window image structure starting at the current or specified cursor position. The four routines with...

addwchstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

addwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

add_proplist_entry(3) -- adds an Extended File Attribute to the Extended File Attribute buffer

The add_proplist_entry() function initializes an Extended File Attribute buffer, pointed to by **bufptr, with the Extended File Attribute specified by the *name and *value parameters. The function can...

add_wch(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

The add_wch, wadd_wch, mvadd_wch, and mvwadd_wch functions put the complex character wch into the window at the current or specified cursor position, of the current or specified window, and advance th...

add_wchnstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

All of these functions copy wchstr, which points to an array of complex characters, directly into the current or specified window image structure starting at the current cursor position or the positio...

add_wchstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

adelete(3) -- arena memory allocator

advance(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

The compile(), advance(), and step() functions are used for general-purpose expression matching. The compile() function takes a simple regular expression as input and produces a compiled expression th...

advance_r(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

advfs_clonefset(3) -- Creates a read-only copy of an active fileset

This function makes a read-only copy (clone) of an active fileset without taking the fileset off line. When you create a clone fileset, it is a read-only snapshot of fileset data structures (metadata)...

advfs_get_fdmn_list(3) -- Get an AdvFS file domain list

Use this function to obtain information about the AdvFS file domains on a system. The function returns the information in the domainInfo[] array. The information is returned only for valid file domain...

advfs_get_file_attributes(3) -- Get the AdvFS attributes of a file

This function returns the AdvFS-specific attributes of the file specified by the fd parameter in the specified fileAttributes structure.

advfs_get_fset_list(3) -- Obtain a list of all the filesets in an AdvFS file domain

Use this function to obtain information about the filesets in an AdvFS file domain. Information about both mounted and unmounted filesets is returned. The function returns the information in the "fil...

advfs_get_fset_quotas(3) -- Obtains fileset quotas for an AdvFS fileset

This function obtains the fileset quotas for the fileset specified by the domainName and filesetName parameters and returns them in the structure specified in *filesetQuotas.

advfs_rmfset(3) -- Removes a fileset or a clone fileset

This function removes an AdvFS fileset from the named file domain. Once you have removed a fileset using this function, the fileset and its files are not recoverable. The only way to restore the files...

advfs_set_file_attributes(3) -- Set AdvFS file attributes

This function sets a file's AdvFS-specific attributes to the attributes that are defined in the specified fileAttributes structure. However, the function does not set any attributes that are marked a...

advfs_set_fset_quotas(3) -- Sets fileset quotas for an AdvFS fileset

This function associates the fileset quotas that are specified in the filesetQuotas structure with the fileset specified by the domainName and filesetName parameters. Note that the advfs_get_set_quota...

afree(3) -- arena memory allocator

aio_cancel(3) -- Cancels one or more asynchronous I/O requests pending against the specified file descriptor (P1003.1...

The aio_cancel function cancels asynchronous I/O requests. Normal signal delivery occurs for asynchronous I/O operations that are successfully canceled. If a request cannot be canceled, then the norma...

aio_error(3) -- Returns the error status of a specified asynchronous I/O operation (P1003.1b)

The aio_error function returns the error status associated with the aiocb structure referenced by the aiocbp argument. The error status is the errno value that is set by the corresponding asynchronous...

aio_group_completion_np(3) -- Enables the use of aio_results_np function

The aio_group_completion_np function enables an application to use aio group completion through the aio_results_np function. The function must be called before any other aio function. After this call,...

aio_read(3) -- Queues a single asynchronous read request

The aio_read function allows the calling process to asynchronously read aiocbp->aio_nbytes from the file associated with aiocbp->aio_fildes into the buffer pointed to by aiocbp->aio_buf. The aio_read ...

aio_results_np(3) -- Returns results for completed asynchronous I/O operations

The aio_results_np function suspends the calling process until at least howmany asynchronous I/O operations have completed, until a signal interrupts the function, or until a timeout interval, if spec...

aio_return(3) -- Returns the status of an asynchronous I/O operation (P1003.1b)

The aio_return function returns the number of bytes read or written by the corresponding asynchronous I/O function. The return status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the value that would be retur...

aio_suspend(3) -- Suspends the calling process until at least

The aio_suspend function suspends the calling process until at least one asynchronous I/O operation has completed, until a signal interrupts the function, or until a timeout interval, if specified, ha...

aio_write(3) -- Queues a single asynchronous write request (P1003.1b)

The aio_write function allows the calling process to asynchronously write aiocbp->aio_nbytes to the file, raw disk partition, or connected socket associated with aiocbp->aio_fildes from the buffer poi...

alarm(3) -- Sets or changes the timeout of interval timers.

The alarm() function is used to obtain notification of a timeout after the number of real-time seconds specified by the seconds parameter has elapsed. At some time after seconds seconds have elapsed, ...

alloca(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

The malloc() and free() functions provide a simple, general-purpose memory allocation package. Note See also the subsection "Using the densemalloc Library" for information on using libdensemalloc to...

alphasort(3) -- Scan or sorts directory contents

The scandir() function reads the directory pointed to by the dir_name parameter. It then uses the malloc() function to create an array of pointers to directory entries. The scandir() function returns ...

amallinfo(3) -- arena memory allocator

amalloc(3) -- arena memory allocator

amallocblksize(3) -- arena memory allocator

amallopt(3) -- arena memory allocator

ApplicationShell(3X) -- The ApplicationShell widget class

ApplicationShell is used as the main top-level window for an application. An application should have more than one ApplicationShell only if it implements multiple logical applications. Classes [Toc...

arealloc(3) -- arena memory allocator

asctime(3) -- converts time units

The asctime(), ctime(), gmtime(), localtime(), mktime(), and tzset() functions convert time values between tm structures, time_t type variables, and strings. [POSIX] The asctime_r(), ctime_r(), gmtime...

asctime_r(3) -- converts time units

asin(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

asind(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

asinh(3) -- Compute inverse hyperbolic functions

assert(3) -- Inserts program diagnostics

The assert() macro inserts diagnostics into programs. On execution, when the expression parameter is false (returns FALSE), this macro writes information about the particular call that failed, includi...

assign_cpu_to_pset(3) -- Assigns a processor to a processor set

The assign_cpu_to_pset() function removes processors from their current processor set and assigns them to the processor set specified by the pset_id variable. This function requires root privileges. I...

assign_pid_to_pset(3) -- Assigns a process identification number to a processor set

The assign_pid_to_pset() function assigns the process identification number specified by the pid_list variable to the processor set specified by the pset_id variable. This function requires root privi...

atan(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

atan2(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

atand(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

atand2(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

atanh(3) -- Compute inverse hyperbolic functions

atof(3) -- Converts a character

The atof() function converts, to a double floating-point value, the string pointed to by the nptr parameter - up to the first character that is inconsistent with the format of a floating-point number....

atoi(3) -- Convert a character string to the specified integer data type

The atoi(), atol(), strtol(), and strtoul() functions are used to convert a character string pointed to by the nptr parameter to an integer having a specified data type. The atoi() and atol() function...

atol(3) -- Convert a character string to the specified integer data type

attroff(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

These routines manipulate the current attributes of the current or specified window. The current attributes of a window are applied to all characters that are written into the window with waddch, wadd...

attron(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

attrset(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

attr_get(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

These functions manipulate the attributes and color of the window rendition of the current or specified window. The current attributes of a window are applied to all characters that are written into t...

attr_off(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

attr_on(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

attr_set(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

audgenl(3) -- generate an audit record

This routine is an interface to the audgen() system call. It accepts a variable number of arguments describing the event and audit data, then calls audgen() with the appropriate parameters to generate...

aud_sitevent(3) -- audit site event operations

Audit site events are specific to and defined by a particular installation. For example, an installation could have its own database program, and want to have it use the audit subsystem. To do so, the...

aud_sitevent_num(3) -- audit site event operations

authnone_create(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

The RPC routines allow C programs to make procedure calls on other machines across the network. First, the client calls a procedure to send a data packet to the server. Upon receipt of the packet, the...

authunix_create(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

authunix_create_default(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

auth_destroy(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

auth_for_terminal_es(3) -- determine whether a given user is authorized for login on a given terminal (Enhanced Security)

The auth_for_terminal_es() function determines whether the username associated with the prpwd parameter is authorized for logins on the terminal associated with the prtc parameter. The determination i...

basename(3) -- Return the base filename or directory portion of a pathname

The basename() and dirname() functions complement each other. The basename() function reads path and returns a pointer to the final component of the pathname, deleting any trailing / (slash) character...

baudrate(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

The baudrate routine returns the output speed of the terminal. The number returned is an integer that represents bits per second (for example, 9600). The erasechar routine returns the current erase ch...

bcmp(3) -- Perform memory operations

The bcopy(), bcmp(), and bzero() functions operate on variable length strings of bytes. Unlike the string functions, they do not check for null bytes. The bcopy() function copies the value of the leng...

bcopy(3) -- Perform memory operations

beep(3) -- Curses bell and screen flash routines

The beep and flash routines are used to alert the terminal user. The routine beep sounds the audible alarm on the terminal, if possible. If an audible alarm is not possible, the routine flashes the sc...

bessel(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

The j0(), j0f(), j0l(), j1(), j1f(), and j1l() functions return the value of the Bessel function of the first kind of orders 0 (zero) and 1, respectively. The jn(), jnf(), and jnl() functions return t...

BF_cbc_encrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

This library implements the Blowfish cipher, which was invented and described by Counterpane. See http://www.counterpane.com/blowfish.html. Blowfish is a block cipher that operates on 64-bit (8 byte) ...

BF_cfb64_encrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_decrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_ecb_encrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_encrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_ofb64_encrypt(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_options(3) -- Blowfish encryption

BF_set_key(3) -- Blowfish encryption

bindresvport(3) -- Bind a socket to a privileged IP port

The bindresvport() function is used to bind a socket descriptor to a privileged IP port, that is, a port number in the range 0-1023. The routine returns 0 if it is successful, otherwise -1 is returned...

bind_to_cpu(3) -- Bind execution to a specific CPU

Upon return from bind_to_cpu() or bind_to_cpu_id(), all threads of the target pid are running on the target CPU. Bound threads are not eligible for execution on any other CPU. You release CPU binding ...

bind_to_cpu_id(3) -- Bind execution to a specific CPU

bio(3) -- I/O abstraction

A BIO is an I/O abstraction. It hides many of the underlying I/O details from an application. If an application uses a BIO for its I/O it can transparently handle SSL connections, unencrypted network ...

BIO_append_filename(3) -- FILE bio

The BIO_s_file() function returns the BIO file method. As its name implies it is a wrapper round the stdio FILE structure and it is a source/sink BIO. Calls to BIO_read() and BIO_write() read and writ...

BIO_callback_ctrl(3) -- BIO control operations

The BIO_ctrl(), BIO_callback_ctrl(), BIO_ptr_ctrl(), and BIO_int_ctrl() functions are BIO control operations taking arguments of various types. These functions are not usually called directly; various...

BIO_ctrl(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_ctrl_get_read_request(3) -- Find out how many bytes were requested from the BIO

The BIO_ctrl_get_read_request() function returns the number of bytes that were last requested from bio by a BIO_read() operation. This is useful for BIO pairs, for example, so that the application kno...

BIO_ctrl_get_write_guarantee(3) -- BIO pair BIO

The BIO_s_bio() function returns the method for a BIO pair. A BIO pair is a pair of source/sink BIOs where data written to either half of the pair is buffered and can be read from the other half. Both...

BIO_ctrl_pending(3) -- Find out how many bytes are buffered in a BIO

The BIO_ctrl_pending() function returns the number of bytes buffered in a BIO.

BIO_ctrl_reset_read_request(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_ctrl_wpending(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_debug_callback(3) -- BIO callback functions

BIO_set_callback() and BIO_get_callback() set and retrieve the BIO callback, they are both macros. The callback is called during most high level BIO operations. It can be used for debugging purposes t...

BIO_destroy_bio_pair(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_do_accept(3) -- Accept BIO

The BIO_s_accept() function returns the accept BIO method. This is a wrapper round the platform's TCP/IP socket accept routines. Using accept BIOs, TCP/IP connections can be accepted and data transfe...

BIO_do_connect(3) -- Connect BIO

The BIO_s_connect() function returns the connect BIO method. This is a wrapper round the platform's TCP/IP socket connection routines. Using connect BIOs TCP/IP connections can be made and data trans...

BIO_eof(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_find_type(3) -- BIO chain traversal

The BIO_find_type() function searches for a BIO of a given type in a chain, starting at BIO b. If type is a specific type, such as BIO_TYPE_MEM, then a search is made for a BIO of that type. If type i...

BIO_flush(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_free(3) -- BIO allocation and freeing functions

The BIO_new() function returns a new BIO using method type. The BIO_set() function sets the method of an already existing BIO. The BIO_free() function frees up a single BIO. The BIO_vfree()function al...

BIO_free_all(3) -- BIO allocation and freeing functions

BIO_f_base64(3) -- BIO filter for base64

The BIO_f_base64() function returns the base64 BIO method. This is a filter BIO that base64 encodes any data written through it and decodes any data read through it. Base64 BIOs do not support the BIO...

BIO_f_buffer(3) -- Buffering BIO

The BIO_f_buffer() function returns the buffering BIO method. Data written to a buffering BIO is buffered and periodically written to the next BIO in the chain. Data read from a buffering BIO comes fr...

BIO_f_cipher(3) -- Cipher BIO filter

The BIO_f_cipher() function returns the cipher BIO method. This is a filter BIO that encrypts any data written through it, and decrypts any data read from it. It is a BIO wrapper for the EVP_CipherIni...

BIO_f_md(3) -- Message digest BIO filter

BIO_f_md() returns the message digest BIO method. This is a filter BIO that digests any data passed through it, it is a BIO wrapper for the EVP_DigestInit(), EVP_DigestUpdate(), and EVP_DigestFinal() ...

BIO_f_null(3) -- Null filter

BIO_f_null() returns the null filter BIO method. This is a filter BIO that does nothing. All requests to a null filter BIO are passed through to the next BIO in the chain. This means that a BIO chain ...

BIO_f_ssl(3) -- SSL BIO

The BIO_f_ssl() function returns the SSL BIO method. This is a filter BIO which is a wrapper round the OpenSSL SSL routines adding a BIO "flavor" to SSL I/O. I/O performed on an SSL BIO communicates...

BIO_gets(3) -- BIO I/O functions

The BIO_read() function attempts to read len bytes from BIO b and places the data in buf. The BIO_gets() function performs the BIOs gets operation and places the data in buf. Usually this operation wi...

BIO_get_accept_port(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_get_bind_mode(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_get_callback(3) -- BIO callback functions

BIO_get_callback_arg(3) -- BIO callback functions

BIO_get_cipher_ctx(3) -- Cipher BIO filter

BIO_get_cipher_status(3) -- Cipher BIO filter

BIO_get_close(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_get_conn_hostname(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_get_conn_int_port(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_get_conn_ip(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_get_conn_port(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_get_fd(3) -- File descriptor BIO

The BIO_s_fd() function returns the file descriptor BIO method. This is a wrapper around the platform's file descriptor routines, such as read() and write(). The BIO_read() and BIO_write() functions ...

BIO_get_fp(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_get_info_callback(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_get_md(3) -- Message digest BIO filter

BIO_get_md_ctx(3) -- Message digest BIO filter

BIO_get_mem_data(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_s_mem() return the memory BIO method function. A memory BIO is a source/sink BIO which uses memory for its I/O. Data written to a memory BIO is stored in a BUF_MEM structure which is extended as a...

BIO_get_mem_ptr(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_get_num_renegotiates(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_get_read_request(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_get_retry_BIO(3) -- BIO retry functions

These functions determine why a BIO is not able to read or write data. They will typically be called after a failed BIO_read() or BIO_write() call. The BIO_should_retry() function is true if the call ...

BIO_get_retry_reason(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_get_ssl(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_get_write_buf_size(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_get_write_guarantee(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_int_ctrl(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_make_bio_pair(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_new(3) -- BIO allocation and freeing functions

BIO_new_bio_pair(3) -- Create a new BIO pair

The BIO_new_bio_pair() function creates a buffering BIO pair. It has two endpoints between data can be buffered. Its typical use is to connect one endpoint as underlying input/output BIO to an SSL and...

BIO_new_buffer_ssl_connect(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_new_fd(3) -- File descriptor BIO

BIO_new_file(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_new_fp(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_new_mem_buf(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_new_socket(3) -- Socket BIO

The BIO_s_socket() function returns the socket BIO method. This is a wrapper around the platform's socket routines. BIO_read() and BIO_write() read or write the underlying socket. BIO_puts() is suppo...

BIO_new_ssl(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_new_ssl_connect(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_next(3) -- BIO chain traversal

BIO_pending(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_pop(3) -- Add and remove BIOs from a chain.

The BIO_push() function appends the BIO append to b. It returns b. The BIO_pop() function removes the BIO b from a chain and returns the next BIO in the chain. The return is NULL if there are no more ...

BIO_ptr_ctrl(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_push(3) -- Add and remove BIOs from a chain.

BIO_puts(3) -- BIO I/O functions

BIO_read(3) -- BIO I/O functions

BIO_read_filename(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_reset(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_retry_type(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_rw_filename(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_seek(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_set(3) -- BIO allocation and freeing functions

BIO_set_accept_bios(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_set_accept_port(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_set_bind_mode(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_set_callback(3) -- BIO callback functions

BIO_set_callback_arg(3) -- BIO callback functions

BIO_set_cipher(3) -- Cipher BIO filter

BIO_set_close(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_set_conn_hostname(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_set_conn_int_port(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_set_conn_ip(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_set_conn_port(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_set_fd(3) -- File descriptor BIO

BIO_set_fp(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_set_info_callback(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_set_md(3) -- Message digest BIO filter

BIO_set_mem_buf(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_set_mem_eof_return(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_set_nbio(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_set_nbio_accept(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_set_ssl(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_set_ssl_mode(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_set_write_buf_size(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_should_io_special(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_should_read(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_should_retry(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_should_write(3) -- BIO retry functions

BIO_shutdown_wr(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_ssl_copy_session_id(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_ssl_shutdown(3) -- SSL BIO

BIO_s_accept(3) -- Accept BIO

BIO_s_bio(3) -- BIO pair BIO

BIO_s_connect(3) -- Connect BIO

BIO_s_fd(3) -- File descriptor BIO

BIO_s_file(3) -- FILE bio

BIO_s_mem(3) -- Memory BIO

BIO_s_null(3) -- Null data sink

BIO_s_null() returns the null sink BIO method. Data written to the null sink is discarded; reads return EOF.

BIO_s_socket(3) -- Socket BIO

BIO_tell(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_vfree(3) -- BIO allocation and freeing functions

BIO_wpending(3) -- BIO control operations

BIO_write(3) -- BIO I/O functions

BIO_write_filename(3) -- FILE bio

bkgd(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

The bkgdset and wbkgdset routines manipulate the background of the named window. Background is defined as chtype and consists of any combination of attributes and a character. The attribute part of th...

bkgdset(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

bkgrnd(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

By using the information in wch, the bkgrndset and wbkgrndset functions set the background rendition and manipulate the window rendition of the current or specified window. These functions turn off th...

bkgrndset(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

blowfish(3) -- Blowfish encryption

bn(3) -- Multiprecision integer arithmetics

This library performs arithmetic operations on integers of arbitrary size. It was written for use in public key cryptography, such as RSA and Diffie-Hellman. It uses dynamic memory allocation for stor...

BN_add(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_add() function adds a and b and places the result in r (r=a+b). The r value can be the same BIGNUM as a or b. The BN_sub() function subtracts b from a and places the result in r (r=a-b). The BN...

BN_add_word(3) -- Arithmetic functions on BIGNUMs with integers

These functions perform arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs with unsigned integers. They are much more efficient than the normal BIGNUM arithmetic operations. The BN_add_word() function adds w to a (a+=w...

bn_add_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

This page describes the internal functions used by the OpenSSL BIGNUM implementation. They are described here to facilitate debugging and extending the library. They are not to be used by applications...

BN_bin2bn(3) -- Format conversions

The BN_bn2bin() function converts the absolute value of a into big-endian form and stores it at to. The to value must point to BN_num_bytes(a) bytes of memory. The BN_bin2bn() function converts the po...

BN_bn2bin(3) -- Format conversions

BN_bn2dec(3) -- Format conversions

BN_bn2hex(3) -- Format conversions

BN_bn2mpi(3) -- Format conversions

bn_check_top(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_clear(3) -- Allocate and free BIGNUMs

The BN_new() function allocates and initializes a BIGNUM structure. The BN_init() function initializes an existing uninitialized BIGNUM. The BN_clear() function is used to destroy sensitive data such ...

BN_clear_bit(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_clear_free(3) -- Allocate and free BIGNUMs

BN_cmp(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

The BN_cmp() function compares the numbers a and b. The BN_ucmp() function compares their absolute values. The BN_is_zero(), BN_is_one(), and BN_is_word() test if a equals 0, 1, or w respectively. The...

bn_cmp_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_copy(3) -- Copy BIGNUMs

The BN_copy() function copies from to to. The BN_dup() function creates a new BIGNUM containing the value from.

BN_CTX_end(3) -- Use temporary BIGNUM variables

These functions are used to obtain temporary BIGNUM variables from a BN_CTX (which can been created by using the BN_CTX_new() function) in order to save the overhead of repeatedly creating and freeing...

BN_CTX_free(3) -- Allocate and free BN_CTX structures

A BN_CTX is a structure that holds BIGNUM temporary variables used by library functions. Since dynamic memory allocation to create BIGNUMs is rather expensive when used in conjunction with repeated su...

BN_CTX_get(3) -- Use temporary BIGNUM variables

BN_CTX_init(3) -- Allocate and free BN_CTX structures

BN_CTX_new(3) -- Allocate and free BN_CTX structures

BN_CTX_start(3) -- Use temporary BIGNUM variables

BN_dec2bn(3) -- Format conversions

BN_div(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_div_recp(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

The BN_mod_mul_reciprocal() function can be used to perform an efficient BN_mod_mul() operation when the operation will be performed repeatedly with the same modulus. It computes r=(a*b)%m using recp=...

BN_div_word(3) -- Arithmetic functions on BIGNUMs with integers

bn_div_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_dump(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_dup(3) -- Copy BIGNUMs

The BN_copy() function copies from to to. The BN_dup() function creates a new BIGNUM containing the value from.

BN_exp(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

bn_expand(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_expand2(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_fix_top(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_free(3) -- Allocate and free BIGNUMs

BN_from_montgomery(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

These functions implement Montgomery multiplication. They are used automatically when BN_mod_exp() is called with suitable input, but they may be useful when several operations are performed using the...

BN_gcd(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_generate_prime(3) -- Generate primes and test for primality

The BN_generate_prime() function generates a pseudo-random prime number of num bits. If ret is not NULL, it will be used to store the number. If callback is not NULL, it is called as follows: callback...

BN_get_word(3) -- BIGNUM assignment operations

The BN_zero(), BN_one(), and BN_set_word() functions set a to the values 0, 1 and w respectively. BN_zero() and BN_one() are macros. The BN_value_one() function returns a BIGNUM constant of value 1. T...

BN_hex2bn(3) -- Format conversions

BN_init(3) -- Allocate and free BIGNUMs

bn_internal(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_is_bit_set(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_is_odd(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

BN_is_one(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

BN_is_prime(3) -- Generate primes and test for primality

BN_is_prime_fasttest(3) -- Generate primes and test for primality

BN_is_word(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

BN_is_zero(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

BN_lshift(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_lshift1(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_mask_bits(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_mod(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_mod_exp(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_mod_inverse(3) -- Compute inverse modulo n

The BN_mod_inverse() function computes the inverse of a modulo n and places the result in r ((a*r)%n==1). If r is NULL, a new BIGNUM is created. The ctx is a previously allocated BN_CTX used for tempo...

BN_mod_mul(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_mod_mul_montgomery(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

BN_mod_word(3) -- Arithmetic functions on BIGNUMs with integers

BN_MONT_CTX_copy(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_MONT_CTX_free(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_MONT_CTX_init(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_MONT_CTX_new(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_MONT_CTX_set(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_mpi2bn(3) -- Format conversions

BN_mul(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

bn_mul_add_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_comba4(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_comba8(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_high(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_low_normal(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_low_recursive(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_normal(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_part_recursive(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_mul_recursive(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_mul_word(3) -- Arithmetic functions on BIGNUMs with integers

bn_mul_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_new(3) -- Allocate and free BIGNUMs

BN_num_bits(3) -- Get BIGNUM size

These functions return the size of a BIGNUM in bytes or bits, and the size of an unsigned integer in bits. BN_num_bytes() is a macro.

BN_num_bits_word(3) -- Get BIGNUM size

These functions return the size of a BIGNUM in bytes or bits, and the size of an unsigned integer in bits. BN_num_bytes() is a macro.

BN_num_bytes(3) -- Get BIGNUM size

These functions return the size of a BIGNUM in bytes or bits, and the size of an unsigned integer in bits. BN_num_bytes() is a macro.

BN_one(3) -- BIGNUM assignment operations

bn_print(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_print(3) -- Format conversions

BN_print_fp(3) -- Format conversions

BN_pseudo_rand(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

The BN_rand() function generates a cryptographically strong pseudo-random number of bits in length and stores it in rnd. If top is -1, the most significant bit of the random number can be zero. If top...

BN_rand(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

BN_RECP_CTX_free(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

BN_RECP_CTX_init(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

BN_RECP_CTX_new(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

BN_RECP_CTX_set(3) -- Modular multiplication using reciprocal

BN_rshift(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_rshift1(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

BN_set_bit(3) -- Bit operations on BIGNUMs

The BN_set_bit() function sets bit n in a to 1 (a|=(1<

bn_set_high(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_set_low(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_set_max(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_set_word(3) -- BIGNUM assignment operations

BN_sqr(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

bn_sqr_comba4(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_sqr_comba8(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_sqr_normal(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_sqr_recursive(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

bn_sqr_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_sub(3) -- Arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs

BN_sub_word(3) -- Arithmetic functions on BIGNUMs with integers

bn_sub_words(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_to_montgomery(3) -- Montgomery multiplication

BN_ucmp(3) -- BIGNUM comparison and test functions

BN_value_one(3) -- BIGNUM assignment operations

bn_wexpand(3) -- BIGNUM library internal functions

BN_zero(3) -- BIGNUM assignment operations

border(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

The border, wborder, and box routines draw a border around the edges of the window. Each of the following arguments contains both a character and attributes for a particular part of the border: Left s...

border_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

The border_set and wborder_set functions draw a border around the edges of the current or specified window. These functions do not advance the cursor position, do not perform special character process...

box(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

box_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

bsearch(3) -- Performs a binary search

The bsearch() function does a binary search and returns a pointer in an array that indicates where an object is found. The compar comparison function is called with two parameters that point to object...

btowc(3) -- Convert a single byte from multibyte-character to

The btowc() function determines if a single-byte value constitutes a valid character in the initial shift state from a multibyte codeset. If so, the function returns the corresponding wide-character v...

btree(3) -- btree database access method

The routine dbopen() is the library interface to database files. One of the supported file formats is btree files. The general description of the database access methods is in dbopen(3), this referenc...

buffer(3) -- Simple character arrays structure

The buffer library handles simple character arrays. Buffers are used for various purposes in the library, most notably memory BIOs. The library uses the BUF_MEM structure defined in buffer.h: typedef ...

BUF_MEM_free(3) -- Simple character arrays structure

BUF_MEM_grow(3) -- Simple character arrays structure

BUF_MEM_new(3) -- Simple character arrays structure

BUF_strdup(3) -- Simple character arrays structure

bzero(3) -- Perform memory operations

cabs(3) -- Calculate Euclidean distance and absolute value

The hypot(), hypotf(), and hypotl() functions compute the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle, where x and y represent the perpendicular sides of the triangle. The hypot(x,y), hypotf(x,y) and...

calloc(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

callrpc(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

These routines allow C programs to make procedure calls on other machines across the network. First, the client calls a procedure to send a data packet to the server. Upon receipt of the packet, the s...

can_change_color(3) -- Curses

The Curses library includes routines that manipulate color-on-color alphanumeric terminals. To use these routines, applications must call start_color, usually right after initscr. Colors are always us...

catclose(3) -- Close a specified message catalog

The catclose() function closes the message catalog identified by cat_descriptor. Before exiting, programs should close any message catalogs they have opened. If a program accesses several message cata...

catgets(3) -- Retrieve a message from a catalog

The catgets() function retrieves a message from a catalog after a successful call to the catopen() function. If the catgets() function finds the specified message, a pointer to the message text is ret...

catopen(3) -- Opening a message catalog

The catopen() function opens a specified message catalog and returns a catalog descriptor that is used by the catgets() function to retrieve messages from the catalog. The name parameter specifies the...

cbreak(3) -- Curses

The cbreak and nocbreak routines put the terminal into and out of cbreak mode, respectively. In this mode, characters typed by the user are immediately available to the program, and erase/kill charact...

cbrt(3) -- Square and cube root functions

sqrt(), sqrtf(), and sqrtl() compute the rounded square root of x. For platforms supporting a signed zero, sqrt (-0) = 0. cbrt(), cbrtf(), and cbrtl() return the rounded cube root of y. --------------...

ccos(3) -- Complex functions

These functions can only be called from languages that support the double_complex and float_complex data types. csin() and csinf() compute the sine of a complex number. ccos() and ccosf() return the c...

cdiv(3) -- Complex functions

cdsa(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

CDSA is a multiplatform, industry standard security infrastructure. It provides a standards-based, stable programming interface that applications can use to access operating system security services, ...

CDSA(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

cdsa_intro(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

CDSA_intro(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

cd_cdrec(3) -- reads the Directory Record from a CDROM directory

The cd_drec routine fills the *drec structure with the contents of the Directory Record that is associated with a file or directory pointed to by *path. The cd_cdrec function copies the complete Direc...

cd_cptrec(3) -- reads the Path Table Record from the

The cd_ptrec() routine fills the *ptrec structure with the contents of the Path Table Record associated with the directory that is pointed to by *path. The cd_cptrec() function copies the complete Pat...

cd_cpvd(3) -- reads the Primary Volume Descriptor from

The function cd_pvd() fills the *pvd structure with the contents of the Primary Volume Descriptor from the CD-ROM. To execute this function successfully, the user must have read or execute permission ...

cd_cxar(3) -- reads the Extended Attribute Record for

The cd_xar() routine fills the *xar structure with the contents of the Extended Attribute Record (XAR) that is associated with the file or directory pointed to by *path. The total number of logical bl...

cd_defs(3) -- sets or gets default values for the User or Group ID, or for file or directory permissions

The cd_defs() routine sets or gets the default values for UIDs, GIDs, or file or directory permissions for a mounted CD-ROM.

cd_drec(3) -- reads the Directory Record from a CDROM directory

cd_getdevmap(3) -- get mappings of major/minor numbers of a

This function gets the major and minor numbers of one device file on a mounted Rock Ridge format CD-ROM. The argument path points to a file or directory within the CDROM file hierarchy. The argument i...

cd_idmap(3) -- sets or gets mappings of User and Group IDs on

The cd_idmap() routine sets or gets the mapping of UIDs or GIDs for a mounted CD-ROM.

cd_nmconv(3) -- sets or gets CD-ROM file name conversions

The cd_nmconv() routine sets of gets the name conversion *flag for file names on a mounted CD-ROM.

cd_ptrec(3) -- reads the Path Table Record from the

cd_pvd(3) -- reads the Primary Volume Descriptor from

cd_setdevmap(3) -- set mappings of major/minor numbers of a

The cd_setdevmap()function sets or unsets (based on cmd) the major and minor numbers of one device file on a mounted Rock Ridge format CD-ROM. The argument path points to a file or directory within th...

cd_suf(3) -- read System Use Field from a specified System Use

The cd_suf() function returns a System Use Field in the System Use Area for path.

cd_type(3) -- determines the type of file system recorded on a

The cd_type() routine determines the type of file system recorded on the CD-ROM pointed to by *path.

cd_xar(3) -- reads the Extended Attribute Record for

ceil(3) -- Round floatingpoint

The floor(), floorf(), and floorl() functions return the largest floating-point integer value less than or equal to x. The ceil(), ceilf(), and ceill() functions return the smallest floating-point int...

cexp(3) -- Complex functions

cfgetispeed(3) -- Get the input baud rate for a terminal

The cfgetispeed() function extracts the input baud rate from the termios structure to which the termios_p parameter points. This function returns exactly the value in the termios structure, without in...

cfgetospeed(3) -- Get the output baud rate for a terminal

The cfgetospeed() function extracts the output baud rate from the termios structure to which the termios_p parameter points. This function returns exactly the value in the termios data structure, with...

cfg_connect(3) -- connect to the configuration management server on a remote host

Before your application can perform operations on remote kernel subsystems, it must call the cfg_connect() routine. This routine invokes the configuration management server and establishes a socket co...

cfg_disconnect(3) -- remove the connection to a remote configuration management server

Once your application is finished using a remote configuration management server, it should call the cfg_disconnect() routine. This routine closes sockets and stops execution of the configuration mana...

cfg_psm_catadd(3) -- Perform category operations on the Process Set Manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds the categ...

cfg_psm_catget(3) -- Perform category operations on the Process Set Manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds the categ...

cfg_psm_catops(3) -- Perform category operations on the Process Set Manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds the categ...

cfg_psm_catrem(3) -- Perform category operations on the Process Set Manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds the categ...

cfg_psm_memadd(3) -- Perform member operations on the Process Set manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds a process...

cfg_psm_memget(3) -- Perform member operations on the Process Set manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds a process...

cfg_psm_memops(3) -- Perform member operations on the Process Set manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds a process...

cfg_psm_memrem(3) -- Perform member operations on the Process Set manager (PSM) set

Refer to PSM(4) for a description of the Process Set Manager, which supports the functions described in this reference page. Functions [Toc] [Back] Use these functions as follows: Adds a process...

cfg_subsys_config(3) -- configure a subsystem

To initially configure a subsystem into the kernel, call the cfg_subsys_config() routine. If the subsystem is not loaded into the kernel, this routine loads the subsystem. The routine then configures ...

cfg_subsys_defaults(3) -- determine the /etc/sysconfigtab value for selected attributes of a subsystem

Use the cfg_subsys_defaults() routine to get information about the value assigned to attributes in the /etc/sysconfigtab database. You can request information about one or more attributes, but you can...

cfg_subsys_defaults_all(3) -- determine the /etc/sysconfigtab value for all attributes of a subsystem

Use the cfg_subsys_defaults_all() routine to get the value of all attributes of a subsystem as specified in the /etc/sysconfigtab database. For information about the /etc/sysconfigtab database, see sy...

cfg_subsys_list(3) -- determine the names and states of all subsystems registered on the system

Use the cfg_subsys_list() routine to determine the names of subsystems available on the system and the current state of those subsystems. The subsys array returns NULL terminated subsystem names of le...

cfg_subsys_op(3) -- perform a subsystem-specific operation

Use the cfg_subsys_op() routine to request that the system perform subsystem-specific operations. These operations are defined by the subsystem. When your application calls the cfg_subsys_op() routine...

cfg_subsys_query(3) -- determine the value of selected subsystem attributes

Use the cfg_subsys_query() routine to get information about a list of subsystem attributes. You can get information about one or more attributes. When your application calls the cfg_subsys_query() rou...

cfg_subsys_query_all(3) -- determine the value of all attributes for a subsystem

Use the cfg_subsys_query_all() routine to get information about all the attributes for a particular subsystem. When your application calls the cfg_subsys_query_all() routine, it passes the name of the...

cfg_subsys_reconfig(3) -- reconfigure attribute values for a subsystem

Use the cfg_subsys_reconfig() routine to modify attribute values for a subsystem. The modifications made by this routine take effect immediately because they are made to the in-memory copy of the subs...

cfg_subsys_state(3) -- determine the state of the named subsystem

Use the cfg_subsys_state() routine to determine the state of a particular subsystem. Subsystems can be loaded, loaded and configured, or unloaded. (Subsystems must be loaded to be configured.) In addi...

cfg_subsys_unconfig(3) -- unconfigure a subsystem

When a subsystem is not needed, you can use the cfg_subsys_unconfig() routine to unconfigure the subsystem. If the subsystem is loadable, it is unloaded from the kernel. When a subsystem is unloaded, ...

cfsetispeed(3) -- Set input baud rate for a terminal

The cfsetispeed() function sets the input baud rate stored in the structure pointed to by the termios_p parameter to the value specified by the speed parameter. If the input baud rate is set to 0 (zer...

cfsetospeed(3) -- Set the output baud rate for a terminal

The cfsetospeed() function sets the output baud rate stored in the structure pointed to by the termios_p parameter to the speed specified by the speed parameter. The zero baud rate, B0, is used to ter...

check_auth_parameters(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

The identity functions provide a way to recall the IDs of a process at the time the program started. They are useful when interrogating the invoking environment of a program after any setuid() or setg...

check_usage(3) -- checks whether a disk partition is in use

The check_usage() function checks whether the special device file is in use, that is, whether it contains a valid file system, is part of LSM, or is being used by a database or for swap space. If the ...

chgat(3) -- Change renditions of characters in a Curses window

These functions change the renditions of the next n characters in the current or specified window (or of the remaining characters on the line if n is -1), starting at the current or specified cursor p...

class_add(3) -- add a member to an existing scheduling class

This routine adds a member to an existing scheduling class. If the member is found in another class, the member will be moved to the new class if force is TRUE. Note that the calling process must have...

class_change(3) -- change the allotted resources of an existing scheduling class

The class_change() routine changes the limits of the CPU resources that an existing class is allowed to use. If the requested percentage would cause the total resource percentage of all classes to exc...

class_change_name(3) -- change the name of an existing class

Changes the name of an existing class. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_close(3) -- close the class database file

The class_close() routine is used on application exit to close the class database file. The calling process must have root access privileges.

class_configure(3) -- set or change class database configuration parameters

Set or change the class scheduler database configuration parameters. If no database exists, one will be created. No (NULL) inputs for all parameters will create a database with the default values. If ...

class_create(3) -- create a new scheduling class

Create a new class. The created class will be empty. Use class_add() to populate the class. If the requested percentage causes the total percentage of all classes to exceed 100%, the call will fail an...

class_database_file_exists(3) -- determines if the database exists

This function determines if the class scheduler database exists on disk. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_database_modified(3) -- determines if the database has changed

The class_database_modified() function determines whether the database has changed since the last disk update. The intended use of this function is to determine whether class_save_database() should be...

class_database_name(3) -- gets the name of the current database

This function gets the name of the current class scheduling database. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_delete(3) -- remove a member from an existing scheduling class

Remove a member from an existing class. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_destroy(3) -- destroy an existing class

Destroy an existing class. If the class is not empty, the force parameter determines the action. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_disable(3) -- disable class scheduling.

Disables class scheduling (if currently enabled) on the partition described by handle. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_enable(3) -- enable class scheduling

Enables class scheduling (if not already enabled). Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_get_classes(3) -- get classes for a class scheduling database

This function returns classes in a class scheduling database. The structure class_info is the list of classes. A NULL list entry indicates the end of the list. Note that the calling process must have ...

class_get_class_members(3) -- get the membership information of a class

This function returns members belonging to the specified scheduling class. The structure class_member_info is the list of class members. A NULL list entry indicates the end of the list. Note that the ...

class_get_config_stats(3) -- return database configuration information

This function returns the configuration parameters of the current class scheduling database for the specified partition. If no database exists, the default configuration values are returned. Note that...

class_index_to_name(3) -- gets the class name given the class index

Given the class index, this call returns the class name. Note that the calling process must have root access privileges.

class_load_database(3) -- load a new database

This function loads a new class scheduling database into memory. If class scheduling has been enabled, the changes take effect immediately. If the current in-memory database has been modified and not ...

class_open(3) -- initialize the class scheduling database

The class_open() function is used to prepare the class database for use as follows: Opening the disk file (if required) Creating (or attaching to) a shared memory section Creating (or attaching to) a ...

class_restore_database(3) -- restore the in-memory class database from disk

After making updates to the in-memory database, the application can cancel the updates by restoring the on-disk version with this routine. Note that the calling process must have root access privilege...

class_save_database(3) -- write the in-memory class database to disk

The class scheduler database is shared in memory by the class_admin command, the class scheduler daemon, and the runclass command. Administrative changes (such as adding a gid to a class) need to be s...

clear(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

The erase and werase routines copy blanks to every position in the window. The clear and wclear routines are similar to erase and werase but also call clearok. The result is that the screen is cleared...

clearenv(3) -- Clears the process environment

The clearenv() function clears the process environment. No environment variables are defined immediately after a call to clearenv(). The clearenv() function sets the value of the external variable env...

clearerr(3) -- Clear indicators on a stream

The clearerr() function resets the error indicator and the EOF indicator for the stream specified by the stream parameter.

clearok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

These routines set options that deal with output within Curses. Unless stated otherwise, all options are initially FALSE. It is not necessary to turn these options off before calling endwin. The clear...

clntraw_create(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnttcp_create(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clntudp_bufcreate(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clntudp_create(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_broadcast(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_call(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_control(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_create(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_destroy(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_freeres(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_geterr(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_pcreateerror(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_perrno(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_perror(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_spcreateerror(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_sperrno(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clnt_sperror(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

clock(3) -- Report CPU time used

The clock() function reports the amount of processor time used by the calling process and each of its terminated child processes for which a wait function has been executed. When a child process does ...

clock_getres(3) -- Gets the resolution for the specified clock (P1003.1b)

The clock_getres function returns the resolution value for the specified clock. If the res argument is NULL, the clock resolution is not returned.

clock_gettime(3) -- Obtains or sets the time for the specified clock (P1003.1b)

The clock_gettime function returns the current time (in seconds and nanoseconds) for the specified clock. The clock_settime function sets the specified clock. The CLOCK_REALTIME clock measures the amo...

clock_settime(3) -- Obtains or sets the time for the specified clock (P1003.1b)

clog(3) -- Complex functions

closedir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

The opendir() function opens the directory designated by the dir_name parameter and associates a directory stream with it. The directory stream is positioned at the first entry. The type DIR, which is...

closelog(3) -- Control system log

The syslog() function writes messages to the system log maintained by the syslogd daemon. The syslogd daemon reads messages and writes them to the system console or to a log file, or forwards them to ...

closelog_r(3) -- Control system log

clrtobot(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

clrtoeol(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

clu_free_info(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

When called from a member of a cluster, the clu_info() function returns specific cluster status information when the following options are specified: CLU_INFO_MEMBSTATE - returns the following informa...

clu_free_memb(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

clu_get_info(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

clu_get_memb_by_id(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

clu_get_memb_by_name(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

clu_info(3) -- Gets information about a cluster and its members

clu_is_member(3) -- Determine whether the local system is currently a cluster member or has been configured to be a clus...

The clu_is_member() function determines whether the local system is currently a cluster member (that is, the TruCluster Server software has been installed and configured, the system has booted a clust...

clu_is_ready(3) -- Determine whether the local system is currently a cluster member or has been configured to be a clus...

CL_CertAbortCache(3) -- Terminate a certificate cache handle (CDSA)

CL_CertAbortQuery(3) -- Terminate a results handle (CDSA)

This function terminates a results handle used to access multiple certificate fields identified by a single OID. The ResultsHandle was created and returned by CSSM_CL_CertGetFirstFieldValue() (CSSM AP...

CL_CertCache(3) -- Cache a copy of a certificate (CDSA)

This function caches a copy of a certificate for subsequent accesses using the functions CSSM_CL_CertGetFirstCachedFieldValue() (CSSM API), or CL_CertGetFirstCachedFieldValue() (CL SPI), and CSSM_CL_C...

CL_CertCreateTemplate(3) -- Allocate and initialize memory for a certificate template (CDSA)

This function allocates and initializes memory for an encoded certificate template output in CertTemplate->Data. The template values are specified by the input OID/value pairs contained in CertFields....

CL_CertDescribeFormat(3) -- Return a list of the CSSM_OID values (CDSA)

This function returns a list of the CSSM_OID values this certificate library module uses to name and reference fields of a certificate. Multiple CSSM_OID values can correspond to a single field. These...

CL_CertGetAllFields(3) -- Return a list of input certificate values (CDSA)

This function returns a list of the values stored in the input certificate.

CL_CertGetAllTemplateFields(3) -- Extract and return values stored in CertTemplate (CDSA)

This function extracts and returns a copy of the values stored in the encoded CertTemplate. The memory for the CertFields output is allocated by the service provider using the calling application's m...

CL_CertGetFirstCachedFieldValue(3) -- Return values from the cached certificate (CDSA)

This function returns a single structure containing a set of field values from the cached certificate identified by CertHandle. The selected fields are designated by the CSSM_OID CertField and returne...

CL_CertGetFirstFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of the certificate field (CDSA)

This function returns the value of the certificate field designated by the CSSM_OID CertField. The OID also identifies the data format for the field value returned to the caller. If multiple OIDs name...

CL_CertGetKeyInfo(3) -- Return the public key and integral information (CDSA)

This function returns the public key and integral information about the key from the specified certificate. The key structure returned is a compound object. It can be used in any function requiring a ...

CL_CertGetNextCachedFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of a certificate field (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a certificate field, when that field occurs multiple times in a certificate. Certificates with repeated fields (such as multiple signatures) have multiple field valu...

CL_CertGetNextFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of a certificate field (CDSA)

CL_CertGroupFromVerifiedBundle(3) -- Verify the signature of a bundle (CDSA)

This function accepts as input a certificate bundle (a codified and signed aggregation of the certificates in the group), verifies the signature of the bundle (if a signature is present), and returns ...

CL_CertGroupToSignedBundle(3) -- Convert a certificate group to a certificate bundle (CDSA)

This function accepts as input a certificate group (as an array of individual certificates) and returns a certificate bundle (a codified and signed aggregation of the certificates in the group). The c...

CL_CertSign(3) -- Sign a certificate (CDSA)

This function signs a certificate using the private key and signing algorithm specified in the CCHandle. The result is a signed, encoded certificate in SignedCert. The certificate field values are spe...

CL_CertVerify(3) -- Verify a signed certificate (CDSA)

This function verifies that the signed certificate has not been altered since it was signed by the designated signer. Only one signature is verified by this function. If the certificate to be verified...

CL_CertVerifyWithKey(3) -- Verify with a key (CDSA)

This function verifies that the CertToBeVerified parameter was signed using a specific private key and that the certificate has not been altered since it was signed using that private key. The public ...

CL_CrlAbortCache(3) -- Terminate a CRL cache handle (CDSA)

This function terminates a CRL cache handle created and returned by the function CSSM_CL_CrlCache() (CSSM API), or CL_CrlCache() (CL SPI). The Certificate Library module releases all cache space and s...

CL_CrlAbortQuery(3) -- Terminate a query (CDSA)

This function terminates the query initiated by CSSM_CL_CrlGetFirstFieldValue() or CSSM_CL_CrlGetFirstCachedFieldValue() function (or their CL SPI equivalents), and allows the CL to release all interm...

CL_CrlAddCert(3) -- Revoke an input certificate (CDSA)

This function revokes the input certificate by adding a record representing the certificate to the CRL. The values for the new entry in the CRL are specified by the list of OID/value input pairs. The ...

CL_CrlCache(3) -- Cache a copy of a certificate revocation list (CDSA)

This function caches a copy of a CertificateRevocationList (CRL) for subsequent accesses using the functions CSSM_CL_CrlGetFirstFieldValue() and CSSM_CL_CrlGetNextFieldValue() (or their CL SPI equival...

CL_CrlCreateTemplate(3) -- Create

This function creates an unsigned, memory-resident CRL. Fields in the CRL are initialized with the descriptive data specified by the OID/value input pairs. The specified OID/value pairs can initialize...

CL_CrlDescribeFormat(3) -- Return a list of the CSSM_OID values (CDSA)

This function returns a list of the CSSM_OID values the Certificate Library module uses to name and reference fields of a CRL. Multiple CSSM_OID values can correspond to a single field. These OIDs can...

CL_CrlGetAllCachedRecordFields(3) -- Return field values from a CRL record (CDSA)

This function returns all field values from a prelocated, cached CRL record. The scanned CRL record is identified by CrlRecordIndex, which is returned by the function CSSM_CL_IsCertInCachedCrl() (CSSM...

CL_CrlGetAllFields(3) -- Get the field values from the CRL (CDSA)

This function returns one or more structures. Each structure contains a set of field values from the encoded, packed CRL contained in Crl. Each structure is returned in the FieldValue entry of the CSS...

CL_CrlGetFirstCachedFieldValue(3) -- Get field values from the cached CRL (CDSA)

This function returns a single structure containing a set of field values from the cached CRL identified by CrlHandle parameter. The selected fields are designated by the CSSM_OID CrlField parameter a...

CL_CrlGetFirstFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the first CRL field (CDSA)

This function returns the value of the CRL field designated by the CSSM_OID CrlField. The OID also identifies the data format for the field value returned to the caller. If multiple OIDs name the same...

CL_CrlGetNextCachedFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the next cached CRL field (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a CRL field, when that field occurs multiple times in a CRL. CRLs with repeated fields (such as revocation records) have multiple field values corresponding to a sin...

CL_CrlGetNextFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the next CRL field (CDSA)

CL_CrlRemoveCert(3) -- Reinstate a certificate (CDSA)

This function reinstates a certificate by removing it from the specified CRL. The operation is valid only if the CRL has not been closed by the process of signing the CRL by executing CSSM_CL_CrlSign(...

CL_CrlSetFields(3) -- Set new field values (CDSA)

This function will set the fields of the input CRL to the new values, specified by the input OID/value pairs. If there is more than one possible instance of an OID (for example, as in an extension or ...

CL_CrlSign(3) -- Sign a CRL (CDSA)

This function signs a CRL using the private key and signing algorithm specified in the CCHandle parameter. The result is a signed, encoded certificate revocation list in SignedCrl. The unsigned CRL is...

CL_CrlVerify(3) -- Verify a signed CRL has not been altered (CDSA)

This function verifies that the signed CRL has not been altered since it was signed by the designated signer. It does this by verifying the digital signature over the fields specified by the VerifySco...

CL_CrlVerifyWithKey(3) -- Verify a CRL with a specific key (CDSA)

This function verifies that the CrlToBeVerified parameter was signed using a specific private key and that the certificate revocation list has not been altered since it was signed using that private k...

CL_FreeFields(3) -- Free fields (CDSA)

CL_FreeFieldValue(3) -- Free field data (CDSA)

This function frees the data specified by Value and Value->Data. CertOrCrlOid indicates the type of the data in Value. This function should be used only to free CSSM_DATA values returned from calls CS...

CL_IsCertInCachedCrl(3) -- Search cached CRL for a record (CDSA)

This function searches the cached CRL for a record corresponding to the certificate. The result of the search is returned in CertFound. The CRL and the records within the CRL must be digitally signed....

CL_IsCertInCrl(3) -- Search CRL for a certificate record (CDSA)

This function searches the CRL for a record corresponding to the certificate. The result of the search is returned in CertFound. The CRL and the records within the CRL must be digitally signed. This f...

CL_PassThrough(3) -- Extend certificate library functionality (CDSA)

This function allows applications to call certificate library module-specific operations. Such operations might include queries or services that are specific to the domain represented by the CL module...

cmul(3) -- Complex functions

COLORS(3) -- Curses

color_content(3) -- Curses

COLOR_PAIR(3) -- Curses

COLOR_PAIRS(3) -- Curses

color_set(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

compile(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

compile_r(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

complex(3) -- Complex functions

Composite(3X) -- The Composite widget class

Composite widgets are intended to be containers for other widgets and can have an arbitrary number of children. Their responsibilities (implemented either directly by the widget class or indirectly by...

confstr(3) -- Determine the current value of a specified system variable defined by a string value

The confstr() function allows an application to determine the current setting of certain system parameters, limits, or options that are defined by a string value. The function is mainly used by applic...

Constraint(3X) -- The Constraint widget class

Constraint widgets maintain additional state data for each child. For example, client-defined constraints on the child's geometry may be specified. When a constrained composite widget defines constra...

conv(3) -- Translate characters

The toascii(), tolower(), _tolower(), toupper(), and _toupper() functions translate all characters, including multibyte characters, to their specified character values. The toascii() function converts...

copydvagent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

The getesdvent(), getesdvnam(), and copyesdvent() functions each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the separated-out fields of an entry in the device assignment dat...

copyesdfent(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

The getesdfent(), getesdfnam(), and copyesdfent() functions each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the separated-out fields of a line in the system default database...

copyesdvent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

copyesfient(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

The getesfient(), getesfinam(), and copyesfient() functions each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the separated-out fields of a line in the file control database. ...

copyespwent(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

The getespwent(), getespwuid(), getespwnam(), and copyespwent() functions each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected pa...

copyestcent(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

The getestcent(), getestcnam(), and copyestcent() functions return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the separated-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database....

copysign(3) -- Related miscellaneous IEEE arithmetic functions.

The copysign(), copysignf(), and copysignl() functions return x with the same sign as y. IEEE 754 requires copysign(x,NaN), copysignf(x,NaN) and copysignl(x,NaN) to return +x or -x. The finite(), fini...

copywin(3) -- Overlap and manipulate overlapped Curses windows

The overlay and overwrite routines overlay srcwin on top of dstwin. The scrwin and dstwin parameters do not have to be the same size; Curses copies only the text in the region where the two windows ov...

Core(3X) -- The Core widget class

Core is the Xt Intrinsic base class for windowed widgets. The Object and RectObj classes provide support for windowless widgets. Classes [Toc] [Back] All widgets are built from Core. The class p...

cos(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

cosd(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

cosh(3) -- Hyperbolic functions

The sinh(), sinhf(), and sinhl() functions compute the hyperbolic sine of x. Both sinh(x), sinhf(x), and sinhl(x) are defined as (exp(x) - exp(-x))/2. The cosh(), coshf(), and coshl() functions comput...

cot(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

cotd(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

cpow(3) -- Complex functions

cpuaddset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

The cpusetops primitives manipulate sets of CPUs, by operating on data objects (of type cpuset_t) that are created by cpusetcreate(). The cpusetcreate() function allocates, and sets to empty, a CPU se...

cpuandset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpucopyset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpucountset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpudelset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpudiffset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpuemptyset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpufillset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpuisemptyset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpuismember(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpuorset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpusetcreate(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpusetdestroy(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpusetops(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpuxorset(3) -- Perform operations on CPU sets (libc library)

cpu_foreach(3) -- enumerate members of a CPU set (libc library)

The cpu_foreach() function scans the specified cpuset, starting at the position saved in the cursor parameter, for members of the set and returns the first member found. If the SET_CURSOR_FIRST flag i...

cpu_get_current(3) -- Return the caller's current CPU ID (libc library)

The cpu_get_current() function fetches the ID of the CPU on which the caller is executing.

cpu_get_info(3) -- Query CPU information for the platform (libc library)

The cpu_get_info() function returns the following information about the platform CPU configuration in the buffer pointed to by the info parameter: Revision number. Maximum number of CPUs supported by ...

cpu_get_max(3) -- Query CPU information for the platform (libc library)

cpu_get_num(3) -- Query CPU information for the platform (libc library)

cpu_get_rad(3) -- Queries the RAD associated with a CPU (libnuma library)

The cpu_get_rad() function returns the identifier of the Resource Affinity Domain (RAD) associated with the CPU specified by the cpu argument.

createlabel(3) -- creates a disk label structure for a disk device

The createlabel() function fills in the disk label structure pointed to by the disk parameter. The resulting disk label can then be written to the disk in order to label it. The function queries the d...

create_file_securely(3) -- Create a file in the authentication database (Enhanced Security)

The create_file_securely() routine creates a file as specified in the file control database, /etc/auth/system/files. It is more flexible than coding the discretionary attributes of the file, and a fur...

create_pset(3) -- Creates a processor set

The create_pset() function creates an empty processor set. Processes that are assigned to an empty processor set cannot run until a processor is assigned to the set. You must have root privileges.

crypt(3) -- DES encryption

The crypt() subroutine is the password encryption routine. It is based on the NBS Data Encryption Standard, with variations intended to frustrate use of hardware implementations of the DES for key sea...

crypt16(3) -- DES encryption

crypto(3) -- OpenSSL cryptographic library

The OpenSSL crypto library implements a wide range of cryptographic algorithms used in various Internet standards. The services provided by this library are used by the OpenSSL implementations of SSL,...

CRYPTO_destroy_dynlockid(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

OpenSSL can safely be used in multi-threaded applications provided that at least two callback functions are set. The locking_function(int mode, int n, const char *file, int line) is needed to perform ...

CRYPTO_get_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

Several OpenSSL structures can have application specific data attached to them. These functions are used internally by OpenSSL to manipulate application specific data attached to a specific structure....

CRYPTO_get_new_dynlockid(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_lock(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_num_locks(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_set_dynlock_create_callback(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_set_dynlock_destroy_callback(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_set_dynlock_lock_callback(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

CRYPTO_set_id_callback(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

CRYPTO_set_locking_callback(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

csfgss_pPtr(3) -- get a pointer to an OID or an OID set

The csfgss_pPtr() function takes a text string label and returns the address of the corresponding OID mechanism or OID mechanism set in static memory. The structure returned by this function must not ...

csf_gss_acq_user(3) -- acquire a user's credentials prior to initiating a security context

The csf_gss_acq_user() function is an extension that acquires user credentials using either secret-key or public-key authentication with DES or, optionally, DES3 encryption. This function constructs a...

csf_gss_get_context_options(3) -- Obtain information about a security context

The csf_gss_get_context_options() function is an extension that obtains information about a security context. The application must already have initiated the context, although the context need not be ...

csf_gss_get_OidAddress(3) -- Return a pointer to static storage that contains the requested OID

The csf_gss_get_OidAddress() function is an extension that returns a pointer to static storage that contains the requested OID. This function is the preferred alternative to csfgss_pPtr().

csf_gss_get_RfcOidSet(3) -- 0csf_gss_release_user

The csf_gss_release_user() function is an extension that frees the memory associated with a user context created by csf_gss_acq_user(). It can also be used to destroy the credentials cache. The applic...

csf_gss_inq_user(3) -- Extension that obtains information about a user context

Extension that obtains information about a user context. The context must be acquired beforehand using the csf_gss_acq_user() function. The information includes the name of the user and the security m...

csf_gss_release_user(3) -- Free memory associated with a user context

csf_gss_renew_cred(3) -- Extension that renews user credentials for the Kerberos 5 security mechanism

The csf_gss_renew_cred() function is an extension that renews user credentials for the Kerberos 5 security mechanism. All renewable tickets in the user's credentials cache for the specified credentia...

csin(3) -- Complex functions

CSP_DecryptData(3) -- Decrypt buffer data (CDSA)

This function decrypts all data contained in the set of input buffers using information in the context. The CSSM_QuerySize() (CSSM API), or CSP_QuerySize() (CSP SPI), function can be used to estimate ...

CSP_DecryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged decryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged decryption process by returning any remaining plain text not returned in the previous staged decryption call. The plain text is returned in a single buffer.

CSP_DecryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged decrypt function(CDSA)

This function initializes the staged decrypt function. The CSP can require that the cryptographic context include access credentials for authentication and authorization checks when using a private ke...

CSP_DecryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged decryption process (CDSA)

This function continues the staged decryption process over all data in the set of input buffers. There can be algorithm-specific and token-specific rules restricting the lengths of data in CSSM_Decryp...

CSP_DeriveKey(3) -- Derive new symmetric key (CDSA)

This function derives a new symmetric key using the context and/or information from the base key in the context. The CSP can require that the cryptographic context include access credentials for authe...

CSP_DigestData(3) -- Compute message digest (CDSA)

This function computes a message digest for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

CSP_DigestDataClone(3) -- Clone a staged message digest (CDSA)

This function clones a given staged message digest context with its cryptographic attributes and intermediate result.

CSP_DigestDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message digest function.

CSP_DigestDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message digest function.

CSP_EncryptData(3) -- Encrypts all buffer data (CDSA)

This function encrypts all data contained in the set of input buffers using information in the context. The CSSM_QuerySize() function can be used to estimate the output buffer size required. The minim...

CSP_EncryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged encryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged encryption process by returning any remaining cipher text not returned in the previous staged encryption call. The cipher text is returned in a single buffer.

CSP_EncryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged encrypt funciton (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged encrypt function. There may be algorithm-specific and token-specific rules restricting the lengths of data following data update calls making use of these paramete...

CSP_EncryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged encryption process (CDSA)

This function continues the staged encryption process over all data in the set of input buffers. There can be algorithm-specific and token-specific rules restricting the lengths of data in CSSM_Encryp...

CSP_EventNotify(3) -- Notify service module of a context event (CDSA)

This function is used to notify the service module of a context event related to a particular attach handle. Valid events include creation, deletion, or modification of a cryptographic context. The se...

CSP_FreeKey(3) -- Clean up keys (CDSA)

This function requests the cryptographic service provider to clean up any key material associated with the key, and to possibly delete the key from the CSP completely. This function also releases the ...

CSP_GenerateAlgorithmParams(3) -- Generate algorithm parameters (CDSA)

This function generates algorithm parameters for the specified context. These parameters include Diffie-Hellman key agreement parameters and DSA key generation parameters. In most cases the algorithm ...

CSP_GenerateKey(3) -- Generate a symmetric key (CDSA)

This function generates a symmetric key. The KeyUsage, and KeyAttr are used to initialize the keyheader for the newly created key. These values are not retained in the cryptographic Context, which con...

CSP_GenerateKeyPair(3) -- Generate an asymmetric key pair (CDSA)

This function generates an asymmetric key pair. The CSP may cache keying material associated with the new asymmetric keypair. When one or both of the keys are no longer in active use, the application ...

CSP_GenerateMac(3) -- Compute a message authentication code (CDSA)

This function computes a message authentication code for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

CSP_GenerateMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code function.

CSP_GenerateMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code function.

CSP_GenerateMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of computing a message authentication code (CDSA)

This function continues the staged process of computing a message authentication code over all data contained in the set of input buffers. The authentication code will be returned as a result of the f...

CSP_GenerateRandomfunction(3) -- Generate random data (CDSA)

This function generates random data.

CSP_GetOperationalStatistics(3) -- Get operational values of a subservice (CDSA)

Obtain the current operational values of a subservice. The information is returned in a structure of type CSSM_CSP_OPERATIONAL_STATISTICS. This information includes login status and available storage ...

CSP_GetTimeValue(3) -- Get a CSP time value (CDSA)

This function returns a time value maintained by a CSP. This feature will be supported primarily by hardware tokens with an onboard real time clock.

CSP_ObtainPrivateKeyFromPublicKey(3) -- Convert public key to private key (CDSA)

Given a public key this function returns a reference to the private key. The private key and its associated passphrase can be used as an input to any function requiring a private key value.

CSP_PassThrough(3) -- Extend crypto functionality (CDSA)

The CSSM_CSP_PassThrough() (CSSM API), or CSP_PassThrough() (CSP SPI), function is provided to allow CSP developers to extend the crypto functionality of the CSSM API.

CSP_QueryKeySizeInBits(3) -- Get CSP logical and effective sizes (CDSA)

This function queries a Cryptographic Service Provider (CSP) for the logical and effective sizes of a specified key. The cryptographic service provider (handle) and the key can be specified either in ...

CSP_QuerySize(3) -- Get size of the output data (CDSA)

This function queries for the size of the output data for a cryptographic operation. If the context is an encryption or decryption context type then the Encrypt parameter will determine which operatio...

CSP_RetrieveCounter(3) -- Get the value of a tamper resistant clock (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a tamper resistant clock/counter of the cryptographic device.

CSP_RetrieveUniqueId(3) -- Get identifier (CDSA)

This function returns an identifier that could be used to uniquely differentiate the cryptographic device from all other devices from the same vendor or different vendors.

CSP_SignData(3) -- Sign all buffer data (CDSA)

This function signs all data contained in the set of input buffers using the private key specified in the context. The CSP can require that the cryptographic context include access credentials for aut...

CSP_SignDataFinal(3) -- Complete the final stage of the sign data (CDSA)

This function completes the final stage of the sign data function.

CSP_SignDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged sign data (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged sign data function. For staged operations, a combination operation selecting both a digesting algorithm and a signing algorithm must be specified. The CSP can requ...

CSP_SignDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged signing process input buffer data (CDSA)

This function continues the staged signing process over all data contained in the set of input buffers. Signing is performed using the private key specified in the context.

CSP_UnwrapKey(3) -- Unwrap the wrapped key (CDSA)

This function unwraps the wrapped key using the context. The wrapped key can be a symmetric key or a private key. If the unwrapping algorithm is a symmetric algorithm, then a symmetric context must be...

CSP_VerifyData(3) -- Verify input buffer data (CDSA)

This function verifies all data contained in the set of input buffers based on the input signature. Verifying can include digesting the data and decrypting the digest (from the signature) or verifying...

CSP_VerifyDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged verify data function.

CSP_VerifyDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged verify data function. For staged operations, a combination operation selecting both a digesting algorithm and a verification algorithm must be specified.

CSP_VerifyDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged verification (CDSA)

This function continues the staged verification process over all data contained in the set of input. Verification will be based on the signature presented as input when finalizing the staged verificat...

CSP_VerifyDevice(3) -- Cause the cryptographic module to perform a self verification and integrity check (CDSA)

This function triggers the cryptographic module to perform self verification and integrity checking.

CSP_VerifyMac(3) -- Verify the message authentication code (CDSA)

This function verifies the message authentication code over all data contained in the set of input buffers based on the input signature.

CSP_VerifyMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code verification function.

CSP_VerifyMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code verification function.

CSP_VerifyMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of verifying the message authentication code (CDSA)

This function continues the staged process of verifying the message authentication code over all data in the set of input buffers. Verification will be based on the authentication code presented as in...

CSP_WrapKey(3) -- Wrap a key using the context (CDSA)

This function wraps the supplied key using the context. It allows a key to be exported from a CSP. Four types of wrapping exist: Wrap a symmetric key with a symmetric key. Wrap a symmetric key with an...

csqrt(3) -- Complex functions

CSSM_AC_PassThrough(3) -- Call exported module-specific operations (CDSA)

cssm_CcToHandle(3) -- Get the module attach handle (CDSA)

This function returns the module attach handle identifying the service module that is managing the specified cryptographic context. The entry point to this function is provided to a service module in ...

CSSM_ChangeKeyAcl(3) -- Edit a stored ACL associated with the target key (CDSA)

This function edits the stored ACL associated with the target key. The ACL is modified according to the edit mode and information provided in AclEdit. The caller must be authorized to modify the targe...

CSSM_ChangeKeyOwner(3) -- Change the owner of a key (CDSA)

This function takes a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE defining the new owner of the key.

CSSM_CL_CertAbortCache(3) -- Terminate a certificate cache handle (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertAbortQueryfunction(3) -- Terminate a results handle (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertCache(3) -- Cache a copy of a certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertCreateTemplate(3) -- Allocate and initialize memory for a certificate template (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertDescribeFormat(3) -- Return a list of the CSSM_OID values (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetAllFields(3) -- Return a list of input certificate values (CDSA)

This function returns a list of the values stored in the input certificate.

CSSM_CL_CertGetAllTemplateFields(3) -- Extract and return values stored in CertTemplate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetFirstCachedFieldValue(3) -- Return values from the cached certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetFirstFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of the certificate field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetKeyInfo(3) -- Return the public key and integral information (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetNextCachedFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of a certificate field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGetNextFieldValue(3) -- Return the value of a certificate field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGroupFromVerifiedBundle(3) -- Verify the signature of a bundle (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertGroupToSignedBundle(3) -- Convert a certificate group to a certificate bundle (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertSign(3) -- Sign a certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertVerify(3) -- Verify a signed certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CertVerifyWithKey(3) -- Verify with a key (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlAbortCache(3) -- Terminate a CRL cache handle (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlAbortQuery(3) -- Terminate a query (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlAddCert(3) -- Revoke an input certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlCache(3) -- Cache a copy of a certificate revocation list (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlCreateTemplate(3) -- Create

CSSM_CL_CrlDescribeFormat(3) -- Return a list of the CSSM_OID values (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetAllCachedRecordFields(3) -- Return field values from a CRL record (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetAllFields(3) -- Get the field values from the CRL (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetFirstCachedFieldValue(3) -- Get field values from the cached CRL (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetFirstFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the first CRL field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetNextCachedFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the next cached CRL field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlGetNextFieldValue(3) -- Get the value of the next CRL field (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlRemoveCert(3) -- Reinstate a certificate (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlSetFields(3) -- Set new field values (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlSign(3) -- Sign a CRL (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlVerify(3) -- Verify a signed CRL has not been altered (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_CrlVerifyWithKey(3) -- Verify a CRL with a specific key (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_FreeFields(3) -- Free fields (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_FreeFieldValue(3) -- Free field data (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_IsCertInCachedCrl(3) -- Search cached CRL for a record (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_IsCertInCrl(3) -- Search CRL for a certificate record (CDSA)

CSSM_CL_PassThrough(3) -- Extend certificate library functionality (CDSA)

CSSM_CSP_ChangeLoginAcl(3) -- Edit a stored CSP ACL login session (CDSA)

This function edits the stored ACL controlling login sessions for a cryptographic service provider (CSP). The ACL is modified according to the edit mode and information provided in AclEdit. The caller...

CSSM_CSP_ChangeLoginOwner(3) -- Define a new login owner (CDSA)

This function takes a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE describing the new login owner.

CSSM_CSP_CreateAsymmetricContext(3) -- Create an asymmetric encryption cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates an asymmetric encryption cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm identification number, a key, and padding. The cryptographic context handle is returned. The...

CSSM_CSP_CreateDeriveKeyContext(3) -- Create a cryptographic context to derive a symmetric key (CDSA)

This function creates a cryptographic context to derive a symmetric key, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm, the type of symmetric key to derive, the length of the derived key, and an optional seed...

CSSM_CSP_CreateDigestContext(3) -- Create a digest cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a digest cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP and an algorithm identification number. The cryptographic context handle is returned. The cryptographic context handle can...

CSSM_CSP_CreateKeyGenContext(3) -- Create a key generation cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a key generation cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm identification number, a pass phrase, a modulus size (for public or private keypair generation), a k...

CSSM_CSP_CreateMacContext(3) -- Create a message authentication code cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a message authentication code cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP, algorithm identification number, and a key. The cryptographic context handle is returned. The crypto...

CSSM_CSP_CreatePassThroughContext(3) -- Create a custom cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a custom cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP and a pointer to a custom input data structure. The cryptographic context handle is returned. The cryptographic context ha...

CSSM_CSP_CreateRandomGenContext(3) -- Create a random number generation cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a random number generation cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm identification number, a seed, and the length of the random number in bytes. The cryptogra...

CSSM_CSP_CreateSignatureContext(3) -- Create a signature cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a signature cryptographic context for sign and verify, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm identification number, a key, and an AccessCredentials structure. The AccessCredentia...

CSSM_CSP_CreateSymmetricContext(3) -- Create a symmetric encryption cryptographic context (CDSA)

This function creates a symmetric encryption cryptographic context, given a handle of a CSP, an algorithm identification number, a key, an initial vector, padding, and the number of encryption rounds....

CSSM_CSP_GetLoginAcl(3) -- Get description of CSP ACL entries (CDSA)

This function returns a description of zero or more ACL entries managed by the CSP and used to control login sessions with the CSP. The optional input SelectionTag parameter restricts the returned des...

CSSM_CSP_GetLoginOwner(3) -- Get login owner data (CDSA)

This function returns a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE describing the current login owner of the CSP.

CSSM_CSP_GetOperationalStatistics(3) -- Get operational values of a subservice (CDSA)

CSSM_CSP_Login(3) -- Log user in to the CSP (CDSA)

Logs the user in to the CSP, allowing for multiple login types.

CSSM_CSP_Logout(3) -- Terminate the login session (CDSA)

Terminates the login session associated with the specified CSP handle.

CSSM_CSP_ObtainPrivateKeyFromPublicKey(3) -- Convert public key to private key (CDSA)

Given a public key this function returns a reference to the private key. The private key and its associated passphrase can be used as an input to any function requiring a private key value.

CSSM_CSP_PassThrough(3) -- Extend crypto functionality (CDSA)

The CSSM_CSP_PassThrough() (CSSM API), or CSP_PassThrough() (CSP SPI), function is provided to allow CSP developers to extend the crypto functionality of the CSSM API.

CSSM_DecryptData(3) -- Decrypt buffer data (CDSA)

CSSM_DecryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged decryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged decryption process by returning any remaining plain text not returned in the previous staged decryption call. The plain text is returned in a single buffer.

CSSM_DecryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged decrypt function(CDSA)

CSSM_DecryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged decryption process (CDSA)

CSSM_DeleteContext(3) -- Free the context structure (CDSA)

This function frees the context structure allocated by any of the CSSM_Createxxxxx context functions.

CSSM_DeleteContextAttributes(3) -- Delete internal data (CDSA)

This function deletes internal data associated with the given attribute type of the context handle.

cssm_DeregisterManagerServices(3) -- Deregister manager services

This function is used by an elective module manager to deregister its function table with CSSM core services prior to termination. This function is invoked by an elective module manager only when exit...

CSSM_DeriveKey(3) -- Derive new symmetric key (CDSA)

CSSM_DigestData(3) -- Compute message digest (CDSA)

This function computes a message digest for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

CSSM_DigestDataClone(3) -- Clone a staged message digest (CDSA)

This function clones a given staged message digest context with its cryptographic attributes and intermediate result.

CSSM_DigestDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message digest function.

CSSM_DigestDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message digest function.

CSSM_DigestDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of digesting (CDSA)

This function continues the staged process of digesting all data contained in the set of input buffers. The resulting digest value will be returned as part of the staged digesting process.

CSSM_DL_Authenticate(3) -- Provide authentication credentials (CDSA)

This function allows the caller to provide authentication credentials to the DL module at a time other than data store creation, deletion, open, import, and export. AccessRequest defines the type of a...

CSSM_DL_ChangeDbAcl(3) -- Edit stored ACL (CDSA)

This function edits the stored ACL associated with the target data base identified by DLDBHandle.DBHandle. The ACL is modified according to the edit mode and information provided in AclEdit. The calle...

CSSM_DL_ChangeDbOwner(3) -- Define a new data base owner (CDSA)

This function takes a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE defining the new Owner of the Data Base.

CSSM_DL_CreateRelation(3) -- Create a new persistent relation (CDSA)

This function creates a new persistent relation of the specified type by inserting it into the specified data store. The pAttributeInfo and pIndexInfo specify the values contained in the new relation ...

CSSM_DL_DataAbortQuery(3) -- Terminate DL_DataGetFirst query (CDSA)

This function terminates the query initiated by DL_DataGetFirst() and allows a DL to release all intermediate state information associated with the query, and release any locks on the resource. The us...

CSSM_DL_DataDelete(3) -- Remove data record (CDSA)

This function removes the data record specified by the unique record identifier from the specified data store.

CSSM_DL_DataGetFirst(3) -- Get first data record (CDSA)

This function retrieves the first data record in the data store that matches the selection criteria. The selection criteria (including selection predicate and comparison values) is specified in the Qu...

CSSM_DL_DataGetFromUniqueRecordId(3) -- Get data record (CDSA)

This function retrieves the data record and attributes associated with this unique record identifier. The Attributes parameter can specify a subset of the attributes to be returned. If Attributes spec...

CSSM_DL_DataGetNext(3) -- Get next data record (CDSA)

This function returns the next data record referenced by the ResultsHandle. The ResultsHandle references a set of records selected by an invocation of the DataGetFirst function. The Attributes paramet...

CSSM_DL_DataInsert(3) -- Create new persistent data record (CDSA)

This function creates a new persistent data record of the specified type by inserting it into the specified data store. The values contained in the new data record are specified by the Attributes and ...

CSSM_DL_DataModify(3) -- Modify persistent data record (CDSA)

This function modifies the persistent data record identified by the UniqueRecordIdentifier. The modifications are specified by the Attributes and Data parameters. The ModifyMode indicates how the attr...

CSSM_DL_DbClose(3) -- Close open data store (CDSA)

This function closes an open data store.

CSSM_DL_DbCreate(3) -- Create and open new data store (CDSA)

This function creates and opens a new data store. The name of the new data store is specified by the input parameter DbName. The record schema for the data store is specified in the DBINFO structure. ...

CSSM_DL_DbDelete(3) -- Delete all records (CDSA)

This function deletes all records from the specified data store and removes all state information associated with that data store.

CSSM_DL_DbOpen(3) -- Open a data store (CDSA)

This function opens the data store with the specified logical name under the specified access mode. If user authentication credentials are required, they must be provided. Also, additional open parame...

CSSM_DL_DestroyRelation(3) -- Destroy an existing relation (CDSA)

This function destroys an existing relation of the specified type by removing its entry from the specified data store.

CSSM_DL_FreeNameList(3) -- Free the list of the logical data store names (CDSA)

This function frees the list of the logical data store names that was returned by CSSM_DL_GetDbNames.

CSSM_DL_FreeUniqueRecord(3) -- Free data store memory (CDSA)

This function frees the memory associated with the data store unique record structure.

CSSM_DL_GetDbAcl(3) -- Get ACL description (CDSA)

This function returns a description of zero or more ACL entries managed by the data storage service provider module and associated with the target database identified by DLDBHandle.DBHandle. The optio...

CSSM_DL_GetDbNameFromHandle(3) -- Get data source name (CDSA)

This function retrieves the data source name corresponding to an opened data store handle.

CSSM_DL_GetDbNames(3) -- Get list of logical data store names (CDSA)

This function returns the list of logical data store names for all data stores that are known by and accessible to the specified DL module. This list also includes the number of data store names in th...

CSSM_DL_GetDbOwner(3) -- Get data base owner (CDSA)

This function returns a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE describing the current Owner of the Data Base.

CSSM_DL_PassThrough(3) -- Extend data storage module functionality (CDSA)

This function allows applications to call data storage library module-specific operations that have been exported. Such operations may include queries or services that are specific to the domain repre...

CSSM_EncryptData(3) -- Encrypts all buffer data (CDSA)

CSSM_EncryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged encryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged encryption process by returning any remaining cipher text not returned in the previous staged encryption call. The cipher text is returned in a single buffer.

CSSM_EncryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged encrypt funciton (CDSA)

CSSM_EncryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged encryption process (CDSA)

CSSM_FreeContext(3) -- Free memory associated with the context structure (CDSA)

This function frees the memory associated with the context structure.

CSSM_FreeKey(3) -- Clean up keys (CDSA)

CSSM_GenerateAlgorithmParams(3) -- Generate algorithm parameters (CDSA)

CSSM_GenerateKey(3) -- Generate a symmetric key (CDSA)

CSSM_GenerateKeyPair(3) -- Generate an asymmetric key pair (CDSA)

CSSM_GenerateMac(3) -- Compute a message authentication code (CDSA)

This function computes a message authentication code for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

CSSM_GenerateMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code function.

CSSM_GenerateMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code function.

CSSM_GenerateMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of computing a message authentication code (CDSA)

CSSM_GenerateRandom(3) -- Generate random data (CDSA)

This function generates random data.

CSSM_GetAPIMemoryFunctions(3) -- Retrieve the memory function table associated with the security service module

This function retrieves the memory function table associated with the security service module identified by the input handle.

cssm_GetAppMemoryFunctions(3) -- Get service functions (CDSA)

This function gets a function table containing sets of service functions. Among these service functions are four application-provided memory management functions. The elective module manager can use t...

cssm_GetAttachFunctions(3) -- Get SPI function table (CDSA)

This function returns an SPI function table for the service module identified by the module handle. The module must be of the type specified by the service mask. The SPFunctions parameter contains the...

CSSM_GetContext(3) -- Get context information (CDSA)

This function retrieves the context information when provided with a context handle.

CSSM_GetContextAttribute(3) -- Get context attribute (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a context attribute. Context references the cryptographic context to be searched for the attribute specified by AttributeType. If the specified attribute is not pres...

CSSM_GetKeyAcl(3) -- Get ACL entries by key (CDSA)

This function returns a description of zero or more ACL entries managed by the CSP and associated with the target key. The optional input SelectionTag restricts the returned descriptions to those ACL ...

CSSM_GetKeyOwner(3) -- Get data describing key owner (CDSA)

This function returns a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE describing the current Owner of the Key.

CSSM_GetModuleGUIDFromHandle(3) -- Get GUID of the attached module (CDSA)

This function returns the GUID of the attached module identified by the specified handle.

cssm_GetModuleInfo(3) -- Get the module handle state information

This function returns the state information associated with the module handle. The information returned by this function is that set by the call to the CSSM_ModuleAttach() function. The entry point to...

CSSM_GetPrivilege(3) -- Get CSSM privilege value (CDSA)

The CSSM_GetPrivilege() function returns the CSSM_PRIVILEGE value currently established in the framework.

CSSM_GetSubserviceUIDFromHandle(3) -- Complete a subservice unique identifier structure (CDSA)

This function completes a structure containing the persistent unique identifier of the attached module subservice, as identified by the input handle.

CSSM_GetTimeValue(3) -- Get a CSP time value (CDSA)

This function returns a time value maintained by a CSP. This feature will be supported primarily by hardware tokens with an onboard real time clock.

CSSM_Init(3) -- Initialize CSSM (CDSA)

This function initializes CSSM and verifies that the version of CSSM expected by the application is compatible with the version of CSSM on the system. This function should be called at least once by t...

CSSM_Introduce(3) -- Identify an executable module (CDSA)

The CSSM_Introduce() function identifies a dynamically loadable executable module (for example, DLL) to the CSSM framework. CSSM uses the ModuleID information to locate the signed manifest and library...

cssm_IsFuncCallValid(3) -- Check secure linkage (CDSA)

This function checks secure linkage between an application and a service module. Based on address scope of the application and the service module associated with the attach handle, CSSM determines whe...

CSSM_ListAttachedModuleManagers(3) -- Get a list of GUIDs for the attached module manager(CDSA)

This function returns a list of GUIDs for the currently attached and active module managers in the CSSM environment.

CSSM_ModuleAttach(3) -- Attach and verify a service provider module (CDSA)

This function attaches the service provider module and verifies that the version of the module expected by the application is compatible with the version on the system. The module can implement subser...

CSSM_ModuleDetach(3) -- Detach application from service provider module (CDSA)

This function detaches the application from the service provider module.

CSSM_ModuleLoad(3) -- Initialize the security service module (CDSA)

This function initializes the security service module. Initialization includes registering the application's module-event handler and enabling events with the security service service module. The app...

CSSM_ModuleUnload(3) -- Deregister event notification callbacks (CDSA)

The function deregisters event notification callbacks for the caller identified by ModuleGuid. The CSSM_ModuleUnload() function is the analog call to CSSM_ModuleLoad(). If all callbacks registered wit...

CSSM_QueryKeySizeInBits(3) -- Get CSP logical and effective sizes (CDSA)

CSSM_QuerySize(3) -- Get size of the output data (CDSA)

cssm_ReleaseAttachFunctions(3) -- Release lock on the SP function table (CDSA)

This function releases the lock on the SP function table for the service module identified by the module handle. The SPI function table was obtained by the elective module manager through the cssm_Get...

CSSM_RetrieveCounter(3) -- Get the value of a tamper resistant clock (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a tamper resistant clock/counter of the cryptographic device.

CSSM_RetrieveUniqueId(3) -- Get identifier (CDSA)

This function returns an identifier that could be used to uniquely differentiate the cryptographic device from all other devices from the same vendor or different vendors.

CSSM_SetContext(3) -- Replace all context information (CDSA)

This function replaces all context information associated with an existing context specified by CCHandle. The contents of the basic context structure and all attributes included in that structure are ...

CSSM_SetPrivilege(3) -- Store privilege value in CSSM framework (CDSA)

The CSSM_SetPrivilege() function accepts as input a privilege value and stores it in the CSSM framework. The integrity credentials of the module calling CSSM_SetPrivilege() must be verified by CSSM be...

CSSM_SignData(3) -- Sign all buffer data (CDSA)

CSSM_SignDataFinal(3) -- Complete the final stage of the sign data (CDSA)

This function completes the final stage of the sign data function.

CSSM_SignDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged sign data (CDSA)

CSSM_SignDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged signing process input buffer data (CDSA)

This function continues the staged signing process over all data contained in the set of input buffers. Signing is performed using the private key specified in the context.

CSSM_SPI_ModuleAttach(3) -- Attach a service provider module(CDSA)

This function is invoked by CSSM once for each invocation of CSSM_ModuleAttach(), specifying the module identified by ModuleGuid. Four entities are stakeholders in this function and each is identified...

CSSM_SPI_ModuleDetach(3) -- Notify service module of a context event (CDSA)

This function is invoked by CSSM once for each invocation of CSSM_ModuleDetach() specifying the attach-session identified by ModuleHandle. The function entry point for CSSM_SPI_ModuleDetach is include...

CSSM_SPI_ModuleLoad(3) -- Initialize process between CSSM and

This function completes the module initialization process between CSSM and the add-in service module. Before invoking this function, CSSM verifies the add-in service module's manifest credentials. If...

CSSM_SPI_ModuleUnload(3) -- Disable events and deregister CSSM event notification (CDSA)

This function disables events and deregisters the CSSM event-notification function. The add-in service module can perform cleanup operations, reversing the initialization performed in CSSM_SPI_ModuleL...

CSSM_Terminate(3) -- Terminate the use of CSSM (CDSA)

This function terminates the caller's use of CSSM. CSSM can clean up all internal states associated with the calling application. This function must be called once by each application. CSSM_Terminate...

CSSM_TP_ApplyCrlToDb(3) -- Update persistent storage (CDSA)

This function updates persistent storage to reflect entries in the certificate revocation list. The TP module determines whether the memory-resident CRL is trusted, and if it should be applied to one ...

CSSM_TP_CertCreateTemplate(3) -- Allocate and initialize template memory (CDSA)

CSSM_TP_CertGetAllTemplateFields(3) -- Get CertTemplate field values (CDSA)

This function extracts and returns all field values from CertTemplate. The CertTemplate parameter is an unsigned certificate template in the format supported by the TP. Fields are returned as a set of...

CSSM_TP_CertGroupConstruct(3) -- Construct credential (CDSA)

This function builds a collection of certificates that together make up a meaningful credential for a given trust domain. For example, in a hierarchical trust domain, a certificate group is a chain of...

CSSM_TP_CertGroupPrune(3) -- Remove locally issued anchor certificates (CDSA)

This function removes any locally issued anchor certificates from a constructed certificate group. The prune operation can remove those certificates that have been signed by any local certificate auth...

CSSM_TP_CertGroupToTupleGroup(3) -- Create a set of authorization tuples (CDSA)

This function creates a set of authorization tuples based on a set of input certificates. The certificates must be of the type managed by the Trust Policy module. The trust policy module may require t...

CSSM_TP_CertGroupVerify(3) -- Determine if a certificate is trusted (CDSA)

This function determines whether the certificate is trusted. The actions performed by this function differ based on the trust policy domain. The factors include practices, procedures and policies defi...

CSSM_TP_CertReclaimAbort(3) -- Terminate the process of reclaiming certificates (CDSA)

This function terminates the iterative process of reclaiming certificates and recovering their associated private keys from a protected key cache. This function must be called even if all private keys...

CSSM_TP_CertReclaimKey(3) -- Get private key associated with a certificate (CDSA)

This function recovers the private key associated with a certificate and securely stores that key in the specified cryptographic service provider. The key and its associated certificate are among a se...

CSSM_TP_CertRemoveFromCrlTemplate(3) -- Determine if the revoking certificate group can remove the subject certificate group from the CRL te...

The TP module determines whether the revoking certificate group can remove the subject certificate group from the CRL template. The revoker certificate group is first authenticated and its applicabili...

CSSM_TP_CertRevoke(3) -- Determine if the revoking certificate group can revoke the subject certificate group (CDSA)

The TP module determines whether the revoking certificate group can revoke the subject certificate group. The revoker certificate group is first authenticated and its applicability to perform this ope...

CSSM_TP_CertSign(3) -- Determine if signer certificate is trusted (CDSA)

The TP module decides whether the signer certificate is trusted to sign the CertTemplateToBeSigned. The signer certificate group is first authenticated and its applicability to perform this operation ...

CSSM_TP_ConfirmCredResult(3) -- Confirm credentials (CDSA)

This function submits a vector of acknowledgements to a Certificate Authority for a set of requests and corresponding results identified by ReferenceIdentifier. The caller must execute the call sequen...

CSSM_TP_CrlCreateTemplate(3) -- Create

This function creates an unsigned, memory-resident CRL template. Fields in the CRL are initialized based on the descriptive data specified by the OID/value input pairs in CrlFields and the local domai...

CSSM_TP_CrlSign(3) -- Determine if signer certificate is trusted (CDSA)

The TP module decides whether the signer certificate is trusted to sign the entire certificate revocation list. The signer certificate group is first authenticated and its applicability to perform thi...

CSSM_TP_CrlVerify(3) -- Verify integrity of the certificate revocation list (CDSA)

This function verifies the integrity of the certificate revocation list and determines whether it is trusted. The conditions for trust are part of the trust policy module. It can include conditions su...

CSSM_TP_FormRequest(3) -- Get form from authority (CDSA)

This function returns a blank form of type FormType from an Authority. If the PreferredAuthority list is NULL, the CA module can use a default authority name and location based on FormType. The CA mod...

CSSM_TP_FormSubmit(3) -- Submit form to ClearanceAuthority (CDSA)

The completed Form is submitted to a ClearanceAuthority, who is acting on behalf of a RepresentedAuthority. Typically the submitted form is requesting an authorization credential required as input to ...

CSSM_TP_PassThrough(3) -- Extend trust policy functionality

This function allows applications to call trust policy module-specific operations that have been exported. Such operations may include queries or services specific to the domain represented by the TP ...

CSSM_TP_ReceiveConfirmation(3) -- Poll for confirmation (CDSA)

A certificate authority uses this function to poll for confirmation from a requester who has been served by the authority. A requester sends a confirmation to the authority by successfully invoking th...

CSSM_TP_RetrieveCredResult(3) -- Return the results of the credentials request (CDSA)

This function returns the results of a CSSM_TP_SubmitCredRequest() call. The single identifier ReferenceIdentifier denotes the CSSM_TP_SubmitCredRequest() invocation that initiated the request. It is ...

CSSM_TP_SubmitCredRequest(3) -- Submit credential request (CDSA)

If the caller is successfully authenticated, then this function submits a request to the Authority identified by PreferredAuthority. The authority service can be local or remote. If the Authority is n...

CSSM_TP_TupleGroupToCertGroup(3) -- Create a set of certificate templates (CDSA)

This function creates a set of certificate templates based on a set of input tuples. The tuples describe a set of authorizations for one or more subjects. The trust policy service provider maps these ...

CSSM_Unintroduce(3) -- Remove module (CDSA)

The CSSM_Unintroduce() function removes the module referenced by ModuleID from the list of module information maintained by the CSSM framework. A caller can unintroduce modules other than itself if th...

CSSM_UnwrapKey(3) -- Unwrap the wrapped key (CDSA)

CSSM_UpdateContextAttributes(3) -- Update context attribute values (CDSA)

This function updates one or more context attribute values stored as part of an existing context specified by CCHandle. The basic context structure is not modified by this function. Only the context a...

CSSM_VerifyData(3) -- Verify input buffer data (CDSA)

CSSM_VerifyDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged verify data function.

CSSM_VerifyDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged verify data function. For staged operations, a combination operation selecting both a digesting algorithm and a verification algorithm must be specified.

CSSM_VerifyDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged verification (CDSA)

CSSM_VerifyDevice(3) -- Cause the cryptographic module to perform a self verification and integrity check (CDSA)

This function triggers the cryptographic module to perform self verification and integrity checking.

CSSM_VerifyMac(3) -- Verify the message authentication code (CDSA)

This function verifies the message authentication code over all data contained in the set of input buffers based on the input signature.

CSSM_VerifyMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code verification function.

CSSM_VerifyMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code verification function.

CSSM_VerifyMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of verifying the message authentication code (CDSA)

CSSM_WrapKey(3) -- Wrap a key using the context (CDSA)

cs_oid_cmp(3) -- compare two object identifiers (OIDs)

The cs_oid_cmp() function compares two OIDs and returns an integer that indicates whether the two OIDs are equal. A NULL value may be passed as either or both parameters. Two NULL pointers are equal.

cs_oid_dup(3) -- duplicate an object identifier (OID)

The cs_oid_dup() function duplicates an OID and returns the copy of the original OID. Resources associated with the returned OID must be released by the application after use with a call to cs_oid_fre...

cs_oid_free(3) -- free an object identifier (OID)

The cs_oid_free() function frees an OID that was allocated using the function cs_oid_dup(). A NULL value may be passed as the OID to be freed.

cs_oid_in_set(3) -- determine if an object identifier (OID) is present in an OID set

The cs_oid_in_set() function searches an OID set for the specified OID.

cs_oid_set_cmp(3) -- compare two object identifier (OID) sets

The cs_oid_set_cmp() function compares two OID sets and returns an integer that indicates whether the two sets are equal. The order of the elements in each set is not important. Duplicate entries in e...

cs_oid_set_dup(3) -- duplicate an object identifier (OID) set

The cs_oid_set_dup() function duplicates an OID set and returns a copy of the original OID set. Resources associated with the returned OID set must be released by the application after use with a call...

cs_oid_set_free(3) -- free an object identifier (OID) set

The cs_oid_set_free() function frees an OID set that was allocated using one of the following functions: cs_oid_set_dup(), cs_oid_set_insert(), cs_oid_set_isect(), cs_oid_set_union() A NULL value may ...

cs_oid_set_insert(3) -- insert an object identifier (OID) into an OID set

The cs_oid_set_insert() function adds an OID to an OID set. The OID is inserted if it is not already in the set. If the set does not exist (NULL passed for the set), a new set is created. Resources as...

cs_oid_set_isect(3) -- create an new object identifier (OID) set that is an intersection oftwo existing sets.

The cs_oid_set_isect() function creates a new OID set that is the intersection of two OID sets. Resources associated with the new OID set must be released by the application after use with a call to c...

cs_oid_set_union(3) -- create an new object identifier (OID) set that is an union of two existingsets.

The cs_oid_set_union() function creates a new OID set that is the union of two OID sets. Resources associated with the new OID set must be released by the application after use with a call to cs_oid_s...

ctermid(3) -- Generate the pathname for the controlling terminal

The ctermid() function generates a string that, when used as a pathname, refers to the current controlling terminal for the current process. If ctermid() returns a pathname, access to the file is not ...

ctime(3) -- converts time units

ctime64(3) -- converts time units

ctime64_r(3) -- converts time units

ctime_r(3) -- converts time units

ctype(3) -- Classify characters

The ctype functions test for membership in a character class in the current locale. Each function tests to see if a character is part of a different character class. If the character is part of the ch...

curses(3) -- Terminal screen-handling and optimization package

The Curses library routines give the user a terminal-independent method of updating character screens with reasonable optimization. A C program using these routines must be compiled with the -l curses...

curs_addch(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

curs_addchstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

curs_addstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

curs_addwch(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

curs_addwchstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

curs_addwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

curs_add_wch(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

curs_add_wchstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

curs_attr(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

curs_attr_get(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

curs_beep(3) -- Curses bell and screen flash routines

curs_bkgd(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

curs_bkgrnd(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

curs_border(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

curs_border_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

curs_chgat(3) -- Change renditions of characters in a Curses window

curs_clear(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

curs_color(3) -- Curses

curs_delch(3) -- Delete the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These routines do the following: Delete the character under the cursor in the current or specified window Move all characters that are to the right of the cursor and on the same line to the left one p...

curs_deleteln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

The deleteln and wdeleteln routines do the following: Delete the line under the cursor in the current or specified window Move all lines below the current line up one line Clear the bottom line of the...

curs_getcchar(3) -- Get a wide character string and rendition from a cchar_t or set a cchar_t from a wide-character stri...

The getcchar function gets a wide-character string and rendition from a cchar_t argument. When wch is not a null pointer, the getcchar function does the following: Extracts information from a cchar_t ...

curs_getch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

The getch, wgetch, mvgetch, and mvwgetch routines read a character from the terminal associated with the Curses window. In no-delay mode, if no input is waiting, these routines return the value ERR. I...

curs_getstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

The effect of getstr is as though a series of calls to getch were made, until a newline or carriage return is received. The resulting value is placed in the area pointed to by the character pointer st...

curs_getwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

The getwch, wgetwch, mvgetwch, and mvwgetwch routines read an EUC character from the terminal associated with the Curses window, transform the character into a wchar_t character, and return the wchar_...

curs_getwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

The effect of getwstr is as though a series of calls to getwch were made, until a newline and carriage return is received. The resulting value is placed in the area pointed to by the wchar_t pointer w...

curs_getyx(3) -- Get Curses cursor and window coordinates

The getyx macro places the cursor position of the window into the two integer variables y and x. If win is a subwindow, the getparyx macro places the beginning coordinates of the subwindow (relative t...

curs_get_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

The get_wch, wget_wch, mvget_wch, and mvwget_wch functions read a character from the terminal associated with the current or specified window. In no-delay mode, if no input is waiting, these functions...

curs_get_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

The effect of get_wstr is as though a series of calls to get_wch were made, until a newline, end-of-line, or endof-file character is processed. An end-of-file character is represented by WEOF, as defi...

curs_inch(3) -- Get a character and its attributes from a Curses window

These routines return the character, of type chtype, at the current position in the named window. If any attributes are set for that position, their values are combined (through an inclusive OR operat...

curs_inchstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

These routines return a string of type chtype, starting at the current or specified cursor position in the current or specified window and ending at the right margin of the window. The four functions ...

curs_initscr(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

The initscr routine is almost always the first routine that applications call. (The exceptions are slk_init, filter, ripoffline, use_env and, for multiple-terminal applications, newterm). The initscr ...

curs_inopts(3) -- Curses

curs_insch(3) -- Insert a character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These routines insert the character ch before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the right, with the possibility of the rightmost characte...

curs_insstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These routines insert a character string (as many characters as will fit on the line) before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved to the right, with the ...

curs_instr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

These routines return the string of characters in str, starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the right margin of the window. Attributes are stripped from the charac...

curs_inswch(3) -- Insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These routines insert the character wch, which contains a wide character, before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the right, with the po...

curs_inswstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These routines insert a wchar_t character string (as many wchar_t characters as will fit on the line) before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved to the ...

curs_ins_wch(3) -- Insert a complex character and rendition before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

These functions insert the complex character wch, along with its rendition, in the current or specified window at the current or specified cursor position. These functions: Do not perform wrapping In ...

curs_ins_wstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

These functions insert a wchar_t character string (as many wchar_t characters as will fit on the line) in the current or specified window immediately before the current or specified position. All char...

curs_inwch(3) -- Get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a Curses window

These routines return the wide character, of type chtype, at the current or specified position in the current or specified window. If any attributes are set for that position, their values included in...

curs_inwchstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

These routines return a string of type chtype, holding wchar_t characters, starting at the current or specified cursor position in the current or specified window and ending at the right margin of the...

curs_inwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

These routines return a string of wchar_t characters in str, starting at the current or specified cursor position in the current or specified window and ending at the right margin of the window. The f...

curs_in_wch(3) -- Input a complex character and rendition from a Curses window

These functions extract the complex character and rendition from the current or specified position in the current or specified window into the object pointed to by wcval.

curs_in_wchstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

These functions extract characters from the current or specified window, starting at the current or specified position and ending at the end of the line, and place them in the array pointed to by wchs...

curs_kernel(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

These routines give low-level access to various Curses functionality. They are typically used inside library routines. The def_prog_mode and def_shell_mode routines save the current terminal modes as ...

curs_move(3) -- Move the Curses window cursor

These routines move the cursor associated with the Curses window to line y and column x. They do not move the physical cursor of the terminal until refresh is called. The specified position is relativ...

curs_outopts(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

curs_overlay(3) -- Overlap and manipulate overlapped Curses windows

curs_pad(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

The newpad routine creates and returns a pointer to a new pad data structure with the given number of lines, nlines, and columns, ncols. A pad is like a window, except that a pad is not necessarily as...

curs_printw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

The printw, wprintw, mvprintw, and mvwprintw routines are analogous to printf family of routines (see printf(3)). In effect, the printw routines output the string that would be output by printf as tho...

curs_refresh(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

Applications must call the refresh and wrefresh routines (or the wnoutrefresh and doupdate routines) to get any output on the terminal. Other Curses routines only manipulate data structures. The wrefr...

curs_scanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

The scanw, wscanw, and mvscanw routines correspond to scanf (see fscanf(3)). The effect of these routines is as though wgetstr were called on the window, and the resulting line were used as input for ...

curs_scroll(3) -- Scroll a Curses window

The scroll routine scrolls the window up one line. This involves moving the lines in the window data structure. As an optimization, if the scrolling region of the window is the entire screen, the phys...

curs_scr_dump(3) -- Read or write a Curses screen from or to a file

The scr_dump routine writes the current contents of the virtual screen to filename. The scr_restore routine sets the virtual screen to the contents of filename, which must have been written using scr_...

curs_set(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

curs_slk(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

Curses manipulates the set of soft function-key labels that exist on many terminals. For those terminals that do not support soft labels, Curses takes over the bottom line of stdscr, reducing the size...

curs_termattrs(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

curs_termcap(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

These routines are obsolete and should not be used in new applications. The routines are included in the Curses library as a conversion aid for applications originally designed to use the termcap file...

curs_terminfo(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

These low-level routines must be called by programs that have to deal directly with the terminfo database to handle certain terminal capabilities, such as programming function keys. For all other func...

curs_touch(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

The touchwin and touchline routines throw away all optimization information about which parts of the window have been touched, by pretending that the entire window has been drawn on. It is sometimes n...

curs_util(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

The unctrl macro generates a character string that is a printable representation of the character c. Control characters are displayed in the ^X notation. Printing characters are displayed as is. The w...

curs_window(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

The newwin routine creates and returns a pointer to a new window with the given number of lines, nlines, and columns, ncols. The upper left-hand corner of the window is at line begin_y and column begi...

cuserid(3) -- Get the alphanumeric username associated with the current process

The cuserid() function generates a character string representing the real or effective username of the owner of the current process.

cvt_ftof(3) -- Converts a floating-point data type to another

cvt_ftof() converts one floating-point data type to another. Input_val points to the input value to be converted and output_val points to the converted result. The conversion is subject to the options...

d2i_DHparams(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

d2i_Netscape_RSA(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

d2i_RSAPrivateKey(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

d2i_RSAPublicKey(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

d2i_SSL_SESSION(3) -- Convert SSL_SESSION object to or from ASN1 representation

The d2i_SSL_SESSION() function transforms the external ASN1 representation of an SSL/TLS session, stored as binary data at location pp with length length, into an SSL_SESSION object. The i2d_SSL_SESSI...

daylight(3) -- sets and accesses time zone conversion information

The tzset() function uses the value of the environment variable TZ to set time conversion information used by several other functions, including ctime(), ctime_r(), getdate(), getdate_r(), localtime()...

dbm(3) -- Database subroutines

The dbminit(), fetch(), store(), delete(), firstkey(), nextkey(), and forder() functions maintain key/content pairs in a database. They are obtained with the -ldbm loader option. The dbm library is pr...

dbminit(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_clearerr(3) -- Database subroutines

The dbm_open(), dbm_close(), dbm_fetch(), dbm_store(), dbm_delete(), dbm_firstkey(), dbm_nextkey(), dbm_forder(), dbm_setpblksiz(), dbm_error(), and dbm_clearerr() functions maintain key/content pairs...

dbm_close(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_delete(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_error(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_fetch(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_firstkey(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_forder(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_nextkey(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_open(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_setpblksiz(3) -- Database subroutines

dbm_store(3) -- Database subroutines

dbopen(3) -- database access methods

The dbopen() function is the library interface to database files. The supported file formats are btree, hashed, and UNIX file oriented. The btree format is a representation of a sorted, balanced tree ...

DecryptData(3) -- Decrypt buffer data (CDSA)

DecryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged decryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged decryption process by returning any remaining plain text not returned in the previous staged decryption call. The plain text is returned in a single buffer.

DecryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged decrypt function(CDSA)

DecryptDataInitP(3) -- Intialize the staged decrypt function with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_DecryptDataInit(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the application's privilege set (if t...

DecryptDataP(3) -- Decrypt data with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_DecryptData(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its privilege set or the application's privilege set (if the appli...

DecryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged decryption process (CDSA)

def_prog_mode(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

def_shell_mode(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

delay_output(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

delch(3) -- Delete the character under the cursor in a Curses window

delete(3) -- Database subroutines

deleteln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

delproplist(3) -- removes Extended File Attributes from a file

The delproplist() function removes one or more Extended File Attributes, whose names are specified in the structure pointed to by args, from the Property List of the file pointed to by path. An Extend...

delscreen(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

delwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

del_curterm(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

DeregisterDispatchTable(3) -- Invalidate CSSM pointers to EMM (CDSA)

This EMM-defined function is invoked by CSSM once for each CSSM_ModuleDetach() operation issued against a service provider of the type managed by the EMM. CSSM uses this function to inform the EMM tha...

DeriveKey(3) -- Derive new symmetric key (CDSA)

derwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

des(3) -- DES encryption

This library contains a fast implementation of the DES encryption algorithm. There are two phases to the use of DES encryption. The first is the generation of a des_key_schedule from a key; the second...

destroy_pset(3) -- Destroys a processor set

The destroy_pset() function destroys a processor set. A processor that belongs to a destroyed processor set is returned to the default processor set. You must have root privileges.

des_cbc_cksum(3) -- DES encryption

des_cfb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_cfb_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_crypt(3) -- Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption library routines (Auth)

The des_crypt() routines are designed to provide the cryptographic routines which are used to support authentication. Specifically, des_quad_cksum() and des_key_sched() are designed to be used with th...

des_ecb2_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ecb3_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ecb_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede2_cbc_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede2_cfb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede2_ofb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede3_cbcm_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede3_cbc_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede3_cfb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ede3_ofb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_enc_read(3) -- DES encryption

des_enc_write(3) -- DES encryption

des_fcrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_is_weak_key(3) -- Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption library routines (Auth)

des_key_sched(3) -- Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption library routines (Auth)

des_ncbc_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ofb64_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_ofb_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_pcbc_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

des_quad_cksum(3) -- Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption library routines (Auth)

des_random_key(3) -- DES encryption

des_read_2passwords(3) -- DES encryption

des_read_password(3) -- DES encryption

des_read_pw_string(3) -- DES encryption

des_set_key(3) -- DES encryption

des_set_key_checked(3) -- DES encryption

des_set_key_unchecked(3) -- DES encryption

des_set_odd_parity(3) -- DES encryption

des_string_to_2keys(3) -- DES encryption

des_string_to_key(3) -- Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption library routines (Auth)

des_xcbc_encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

dh(3) -- Diffie-Hellman key agreement

These functions implement the Diffie-Hellman key agreement protocol. The generation of shared DH parameters is described in DH_generate_parameters(3). See DH_generate_key(3) for a description of how t...

DHparams_print(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DHparams_print_fp(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DH_check(3) -- Generate and check

The DH_generate_parameters() function generates DiffieHellman parameters that can be shared among a group of users, and returns them in a newly allocated DH structure. The pseudo-random number generat...

DH_compute_key(3) -- Perform Diffie-Hellman key exchange

The DH_generate_key() function performs the first step of a Diffie-Hellman key exchange by generating private and public DH values. By calling DH_compute_key(), these are combined with the other party...

DH_free(3) -- Allocate and free DH objects

The DH_new() function allocates and initializes a DH structure. The DH_free() function frees the DH structure and its components. The values are erased before the memory is returned to the system.

DH_generate_key(3) -- Perform Diffie-Hellman key exchange

DH_generate_parameters(3) -- Generate and check

DH_get_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select DH method

A DH_METHOD specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for Diffie-Hellman operations. By modifying the method, alternative implementations such as hardware accelerators may be used. Initially, the defa...

DH_get_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to DH structures

These functions handle application specific data in DH structures. Their usage is identical to that of RSA_get_ex_new_index(), RSA_set_ex_data(), and RSA_get_ex_data() as described in RSA_get_ex_new_i...

DH_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Add application specific data to DH structures

DH_new(3) -- Allocate and free DH objects

The DH_new() function allocates and initializes a DH structure. The DH_free() function frees the DH structure and its components. The values are erased before the memory is returned to the system.

DH_new_method(3) -- Select DH method

DH_OpenSSL(3) -- Select DH method

DH_set_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select DH method

DH_set_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to DH structures

DH_set_method(3) -- Select DH method

DH_size(3) -- Get Diffie-Hellman prime size

This DH_size() function returns the Diffie-Hellman size in bytes. It can be used to determine how much memory must be allocated for the shared secret computed by DH_compute_key(). The dh->p must not b...

difftime(3) -- compares time values

The difftime() function returns a signed time value in seconds that is the difference between the values of the time1 and time2 parameters, also expressed in seconds. The difftime64() function works e...

difftime64(3) -- compares time values

DigestData(3) -- Compute message digest (CDSA)

This function computes a message digest for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

DigestDataClone(3) -- Clone a staged message digest (CDSA)

This function clones a given staged message digest context with its cryptographic attributes and intermediate result.

DigestDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message digest function.

DigestDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message digest (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message digest function.

DigestDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of digesting (CDSA)

This function continues the staged process of digesting all data contained in the set of input buffers. The resulting digest value will be returned as part of the staged digesting process.

dirname(3) -- Return the base filename or directory portion of a pathname

dirname_r(3) -- Return the base filename or directory portion of a pathname

disassembler(3) -- disassemble a machine instruction and print the results

The disassembler() routine disassembles and prints a machine instruction on stdout. The program must be linked with the object file access routine library libmld.a.

dispcrypt(3) -- encrypt a password, dispatching based on the associated algorithm (Enhanced Security)

The dispcrypt() function applies the specified encryption algorithm to the given password string and salt value, and returns the encrypted form of the password. The return value is static data which i...

div(3) -- Computes absolute value and division of integers

dladdr(3) -- translate address to symbolic information

The dladdr() function is one of a family of routines that give the user direct access to the dynamic linking facilities. It can only be used in dynamically linked processes. The dladdr() function dete...

dlclose(3) -- close a dlopen() object

The dlclose() function is used to inform the system that the object referenced by a handle returned from a previous dlopen() invocation is no longer needed by the application. The use of dlclose() ref...

dlerror(3) -- get diagnostic information

The dlerror() function returns a null-terminated character string (with no trailing newline) that describes the last error that occurred in dynamic linking processing for a call to dlopen(), dlclose()...

dlopen(3) -- gain access to an executable object file

The dlopen function provides an interface to the dynamic library loader to allow shared libraries to be loaded and called at run time. The dlopen() function attempts to load the specified file in the ...

dlsym(3) -- obtain the address of a symbol from a dlopen() object

The dlsym() function allows a process to obtain the address of a symbol defined within an object made accessible by a dlopen() call. The dlsym() function will search for the named symbol in all object...

DL_Authenticate(3) -- Provide authentication credentials (CDSA)

DL_ChangeDbAcl(3) -- Edit stored ACL (CDSA)

DL_ChangeDbOwner(3) -- Define a new data base owner (CDSA)

This function takes a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE defining the new Owner of the Data Base.

DL_CreateRelation(3) -- Create a new persistent relation (CDSA)

DL_DataAbortQuery(3) -- Terminate DL_DataGetFirst query (CDSA)

DL_DataDelete(3) -- Remove data record (CDSA)

This function removes the data record specified by the unique record identifier from the specified data store.

DL_DataGetFirst(3) -- Get first data record (CDSA)

DL_DataGetFromUniqueRecordId(3) -- Get data record (CDSA)

DL_DataGetNext(3) -- Get next data record (CDSA)

DL_DataInsert(3) -- Create new persistent data record (CDSA)

DL_DataModify(3) -- Modify persistent data record (CDSA)

DL_DbClose(3) -- Close open data store (CDSA)

This function closes an open data store.

DL_DbCreate(3) -- Create and open new data store (CDSA)

DL_DbDelete(3) -- Delete all records (CDSA)

This function deletes all records from the specified data store and removes all state information associated with that data store.

DL_DbOpen(3) -- Open a data store (CDSA)

DL_DestroyRelation(3) -- Destroy an existing relation (CDSA)

This function destroys an existing relation of the specified type by removing its entry from the specified data store.

DL_FreeNameList(3) -- Free the list of the logical data store names (CDSA)

This function frees the list of the logical data store names that was returned by CSSM_DL_GetDbNames.

DL_FreeUniqueRecord(3) -- Free data store memory (CDSA)

This function frees the memory associated with the data store unique record structure.

DL_GetDbAcl(3) -- Get ACL description (CDSA)

DL_GetDbNameFromHandle(3) -- Get data source name (CDSA)

This function retrieves the data source name corresponding to an opened data store handle.

DL_GetDbNames(3) -- Get list of logical data store names (CDSA)

DL_GetDbOwner(3) -- Get data base owner (CDSA)

This function returns a CSSM_ACL_OWNER_PROTOTYPE describing the current Owner of the Data Base.

DL_PassThrough(3) -- Extend data storage module functionality (CDSA)

dmapi(3) -- Describes the contents of the Data Management Applications Programming Interface (DMAPI)

DMAPI is a Common Applications Environment (CAE) standard that allows data management applications to interface with the underlying operating system. An example of a data management application is a h...

dn_comp(3) -- Compress a domain name

The dn_comp() (domain name compression) function compresses the domain name pointed to by the expanded_name parameter and stores it in the area pointed to by the compressed_name parameter. The dn_comp...

dn_expand(3) -- Expand a compressed domain name

The dn_expand() function expands a compressed domain name to a full domain name, converting the expanded names to uppercase. The dn_expand() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resol...

dn_find(3) -- Search for an expanded domain name

The dn_find() (domain name find) function searches for an expanded domain name from a list of previously compressed names. An application program calls the dn_find() function indirectly using the dn_c...

dn_skipname(3) -- Skip over a compressed domain name

The dn_skipname() function skips over a compressed domain name. The dn_skipname() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resolver, a set of functions that resolve domain names. Global i...

doupdate(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

drand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

This family of functions generates pseudorandom numbers using the linear congruential algorithm and 48-bit integer arithmetic. The drand48() and erand48() functions return nonnegative, double-precisio...

drand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

drem(3) -- Compute the floating-point remainder

The fmod(), fmodf(), and fmodl() functions return the remainder r = x - n*y, where n = trunc(x/y). The result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y. The remainder is comput...

dsa(3) -- Digital Signature Algorithm

These functions implement the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA). The generation of shared DSA parameters is described in DSA_generate_parameters(3); DSA_generate_key(3) describes how to generate a sig...

DSAparams_print(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DSAparams_print_fp(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DSA_do_sign(3) -- Raw DSA signature operations

The DSA_do_sign() function computes a digital signature on the len byte message digest dgst using the private key dsa and returns it in a newly allocated DSA_SIG structure. The DSA_sign_setup() functi...

DSA_do_verify(3) -- Raw DSA signature operations

DSA_dup_DH(3) -- Create a DH structure out of DSA structure

The DSA_dup_DH() function duplicates DSA parameters/keys as DH parameters/keys. The q is lost during that conversion, but the resulting DH parameters contain its length.

DSA_free(3) -- Allocate and free DSA objects

The DSA_new() function allocates and initializes a DSA structure. The DSA_free() function frees the DSA structure and its components. The values are erased before the memory is returned to the system.

DSA_generate_key(3) -- Generate DSA key pair

The DSA_generate_key() function expects a to contain DSA parameters. It generates a new key pair and stores it in a->pub_key and a->priv_key. The PRNG must be seeded prior to calling DSA_generate_key(...

DSA_generate_parameters(3) -- Generate DSA parameters

The DSA_generate_parameters() function generates primes p and q and a generator g for use in the DSA. The value of bits is the length of the prime to be generated; the DSS allows a maximum of 1024 bit...

DSA_get_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select DSA method

A DSA_METHOD specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for DSA operations. By modifying the method, alternative implementations such as hardware accelerators can be used. Initially, the default is the...

DSA_get_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to DSA structures

These functions handle application specific data in DSA structures. Their usage is identical to that of RSA_get_ex_new_index(), RSA_set_ex_data(), and RSA_get_ex_data(), as described in RSA_get_ex_new...

DSA_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Add application specific data to DSA structures

DSA_new(3) -- Allocate and free DSA objects

DSA_new_method(3) -- Select DSA method

DSA_OpenSSL(3) -- Select DSA method

DSA_print(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DSA_print_fp(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

DSA_set_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select DSA method

DSA_set_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to DSA structures

DSA_set_method(3) -- Select DSA method

DSA_sign(3) -- DSA signatures

The DSA_sign() function computes a digital signature on the len byte message digest (dgst) using the private key dsa and places its ASN.1 DER encoding at sigret. The length of the signature is placed ...

DSA_sign_setup(3) -- DSA signatures

DSA_SIG_free(3) -- Allocate and free DSA signature objects

TheDSA_SIG_new() function allocates and initializes a DSA_SIG structure. The DSA_SIG_free() function frees the DSA_SIG structure and its components. The values are erased before the memory is returned...

DSA_SIG_new(3) -- Allocate and free DSA signature objects

DSA_size(3) -- Get DSA signature size

The DSA_size() function returns the size of an ASN.1 encoded DSA signature in bytes. It can be used to determine how much memory must be allocated for a DSA signature. The dsa->q must not be NULL.

DSA_verify(3) -- DSA signatures

dupwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

DXmActivateWidget(3X) -- Allows the application to simulate push button activation.

The DXmActivateWidget routine allows an application to generate the same highlighting and callbacks that would occur if the user clicked on a push button. Using this routine in your application enable...

DXmChildren(3X) -- Returns a list of the widget's children.

The DXmChildren routine returns a list of the widget's children. Note that children must request geometry management changes from their parent and that a parent widget can resize its children. You ca...

DXmColorMixGetNewColor(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the color mixing widget's current new color red, green, and blue values.

DXmColorMixGetNewColor allows the calling application or routine to quickly obtain the current color value from the color mixing widget. Note that if your application uses the default color mixing sub...

DXmColorMixSetNewColor(3X) -- Sets the new color red, green, and blue values in the color mixing widget.

The DXmColorMixSetNewColor routine allows the application or a user-supplied color mixer subwidget to pass the current color value to the color mixing widget. Note that your application will perform t...

DXmCreateColorMix(3X) -- Creates a color mixing widget, without

The DXmCreateColorMix routine uses the same arguments and resources as the DXmCreateColorMixDialog routine to create a color mixing widget, but does not include a pop-up dialog box. Note, however, tha...

DXmCreateColorMixDialog(3X) -- Creates a color mixing widget with a dialog box.

DXmCreateColorMixDialog allows your DECwindows Motif applications to query users for a color. The color mixing widget provides users with immediate feedback, displaying each new color as it is selecte...

DXmCreateCSText(3X) -- Creates a compound string text widget.

The DXmCreateCSText routine creates a compound string text widget that provides your application with text editing capabilities, including the ability for users to enter and edit text in the same char...

DXmCreateCursor(3X) -- Creates a specific cursor.

The DXmCreateCursor routine enables you to create a cursor that displays as a watch, question mark, or caution ("do not enter") symbol (these are the most frequently used cursor symbols).

DXmCreateHelpDialog(3X) -- Creates the Help widget with a dialog box.

The DXmCreateHelpDialog routine creates a help widget that includes its own dialog box. The help widget is a modeless widget that enables the application to display appropriate user assistance informa...

DXmCreatePrintBox(3X) -- Creates the print widget without a dialog box.

The DXmCreatePrintBox routine uses the same arguments and resources as the DXmCreatePrintDialog routine to create a print widget, but does not include a dialog box. See the DXmCreatePrintDialog(3X) fo...

DXmCreatePrintDialog(3X) -- Creates the print widget with a dialog box.

The DXmCreatePrintDialog routine creates the print widget, which is a modeless widget that provides applications with a fast, convenient method of printing one or more files in multiple formats. Resou...

DXmCreateScrolledCSText(3X) -- Creates a compound string text widget with scroll bars.

The DXmCreateScrolledCSText routine creates a compound string text widget with scroll bars. The routine uses the same arguments and resources as the DXmCreateCSText routine to create a compound string...

DXmCreateSvn(3X) -- Creates an SVN widget

The DXmCreateSvn routine allows you to create a hierarchical structure of information that is presented to a user in an organized manner and in a way that lets the user navigate in, and select from, t...

DXmCSContainsStringCharSet(3X) -- Examines XmString segments for ISO_LATIN_1 characters.

The DXmCSContainsStringCharSet routine examines all XmString segments in the application for characters belonging to the ISO_LATIN_1 character set.

DXmCSTextClearSelection(3X) -- Clears (cancels) the global selection highlighted in the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextClearSelection routine clears (cancels) the global selection highlighted in the compound string text widget.

DXmCSTextCopy(3X) -- Copies the currently selected (highlighted) text to the clipboard.

The DXmCSTextCopy function copies the selected (highlighted) text in the compound string text widget to the clipboard, returning the success or failure of that operation.

DXmCSTextCut(3X) -- Deletes the currently selected (highlighted) text after copying it to the clipboard.

The DXmCSTextCut routine deletes the selected text in the compound string text widget after copying the text to the clipboard, returning the success or failure of that operation.

DXmCSTextDisableRedisplay(3X) -- A Text function that temporarily prevents visual update of the DXmCSText widget

DXmCSTextDisableRedisplay prevents redisplay of the specified DXmCSText widget even though its visual attributes have been modified. The visual appearance of the widget remains unchanged until DXmCSTe...

DXmCSTextEnableRedisplay(3X) -- A Text function that forces the visual update of DXmCSText widget.

DXmCSTextEnableRedisplay is used in conjunction with DXmCSTextDisableRedisplay, which suppresses visual update of DXmCSText. When DXmCSTextEnableRedisplay is called, it determines if any visual attrib...

DXmCSTextGetEditable(3X) -- Indicates whether the text in the compound string text widget can be edited by the user.

The DXmCSTextGetEditable routine indicates, by returning True or False, whether the text in the compound string text widget can be edited by the user.

DXmCSTextGetInsertionPosition(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the logical position of the insertion cursor.

The DXmCSTextGetInsertionPosition routine retrieves the logical position of the insertion cursor by returning an integer that indicates the distance (in number of characters) between the cursor and th...

DXmCSTextGetLastPosition(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the logical position of the last character in the text.

The DXmCSTextGetLastPosition routine retrieves the logical position of the last character in the text by returning an integer. The position may correspond to a line feed.

DXmCSTextGetMaxLength(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) current maximum allowable length of the text in the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextGetMaxLength routine retrieves the current maximum allowable length of the text in the compound string text widget by returning an integer.

DXmCSTextGetSelection(3X) -- Retrieves the text selected in the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextGetSelection routine retrieves the text selected (highlighted) in the compound string text widget. It returns a Null pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is respo...

DXmCSTextGetSelectionInfo(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the left and right positions of the currently selected text.

The DXmCSTextGetSelectionInfo routine, when True, returns the left and right logical positions corresponding to the currently selected (highlighted) text. If no text is selected, this routine returns ...

DXmCSTextGetString(3X) -- Retrieves all the text from the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextGetString routine retrieves the current compound string from the compound string text widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the compound string by...

DXmCSTextGetTopPosition(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the logical position of the first character in the displayed text.

The DXmCSTextGetTopPosition routine returns the logical position of the first character in the displayed text. If the direction is left-to-right, the first character is at the top-left of the display....

DXmCSTextHasSelection(3X) -- Indicates whether the compound string text widget currently owns the primary selection.

The DXmCSTextHasSelection routine returns True if the compound string text widget currently owns the primary selection and False if it does not.

DXmCSTextHorizontalScroll(3X) -- Scrolls text horizontally.

The DXmCSTextHorizontalScroll routine scrolls text horizontally (left or right) by the given number of pixels. DXmCSTextHorizontalScroll(3X)

DXmCSTextInsert(3X) -- Inserts new text into the CSText widget.

The DXmCSTextInsert routine inserts new text into the compound string text widget at the specified logical position, returning the success or failure of that operation.

DXmCSTextNumLines(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the number of visible lines in the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextNumLines routine returns an integer that represents the number of lines in the compound string text widget that are visible to the user.

DXmCSTextPaste(3X) -- Pastes the data from the clipboard into the text at the current cursor position.

The DXmCSTextPaste routine pastes the data from the clipboard into the text at the current cursor position, returning the success or failure of that operation.

DXmCSTextPosToXY(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the x and y position of a specified character in the text.

The DXmCSTextPosToXY routine converts the logical position of a specified character in the text to the corresponding x and y coordinates.

DXmCSTextRemove(3X) -- Removes the currently selected (highlighted) text.

The DXmCSTextRemove routine removes the currently selected (highlighted) text, returning the success or failure of that operation.

DXmCSTextReplace(3X) -- Replaces a specified segment of text in a compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextReplace routine replaces part of the text in the compound string text widget. Within the widget, positions are numbered starting at 0 and increasing sequentially. For example, to replace ...

DXmCSTextSetAddMode(3X) -- Controls whether the CSText widget is in Add Mode.

The DXmCSTextSetAddMode routine controls whether the CSText widget is in Add Mode, which, when True, allows the user to move the insertion cursor without affecting the primary selection. DXmCSTextSetA...

DXmCSTextSetEditable(3X) -- Specifies whether the text in the widget can be edited by the user.

The DXmCSTextSetEditable specifies whether text in the compound string text widget can be edited by the user, returning either True or False to indicate the permission state.

DXmCSTextSetHighlight(3X) -- Changes the highlighting of the compound string text located between two specified logical positions...

The DXmCSTextSetHighlight routine changes the highlighting of the compound string text located between two specified positions, by removing the highlighting or by implementing underlining or reverse v...

DXmCSTextSetInsertionPosition(3X) -- Sets the insertion cursor to the specified logical position in the text.

The DXmCSTextSetInsertionPosition routine sets the insertion cursor to the specified logical position (indicated by number of characters) in the text.

DXmCSTextSetMaxLength(3X) -- Sets the maximum allowable length of the text in the compound string text widget.

The DXmCSTextSetMaxLength routine sets the maximum allowable length of the text in the compound string text widget. It prohibits the user from entering text longer than this limit.

DXmCSTextSetSelection(3X) -- Designates the specified text as the current primary selection by highlighting it in the compound st...

The DXmCSTextSetSelection routine designates the specified text as the current primary selection by highlighting it in the compound string text widget. Within the text window, first marks the position...

DXmCSTextSetString(3X) -- Replaces all the text in the compound string text widget with new text.

The DXmCSTextSetString routine replaces all the text in the compound string text widget with new text specified by the value parameter.

DXmCSTextSetTopPosition(3X) -- Sets the logical position of the first character in the displayed text.

The DXmCSTextSetTopPosition routine sets the logical position of the first character in the displayed text. If the direction is left-to-right, the first character is at the top-left of the display. If...

DXmCSTextShowPosition(3X) -- Displays text located at a specified position.

The DXmCSTextShowPosition displays the text located at a specified position, which is the logical position of a character in that text. DXmCSTextShowPosition(3X)

DXmCSTextVerticalScroll(3X) -- Scrolls text vertically.

The DXmCSTextVerticalScroll routine scrolls text vertically by the given number of lines.

DXmCSTextXYToPos(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the position in the text of the character nearest to a specified x and y positio...

The DXmCSTextXYToPos routine returns an integer that identifies the position in the text of the character that is nearest to a specified x and y position.

DXmCvtCStoFC(3X) -- Converts a compound string to a file-compatible format string. Currently uses text format.

The DXmCvtCStoFC routine converts a compound string to a file-compatible format string. It currently uses text format. The user must free the string by using the Intrinsic routine XtFree.

DXmCvtCStoOS(3X) -- Converts a compound string to an operatingsystem specific format. Currently uses text format.

The DXmCvtCStoOS routine converts a compound string to an operating-system specific format. It currently uses text format. The user must free the string by using the Intrinsic routine XtFree.

DXmCvtFCtoCS(3X) -- Converts a string in the file-compatible format to a compound string.

The DXmCvtFCtoCS routine converts a string in the filecompatible format to a compound string. The user must free the string by using the Toolkit routine XmStringFree.

DXmCvtOStoCS(3X) -- Converts a string in the operating-systemspecific format to a compound string.

The DXmCvtOStoCS routine converts a string in the operating-system-specific format to a compound string. The user must free the string by using the Toolkit routine XmStringFree.

DXmDisplayCSMessage(3X) -- Displays a compound string message.

The DXmDisplayCSMessage routine accepts an array of compound strings, formats them, and, if necessary, creates a message box. A return of 0 (Null) indicates that the message box could not be created.

DXmFindFontFallback(3X) -- Associates the given XLFD font name with a new XLFD font name.

The DXmFindFontFallback routine associates the given XLFD (X Logical Font Description) font name with a new XLFD font name. This routine does not load the generated font, nor guarantee that it will lo...

DXmFormSpaceButtonsEqually(3X) -- Sets push buttons in a form widget to be equally spaced and sized.

The DXmFormSpaceButtonsEqually routine enables you to set the push buttons in a form widget to be equally spaced and sized. Your application must call this routine after the dialog box is managed. DXm...

DXmGetLocaleString(3X) -- Provides locale-sensitive Motif compound string version of Toolkit ASCII default values.

The DXmGetLocaleString routine provides a locale-sensitive Motif compound string version of Toolkit ASCII default values, such as "OK" or "Cancel". You can specify the part of speech (adjective, a...

DXmHelpOnContext(3X) -- Enters the application into context sensitive help mode and either calls a help callback (if one exi...

The DXmHelpOnContext routine enters context sensitive help mode, changing the cursor to the help cursor (?) and then waiting for an MB1 click on a widget. If the selected widget has a help callback, t...

DXmHelpSystemClose(3X) -- Closes all of the remaining topic and navigation windows in Bookreader.

Note This routine is not supported on all operating systems. Within the DECwindows Motif Help System, the DXmHelpSystemClose routine closes all of the remaining topic and navigation windows in the Boo...

DXmHelpSystemDisplay(3X) -- Displays a topic or directory of the help file in Bookreader.

Note This routine is not supported on all operating systems. The DXmHelpSystemDisplay routine (which you use instead of a call to the help widget) displays a topic or directory of the help file in Boo...

DXmHelpSystemOpen(3X) -- Completes initialization operations required by LinkWorks and prepares to display a topic from the s...

Note This routine is not supported on all operating systems. Within the DECwindows Motif Help System, the DXmHelpSystemOpen routine completes all of the initialization operations required by LinkWorks...

DXmInitialize(3X) -- Prepares an application to use MRM widgetfetching facilities for the proprietary (DXm) Motif widgets...

The DXmInitialize routine performs a function similar to the MrmInitialize function, but for the DXm widgets. Calling DXmInitialize is equivalent to calling MrmRegisterClass for each of the DXm widget...

DXmLoadQueryFont(3X) -- Loads the font specified by the font name or generates a new font name.

The DXmLoadQueryFont routine loads the font specified by the font name or, if the font fails to load, generates a new font name, and loads that font instead.

DXmNumChildren(3X) -- Returns the number of children that belong to the widget.

The DXmNumChildren routine returns a positive integer that represents the number of children that belong to the widget.

DXmPrintWgtAugmentList(3X) -- Defines additional print formats and lets you add new options to the print widget option menus.

The DXmPrintWgtAugmentList routine defines additional print formats and lets you add new options to the print widget option menus. Note that the return value (an integer) is not required when adding p...

DXmPrintWgtPrintJob(3X) -- Submits files to the print service.

The DXmPrintWgtPrintJob routine completes the submission of the identified files to the appropriate print service and returns the success of the print job to the application.

DXmSvnAddEntries(3X) -- Opens new entries in the structure.

The DXmSvnAddEntries routine enables an application to process the expansion of an entry. The value supplied for count determines how many entries the application should open. The actual text of the e...

DXmSvnAutoScrollCheck(3X) -- Controls whether the DxmSvnAutoScrollDisplay routine should be called.

The DXmSvnAutoScrollCheck routine determines whether the cursor is currently in an area where automatic scrolling (initiated when the user moves an entry outside the window) can occur. This routine re...

DXmSvnAutoScrollDisplay(3X) -- Automatically scrolls the screen one unit based on the cursor position.

The DXmSvnAutoScrollDisplay routine automatically scrolls the screen one unit based on the current cursor location. If the cursor is not in a location that permits automatic scrolling, this call is ig...

DXmSvnClearHighlight(3X) -- Removes (clears) highlighting from a specified entry.

The DXmSvnClearHighlight routine removes (clears) highlighting from a specified entry in the structure. If the entry is not currently highlighted, this call is ignored. Make this call in your applicat...

DXmSvnClearHighlighting(3X) -- Removes (clears) all highlighting from the entries.

The DXmSvnClearHighlighting routine removes (clears) all highlighting from all entries in the structure. If there are currently no highlighted entries, this call is ignored. Make this call in your app...

DXmSvnClearSelection(3X) -- Clears (cancels) the selection of a specified entry.

The DXmSvnClearSelection routine clears, or cancels, the selection of a particular entry in the structure. If the entry is not currently selected, the call is ignored. Make this call in your applicati...

DXmSvnClearSelections(3X) -- Clears all selections.

The DXmSvnClearSelections routine clears (cancels) all of the entries in the structure. If no entries are currently selected, the call is ignored. (Use the DXmSvnGetSelections, DXmSvnClearSelections, ...

DXmSvnDeleteEntries(3X) -- Deletes entries from the structure.

The DXmSvnDeleteEntries routine enables an application to process the removal (collapse) of an entry. This routine specifies how many entries to delete and after which entry those deletions should beg...

DXmSvnDisableDisplay(3X) -- Temporarily disables the SVN widget from generating a display.

The DXmSvnDisableDisplay routine allows your application to make changes to the SVN widget without the user making additional changes. For example, the DXmSvnDisableDisplay routine must be called when...

DXmSvnEnableDisplay(3X) -- Reenables the SVN widget.

The DXmSvnEnableDisplay routine reenables the SVN widget, which then determines whether to update the display (make changes visible to the user) based on activities recorded while the SVN widget was i...

DXmSvnFlushEntry(3X) -- Displays the specified entry on the screen if it is the next logically displayed entry.

The DXmSvnFlushEntry routine displays (or "flushes") an entry on the screen (in outline mode only) if the entry number passed to the routine is one integer greater than the entry number of the last ...

DXmSvnGetComponentNumber(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the component number containing a supplied tag value.

The DXmSvnGetComponentNumber routine is called whenever the application requires the component number that is associated with a particular tag value. If the specified tag value is not found, then a va...

DXmSvnGetComponentTag(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) a component tag for a specified component number.

The DXmSvnGetComponentTag routine retrieves (returns) a component tag for a specified component number whenever the application requires that information. You can set the value for this tag by using t...

DXmSvnGetComponentText(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the address of a compound string.

The DXmSvnGetComponentText routine returns the address of a compound string that was previously stored from a call to the DXmSvnSetComponentText routine.

DXmSvnGetComponentWidth(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the width of a specified component.

The DXmSvnGetComponentWidth routine is called whenever the application requires the component width that is associated with a particular component number. You can set the value for the width by using ...

DXmSvnGetDisplayed(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) displayed entry numbers and related information necessary to draw a correspondin...

The DXmSvnGetDisplayed routine returns information about the entries that the SVN widget is currently displaying. This information can then be used to keep a simultaneous display up to date with the S...

DXmSvnGetEntryLevel(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the level of an entry in the display.

The DXmSvnGetEntryLevel routine is called whenever the application requires the level number for a given entry number.

DXmSvnGetEntryNumber(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) an entry number for a specified entry tag value.

The DXmSvnGetEntryNumber routine retrieves (returns) an entry number for a specified entry tag value whenever the application requires that information.

DXmSvnGetEntryPosition(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the position of an entry in the display.

The DXmSvnGetEntryPosition routine allows an application to determine the position of entries. The routine interprets the x and y coordinates differently, depending on the application's mode: Outline...

DXmSvnGetEntrySensitivity(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the sensitivity of an entry in the display.

The DXmSvnGetEntrySensitivity routine returns the sensitivity state (which indicates whether the user can select an entry) whenever the application requires that information for a given entry.

DXmSvnGetEntryTag(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) an entry's tag for a specified entry number.

The DXmSvnGetEntryTag routine retrieves an entry tag value for a specified entry number. The routine returns a value of 0 if the entry tag value has never been specified for the given entry number in ...

DXmSvnGetHighlighted(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) a list of entries currently highlighted by the user.

The DXmSvnGetHighlighted routine returns a list of entries that are currently highlighted by the user. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDisplay and DXmSvnEnableDisplay ...

DXmSvnGetNumDisplayed(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the number of entries currently being displayed in the window.

The DXmSvnGetNumDisplayed routine returns the number of entries currently being displayed in the SVN window. Use this routine to determine the number of entries required in the arrays being passed to ...

DXmSvnGetNumHighlighted(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the number of highlighted entries.

The DXmSvnGetNumHighlighted routine returns the number of entries currently highlighted by the user. Use this routine to determine the number of entries required in the array being passed to the DXmSv...

DXmSvnGetNumSelections(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the number of selected entries.

The DXmSvnGetNumSelections routine returns the number of entries currently selected by the user. Use this routine to determine the number of entries required in the array being passed to the DXmSvnGet...

DXmSvnGetPrimaryWorkWidget(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the identifier (widget ID) of the primary SVN work widget.

The DXmSvnGetPrimaryWorkWidget routine is a read-only routine that returns the identifier (widget ID) of the primary work widget (window).

DXmSvnGetSecondaryWorkWidget(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the identifier (widget ID) of the secondary SVN work widget.

The DXmSvnGetSecondaryWorkWidget routine is a read-only routine that returns the identifier (widget ID) of the secondary work widget (window).

DXmSvnGetSelections(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) a list of selected entry numbers.

The DXmSvnGetSelections routine returns a list of entries that are currently selected by the user. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDisplay and DXmSvnEnableDisplay to e...

DXmSvnGetTreePosition(3X) -- Retrieves (returns) the position of the display window for future use.

The DXmSvnGetTreePosition routine obtains the upper-left coordinate position of the display window that is within the virtual display. It thus provides a way for applications to determine the exact po...

DXmSvnHideHighlighting(3X) -- Specifies that the SVN widget show highlighted entries in the default format, without using highligh...

The DXmSvnHideHighlighting routine specifies that the SVN widget show highlighted entries in the default format, without drawing highlighting graphics around those entries. Make this call in your appl...

DXmSvnHideSelections(3X) -- Specifies that the SVN widget show selected entries in the default format, without drawing selection...

The DXmSvnHideSelections routine specifies that the SVN widget show selected entries in the default format (reverse video in outline mode), without drawing selection graphics on the entries even if th...

DXmSvnHighlightAll(3X) -- Highlights all entries.

The DXmSvnHighlightAll routine allows an application to highlight all entries in the structure using a command from the application's menu. The entries are displayed in a rectangular box (drawn with ...

DXmSvnHighlightEntry(3X) -- Highlights a specified entry.

The DXmSvnHighlightEntry routine designates a particular entry as highlighted. If the entry is already highlighted, this call is ignored. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisa...

DXmSvnInsertComponent(3X) -- Inserts a new component into each SVN entry.

The DXmSvnInsertComponent routine inserts a new component for each entry currently recognized by the SVN widget. All entries that are currently valid become invalid during this operation. Note the fol...

DXmSvnInvalidateEntry(3X) -- Specifies that the SVN widget redisplay (update) an entry.

The DXmSvnInvalidateEntry routine allows an application to modify an underlying entry (for example, changing the text or highlighting) by directing the SVN widget to issue the DXmSvnNgetEntryCallback ...

DXmSvnMapPosition(3X) -- Associates the x and y position with an entry number.

The DXmSvnMapPosition routine uses a supplied x and y coordinate to determine which entry the user was positioned over when the mouse button was pressed or released. DXmSvnMapPosition(3X)

DXmSvnPositionDisplay(3X) -- Displays a specified entry.

The DXmSvnPositionDisplay routine ensures that the entries being displayed contain a specified entry. This routine allows the application to position a particular entry at the top, middle, or bottom o...

DXmSvnRemoveComponent(3X) -- Removes a component from each SVN entry.

The DXmSvnRemoveComponent routine removes a new component for any entry currently recognized by the SVN widget. All entries that are currently valid continue to be valid after the component is removed...

DXmSvnSelectAll(3X) -- Selects all entries.

The DXmSvnSelectAll routine allows the application to designate all entries in the structure as selected (they are displayed using reverse video) using a command from the application's menu. Make thi...

DXmSvnSelectComponent(3X) -- Selects an entry using a specific component.

The DXmSvnSelectComponent routine designates a specified entry as selected. It differs from the DXmSvnSelectEntry routine because it associates a specific component with the selection. If the entry is...

DXmSvnSelectEntry(3X) -- Selects a specified entry.

The DXmSvnSelectEntry routine designates a particular entry as selected. If the entry is already selected, this call is ignored. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDispla...

DXmSvnSetApplDragging(3X) -- Turns application dragging mode on or off in the SVN widget.

The DXmSvnSetApplDragging routine either turns application dragging mode on or off. When application dragging mode is on (on_off is set to 1), the application controls dragging operations by calling t...

DXmSvnSetComponentHidden(3X) -- Controls which modes the SVN widget uses to display a particular component.

The DXmSvnSetComponentHidden routine enables an application to prevent a component (excluding subwidgets) from being displayed in a particular mode, thus making that component "hidden". By default, ...

DXmSvnSetComponentPixmap(3X) -- Adds a pixmap component to an entry.

The DXmSvnSetComponentPixmap routine sets a component of an entry to be a pixmap. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDisplay and DXmSvnEnableDisplay. If your application ...

DXmSvnSetComponentTag(3X) -- Sets the tag of a component.

The DXmSvnSetComponentTag routine sets the widget level component tag data. (The SVN widget never examines this tag.) This tag may be lost if the corresponding component is removed with the DXmSvnRemo...

DXmSvnSetComponentText(3X) -- Adds a read-only component string to an entry.

The DXmSvnSetComponentText routine sets a component of an entry to be a read-only compound string. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDisplay and DXmSvnEnableDisplay. If ...

DXmSvnSetComponentWidget(3X) -- Adds an SVN subwidget component to an entry.

The DXmSvnSetComponentWidget routine sets a component of an entry to be a subwidget, which enables an application to put read-write text or a push button in an entry. The application is responsible fo...

DXmSvnSetComponentWidth(3X) -- Sets the width of a component.

The DXmSvnSetComponentWidth routine sets the widget level component width data. This width is used only when the widget is displaying in column mode. If a component found in this column is larger than...

DXmSvnSetEntry(3X) -- Provides the SVN widget with new entry level information.

The DXmSvnSetEntry routine enables an application to respond to a DXmSvnCRGetEntry callback requesting the information for an entry. You can specify a subset of the information allowed on this call by...

DXmSvnSetEntryIndexWindow(3X) -- Controls whether the SVN widget displays the entry in the index window.

The DXmSvnSetEntryIndexWindow routine enables an application to respond to a DXmSvnCRGetEntry callback requesting the information for an entry. It provides some of the functions of the DXmSvnSetEntry ...

DXmSvnSetEntryNumComponents(3X) -- Provides the SVN widget with the number of components for an entry.

The DXmSvnSetEntryNumComponents routine enables an application to respond to a DXmSvnCRGetEntry callback requesting information for an entry. It provides some of the functions of the DXmSvnSetEntry ro...

DXmSvnSetEntryPosition(3X) -- Sets the position of an entry in

The DXmSvnSetEntryPosition routine allows an application to implement the layout of the tree when the tree style is DXmSvnKuserDefinedTree. The application can explicitly position an entry, whether th...

DXmSvnSetEntrySensitivity(3X) -- Controls whether the user can select a particular entry.

The DXmSvnSetEntrySensitivity routine changes the sensitivity of an entry ("sensitivity" means whether the SVN widget will allow the user to select a particular entry). When using this routine, note...

DXmSvnSetEntryTag(3X) -- Assigns an entry tag to a specified entry.

The DXmSvnSetEntryTag routine assigns an entry tag to a specified entry, enabling an application to respond to a DXmSvnNgetEntryCallback callback requesting information about that entry. The function ...

DXmSvnSetTreePosition(3X) -- Sets the position of the tree in tree display mode.

The DXmSvnSetTreePosition routine enables applications to set the exact position of the display from previously stored coordinates. It is valid to call this routine only when the DXmSvnNdisplayMode re...

DXmSvnShowHighlighting(3X) -- Specifies that the SVN widget use highlight graphics when showing highlighted entries.

The DXmSvnShowHighlighting routine shows all highlighting by displaying a box (drawn with dashes) around an entry. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDisplay and DXmSvnEn...

DXmSvnShowSelections(3X) -- Specifies that the SVN widget use selection graphics when displaying selected entries.

The DXmSvnShowSelections routine allows the SVN widget to use reverse video selection graphics when displaying selected entries. Make this call in your application between calls to DXmSvnDisableDispla...

DXmSvnValidateAll(3X) -- Ensures that all entries are valid.

The DXmSvnValidateAll routine examines all entries to ensure that each is valid. If other entries are added while a particular entry is being validated, the routine validates those new entries as well...

echo(3) -- Curses

echochar(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

echowchar(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

echo_wchar(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

ecvt(3) -- Convert a floatingpoint number to a string

The ecvt(), fcvt(), and gcvt() functions convert floatingpoint numbers to null-terminated strings. The ecvt() function converts the value specified by the value parameter to a null-terminated string o...

ecvt_r(3) -- Convert a floatingpoint number to a string

edata(3) -- locations in program and definitions

These names refer neither to routines nor to locations with interesting contents except for _procedure_table, _procedure_string_table, and, for Tru64 UNIX, __istart and __fstart. Except for eprol, the...

encrypt(3) -- DES encryption

EncryptData(3) -- Encrypts all buffer data (CDSA)

EncryptDataFinal(3) -- Finalize staged encryption process (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged encryption process by returning any remaining cipher text not returned in the previous staged encryption call. The cipher text is returned in a single buffer.

EncryptDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged encrypt funciton (CDSA)

EncryptDataInitP(3) -- Initialize the staged encrypt function with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_EncryptDataInit(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its privilege set or the application's privilege set (if the a...

EncryptDataP(3) -- Encrypt data with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_EncryptData(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the application's privilege set (if the a...

EncryptDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged encryption process (CDSA)

end(3) -- locations in program and definitions

enddvagent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

endfsent(3) -- Get information about a file system

For the following functions, entries are read from the /etc/fstab file. The getfsent() function reads the next line of the file, opening the file if necessary. The setfsent() function opens the file o...

endfsent_r(3) -- Get information about a file system

endgrent(3) -- Access group information in the user database

The getgrent(), getgrgid(), getgrnam(), setgrent(), endgrent(), and fgetgrent() functions may be used to access the basic group attributes. The setgrent() function opens the user database (if not alre...

endgrent_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

endhostent(3) -- End retrieval of network host entries

The endhostent() function closes the network hosts database (either the local /etc/hosts file or one of the files distributed by BIND or NIS), previously opened with the gethostbyaddr() or gethostbyna...

endhostent_r(3) -- End retrieval of network host entries

endnetent(3) -- Open, rewind, or close the networks file

The setnetent() (set network entry) function opens the either the local /etc/networks file or the NIS distributed networks file and sets the file marker at the beginning of the file. To determine whic...

endnetent_r(3) -- Open, rewind, or close the networks file

endnetgrent(3) -- Get network group entry

The innetgr() routine accesses the netgroup file and checks to see if the specified input parameters match an entry in the file. The routine returns 1 if it matches an entry, or 0 if it does not. Any ...

endprdfent(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

endprfient(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

endprotoent(3) -- Close the network protocols database file

The endprotoent() function closes either the local /etc/protocols file or the NIS distributed protocols file, previously opened with the getprotoent(), getprotobyname(), or getprotobynumber() function...

endprotoent_r(3) -- Close the network protocols database file

endprpwent(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

endprtcent(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

endpwent(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

The endpwent(), fgetpwent(), getpwent(), getpwnam(), getpwuid(), putpwent(), and setpwent() functions may be used to access the basic user attributes. The getpwent(), getpwnam(), and getpwuid() functi...

endpwent_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

endrpcent(3) -- get rpc entry

The getrpcent(), getrpcbynumber(), and getrpcbyname() functions return pointers to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the rpc database: struct rpcent ...

endservent(3) -- Close the network services database file.

The endservent() function closes either the local /etc/services file or the NIS distributed services file, previously opened with the getservent(), getservbyname(), or getservbyport() function. To det...

endservent_r(3) -- Close the network services database file.

endttyent(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

The getttyent() and getttynam() functions each return a pointer to an object that has the following ttyent fields. These fields describe a line from the secure tty description file. The members of the...

endttyent_r(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

endusershell(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

The getusershell() function returns a pointer to a string that contains the name of a legal user shell as defined by the system manager in the /etc/shells file. If the /etc/shells file does not exist,...

endusershell_r(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

endutent(3) -- Access utmp file entries

The getutent(), getutid(), and getutline() functions return a pointer to a utmp structure. The getutent() function reads the next entry from a file similar to the utmp file. If the file is not already...

endutent_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

endutxent(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

These functions provide access to the user accounting database. The getutxent() function reads the next entry from the user accounting database. If the database is not already open, getutxent() opens ...

endwin(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

enter_quiet_zone(3) -- Prevent keyboard interruption of program actions (Enhanced Security)

The enter_quiet_zone() function sets the appropriate signals to a state that prevents keyboard interruption of program actions. If this function is called multiple times without an intervening exit_qu...

eprol(3) -- locations in program and definitions

erand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

erand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

erase(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

erasechar(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

erasewchar(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

erf(3) -- Error functions

The erf(), erff(), and erfl() functions return the error function of x, where erf(x), erff(x), and erfl(x) equal (2/sqrt(pi)) times the area under the curve e**(-t**2) between 0 and x. The erfc(), erf...

erfc(3) -- Error functions

err(3) -- Error codes

When a call to the OpenSSL library fails, this is usually signalled by the return value, and an error code is stored in an error queue associated with the current thread. The err library provides func...

ERR_add_error_data(3) -- Record an error

The ERR_put_error() function adds an error code to the thread's error queue. It signals that the error of reason code reason occurred in function func of library lib, in line number line of file. Thi...

ERR_clear_error(3) -- Clear the error queue

The ERR_clear_error() function empties the current thread's error queue.

ERR_error_string(3) -- Obtain human-readable error message

The ERR_error_string() function generates a human-readable string representing the error code e, and places it at buf. The buf must be at least 120 bytes long. If buf is NULL, the error string is plac...

ERR_error_string_n(3) -- Obtain human-readable error message

ERR_free_strings(3) -- Load and free error strings

The ERR_load_crypto_strings() function registers the error strings for all libcrypto functions. The SSL_load_error_strings() function does the same, but also registers the libssl error strings. One of...

ERR_func_error_string(3) -- Obtain human-readable error message

ERR_get_error(3) -- Obtain error code and data

The ERR_get_error() function returns the last error code from the thread's error queue and removes the entry. This function can be called repeatedly until there are no more error codes to return. The...

ERR_get_error_line(3) -- Obtain error code and data

ERR_get_error_line_data(3) -- Obtain error code and data

ERR_GET_FUNC(3) -- Get library, function and reason code

The error code returned by the ERR_get_error() function consists of a library number, function code and reason code. The ERR_GET_LIB(), ERR_GET_FUNC(), and ERR_GET_REASON() macros can be used to extra...

ERR_GET_LIB(3) -- Get library, function and reason code

ERR_get_next_error_library(3) -- Load arbitrary error strings

The ERR_load_strings() function registers error strings for library number lib. The str is an array of error string data: typedef struct ERR_string_data_st { unsigned long error; char *string; } ERR_S...

ERR_GET_REASON(3) -- Get library, function and reason code

ERR_lib_error_string(3) -- Obtain human-readable error message

ERR_load_crypto_strings(3) -- Load and free error strings

ERR_load_SSL_strings(3) -- Load error strings

The ERR_load_crypto_strings() function registers the error strings for all libcrypto functions. The ERR_load_SSL_strings() function registers the error strings for all libssl functions. The SSL_load_e...

ERR_load_strings(3) -- Load arbitrary error strings

ERR_PACK(3) -- Load arbitrary error strings

ERR_peek_error(3) -- Obtain error code and data

ERR_peek_error_line(3) -- Obtain error code and data

ERR_peek_error_line_data(3) -- Obtain error code and data

ERR_print_errors(3) -- Print error messages

ERR_print_errors() is a convenience function that prints the error strings for all errors that OpenSSL has recorded to bp, thus emptying the error queue. The ERR_print_errors_fp() function is the same...

ERR_print_errors_fp(3) -- Print error messages

ERR_put_error(3) -- Record an error

ERR_reason_error_string(3) -- Obtain human-readable error message

ERR_remove_state(3) -- Free a thread's error queue

The ERR_remove_state() function frees the error queue associated with thread pid. If pid == 0, the current thread will have its error queue removed. Since error queue data structures are allocated aut...

escap_cmp_fields(3) -- parser routines for

The escap_parse_fields() routine parses the text in buffer according to the field information in partab, storing the results in the data area referenced by fieldptr and the flags for which fields are ...

escap_copy_fields(3) -- parser routines for

escap_parse_fields(3) -- parser routines for

escap_print_fields(3) -- parser routines for

escap_size_data(3) -- parser routines for

etext(3) -- locations in program and definitions

ethers(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

These routines are useful for mapping 48-bit Ethernet numbers to their ASCII representations or their corresponding host names, and vice versa. The mapping is obtained from the /etc/ethers database; s...

ether_aton(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

ether_hostton(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

ether_line(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

ether_ntoa(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

ether_ntohost(3) -- Ethernet address mapping operations

EventNotifyManager(3) -- Receive an event notification (CDSA)

This function receives an event notification from another module manager. The source manager is identified by its service mask. The specified event type is interpreted by the received and the appropri...

EvmConnCheck(3) -- Maintains connection with the EVM daemon

The EvmConnCheck() routine checks whether there is any I/O activity outstanding on the connection. If there is, IOWaiting is set to EvmTRUE. The program should then call EvmConnDispatch() to handle it...

EvmConnControl(3) -- Controls information for an EVM connection

The EvmConnControl() routine allows you to set or get control information for a connection. The following table shows the available values for the request argument and the associated value of the arg ...

EvmConnCreate(3) -- Establish or destroy connection with the EVM daemon

The EvmConnCreate() routine establishes a connection between a client process and the EVM daemon. If the connection is successful, a pointer to a new connection context is returned in the connection a...

EvmConnCreatePoster(3) -- Establish or destroy connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnCreateSubscriber(3) -- Establish or destroy connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnDestroy(3) -- Establish or destroy connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnDispatch(3) -- Maintains connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnFdGet(3) -- Establish or destroy connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnFlush(3) -- Maintains connection with the EVM daemon

EvmConnRegistrationGet(3) -- Establishes a subscription for event notification

To receive notification of events as they happen, a program must establish a listening connection to the EVM daemon, using the EvmConnCreate(3) routine. The program must then call EvmConnSubscribe() t...

EvmConnSubscribe(3) -- Establishes a subscription for event notification

EvmConnTemplateScan(3) -- Establishes a subscription for event notification

EvmConnWait(3) -- Maintains connection with the EVM daemon

EvmEventCreate(3) -- Creates and destroys events

The EvmEventCreate() routine creates an empty event. The newly created event is returned in the event reference argument. The EvmEventCreateVa() routine creates an event and adds the supplied items in...

EvmEventCreateVa(3) -- Creates and destroys events

EvmEventDestroy(3) -- Creates and destroys events

EvmEventDump(3) -- Dumps an event in displayable form

The EvmEventDump() routine dumps an event in display format. All data items and variables contained in the event are displayed.

EvmEventDup(3) -- Creates and destroys events

EvmEventFormat(3) -- Format events for display

Information contained in an event must be formatted to present it in human-readable form. The event poster supplies formatting information through the event's format data item, and the routines descr...

EvmEventFormatFromTemplate(3) -- Format events for display

EvmEventNameMatch(3) -- Match event name

Because special matching rules apply when deciding whether a candidate event name matches a known name, the EVM name matching functions should be used for matching purposes, rather than the C string c...

EvmEventNameMatchStr(3) -- Match event name

EvmEventPost(3) -- Posts an event

An EVM client program uses the routines described on this page to pass events to the EVM daemon, for distribution to subscribers. EvmEventPost() posts an event that has already been created with EvmEv...

EvmEventPostVa(3) -- Posts an event

EvmEventRead(3) -- Performs I/O of events to and from a file

The EvmEventRead() routine creates a new event structure and populates it with an event read from the supplied file descriptor (fd). The EvmEventDestroy() routine must be used to destroy the new event...

EvmEventValidate(3) -- Performs a data integrity check on an event.

The EvmEventValidate() routine performs a data integrity check on an event. This is intended to validate an event that has just been received over a connection or retrieved from storage. It should not...

EvmEventWrite(3) -- Performs I/O of events to and from a file

EvmFilterCreate(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

The filter evaluation routines are used to check whether an event matches a given event filter. Although most EVM clients do not need to use these functions directly, they are useful to clients that p...

EvmFilterDestroy(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

EvmFilterIsFile(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

EvmFilterReadFile(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

EvmFilterSet(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

EvmFilterTest(3) -- Event filter evaluator routines

EvmItemGet(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

Routines in this reference page deal with manipulating data in the standard items in an event. The EvmItemSet() routine sets the value of the event data item specified by item_id to the item_value sup...

EvmItemListFree(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

EvmItemListGet(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

EvmItemRelease(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

EvmItemSet(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

EvmItemSetVa(3) -- Create and manipulate event items

EvmSrvMessageGet(3) -- Event service functions

The EvmSrvStart() routine creates a service connection to the EVM daemon, requesting that the service identified as service_name be started. If the service is known to the daemon, it is started as a c...

EvmSrvStart(3) -- Event service functions

EvmStatusTextGet(3) -- Formats text version of EVM status code

The EvmStatusTextGet() routine takes an EVM API status code as input, and returns a string describing the status. This string can be used for error display or debugging purposes. The string returned i...

EvmVarFormat(3) -- Format events for display

EvmVarGet(3) -- Manipulate event variables

The EvmVarSet() routine sets the value of a variable data item, indicated by v_name, in an event. This routine is used both for adding a variable and for altering its value. If the v_name variable is ...

EvmVarGetOpaque(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarGetString(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarGetType(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarGetXxx(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarListFree(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarListGet(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarRelease(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarSet(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarSetOpaque(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarSetStringI18N(3) -- Manipulate event variables

EvmVarSetXxx(3) -- Manipulate event variables

evp(3) -- High-level cryptographic functions

The EVP library provides a high-level interface to cryptographic functions. EVP_Seal... and EVP_Open... provide public key encryption and decryption to implement digital envelopes. The EVP_Sign... and...

EVP_CipherFinal(3) -- EVP cipher routines

The EVP cipher routines are a high level interface to certain symmetric ciphers. The EVP_EncryptInit() function initializes a cipher context ctx for encryption with cipher type. The type is usually su...

EVP_CipherInit(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CipherUpdate(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_asn1_to_param(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_block_size(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_block_size(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_cipher(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_cleanup(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_ctrl(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_flags(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_get_app_data(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_iv_length(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_key_length(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_mode(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_nid(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_app_data(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_key_length(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_CTX_type(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_flags(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_iv_length(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_key_length(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_mode(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_nid(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_param_to_asn1(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_CIPHER_type(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_DecryptFinal(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_DecryptInit(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_DecryptUpdate(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_DigestFinal(3) -- EVP digest routines

The EVP digest routines are a high level interface to message digests. The EVP_DigestInit() function initializes a digest context ctx to use a digest type. This will typically be supplied by a functio...

EVP_DigestInit(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_DigestUpdate(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_dss(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_dss1(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_EncryptFinal(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_EncryptInit(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_EncryptUpdate(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_get_cipherbyname(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_get_cipherbynid(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_get_cipherbyobj(3) -- EVP cipher routines

EVP_get_digestbyname(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_get_digestbynid(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_get_digestbyobj(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MAX_MD_SIZE(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_md2(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_md5(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_mdc2(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_block_size(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_CTX_block_size(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_CTX_copy(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_CTX_md(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_CTX_size(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_CTX_type(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_md_null(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_pkey_type(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_size(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_MD_type(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_OpenFinal(3) -- EVP envelope decryption

The EVP envelope routines are a high level interface to envelope decryption. They decrypt a public key encrypted symmetric key and then decrypt data using it. The EVP_OpenInit() function initializes a...

EVP_OpenInit(3) -- EVP envelope decryption

EVP_OpenUpdate(3) -- EVP envelope decryption

EVP_ripemd160(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_SealFinal(3) -- EVP envelope encryption

The EVP envelope routines are a high level interface to envelope encryption. They generate a random key and then envelope it by using public key encryption. Data can then be encrypted using this key. ...

EVP_SealInit(3) -- EVP envelope encryption

EVP_SealUpdate(3) -- EVP envelope encryption

EVP_sha(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_sha1(3) -- EVP digest routines

EVP_SignFinal(3) -- EVP signing functions

The EVP signature routines are a high level interface to digital signatures. The EVP_SignInit() function initializes a signing context ctx to using digest type. This typically will be supplied by a fu...

EVP_SignInit(3) -- EVP signing functions

EVP_SignUpdate(3) -- EVP signing functions

EVP_VerifyFinal(3) -- EVP signature verification functions

The EVP signature verification routines are a high level interface to digital signatures. The EVP_VerifyInit() function initializes a verification context ctx to using digest type. This will typically...

EVP_VerifyInit(3) -- EVP signature verification functions

EVP_VerifyUpdate(3) -- EVP signature verification functions

exception_dispatcher(3) -- routines to search and call handlers for exceptions.

These routines allow user and compiler generated code to initiate the exception process. Typically, programs written in the C programming language use these routines within the structured exception ha...

exception_intro(3) -- an overview of exception support supplied in libexc.a

The exception mechanism used on Tru64 UNIX requires no execution time in user code. The only costs before an exception occurs are one-time registering and deregistering of modules with the run-time ex...

exc_add_gp_range(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

The exception system needs to access procedure-specific information at run time in order to perform unwinds and call handlers. You find this information by mapping a PC to a procedure and its structur...

exc_add_pc_range(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_add_pc_range_table(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_capture_context(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

The exc_resume() and exc_continue() functions perform essentially the same operation as longjmp(3). The exc_resume() function is a libexc entry point. The exc_capture_context() function saves the curr...

exc_continue(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

exc_dispatch_exception(3) -- routines to search and call handlers for exceptions.

exc_find_frame_ptr(3) -- routines to unwind a context

All of the unwind routines perform a virtual unwind. Unlike the routines described in exc_resume(3), these routines do not actually unwind a procedure call by modifying the real registers and other ma...

exc_longjmp(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

exc_lookup_function_entry(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_lookup_function_table(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_lookup_gp(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_raise_exception(3) -- routines to search and call handlers for exceptions.

exc_raise_signal_exception(3) -- routines to search and call handlers for exceptions.

exc_raise_status_exception(3) -- routines to search and call handlers for exceptions.

exc_remote_lookup_function_entry(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_remote_virtual_unwind(3) -- routines to unwind a context

exc_remove_gp_range(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_remove_pc_range_table(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

exc_resume(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

exc_set_last_chance_handler(3) -- support routines for unhandled exceptions

When called as the result of an exception, exc_dispatch_exception(3) attempts to find a handler to process the exception by searching the stack frames of procedures in the call chain. It does this by ...

exc_unwind(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

exc_virtual_unwind(3) -- routines to unwind a context

exit_quiet_zone(3) -- Prevent keyboard interruption of program actions (Enhanced Security)

exp(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

The exp(), expf(), and expl() functions compute the value of the exponential function, defined as e**x, where e is the constant used as a base for natural logarithms. The expm1(), expm1f(), and expm1l...

expacct(3) -- Expand accounting record

The expacct() function converts acct structure members that have been packed into a pseudo floating-point format from the compressed data type comp_t to data type double.

expm1(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

fabs(3) -- Calculate Euclidean distance and absolute value

fattach(3) -- Attach a STREAMS-based file descriptor to a file in the file system name space

The fattach() function associates a STREAMS-based file descriptor to the file pointed to by the path parameter. A successful call to the fattach() function causes all pathnames that name the file name...

fclose(3) -- Close or flush a stream

The fclose() function writes buffered data to the stream specified by the stream parameter, and then closes the associated file. The function is automatically called for all open files when the exit()...

fclose_unlocked(3) -- Close or flush a stream

fcvt(3) -- Convert a floatingpoint number to a string

fcvt_r(3) -- Convert a floatingpoint number to a string

fdelproplist(3) -- removes Extended File Attributes from a file

fdetach(3) -- Detach a STREAMS-based file descriptor from a file in the file system name space

The fdetach() function disassociates a STREAMS-based file descriptor from the file pointed to by the path parameter. The STREAMS-based file descriptor was associated with the file by a prior fattach()...

fdopen(3) -- Open a stream

The fopen() function opens the file named by the path parameter and associates a stream with it, returning a pointer to the FILE structure of this stream. The mode parameter controls the access allowe...

feof(3) -- Test for EOF on a stream

The feof() function tests the EOF (end-of-file) condition on the specified stream.

ferror(3) -- Test the error indicator on a stream

The ferror() function tests whether input/output errors have occurred on the specified stream.

fetch(3) -- Database subroutines

fflush(3) -- Close or flush a stream

fflush_unlocked(3) -- Close or flush a stream

ffs(3) -- Find first set bit

The ffs() function finds the first bit set (beginning with the least significant bit) and returns the index of that bit. Bits are numbered starting at 1 (the least significant bit). If pattern is 0 (z...

fgetc(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

The getc() function returns the next byte from the input specified by the stream parameter and moves the file pointer, if defined, ahead one byte in stream. The getc() function may be a macro (dependi...

fgetgrent(3) -- Access group information in the user database

fgetgrent_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

fgetpos(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

The fseek() function sets the position of the next input or output operation on the I/O stream specified by the stream parameter. The position of the next operation is determined by the offset paramet...

fgetproplist(3) -- gets the Extended File Attributes of a file

The getproplist() function gets the Extended File Attributes of a file pointed to by *path and places them in the Extended File Attribute buffer pointed to by nbytes. Which Extended File Attributes wi...

fgetpwent(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

fgetpwent_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

fgets(3) -- Get a string from a stream

The gets() function reads bytes from the standard input stream, stdin, into the array pointed to by the string parameter. Data is read until a newline character is read or an end-of-file condition is ...

fgetwc(3) -- Get a wide character from an input stream

The fgetwc() function gets the next character from the input stream specified by the stream parameter, converts it to a wide-character code, and advances the associated file position indicator for the...

fgetws(3) -- Get a string from a stream

The fgetws() function reads characters from stream, converts them into the corresponding wide characters, and stores the result in the wchar_t array pointed to by the wcs parameter. The function reads...

fileno(3) -- Map a stream pointer to a file descriptor

The fileno() function returns the integer file descriptor associated with the stream pointed to by stream.

filter(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

find_rpd(3) -- routines to support mapping program counters to the data structures defined at run time

firstkey(3) -- Database subroutines

flash(3) -- Curses bell and screen flash routines

flockfile(3) -- locking functions

The flockfile(), ftrylockfile, and funlockfile functions provide for explicit application-level locking of stdio (FILE*) objects. These functions can be used by a thread to delineate a sequence of I/O...

floor(3) -- Round floatingpoint

flushinp(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

fmin(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

These functions perform arithmetic on integers of arbitrary length. The integers are stored using the defined type MINT. Pointers to a MINT can be initialized using theitom() function, which sets the ...

fmod(3) -- Compute the floating-point remainder

fmout(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

fmtmsg(3) -- Display a message in the specified format

The fmtmsg() function writes a formatted message to either standard error, the system console, or both. Any message typically written to standard error (stderr) by printf() can also be displayed using...

fnmatch(3) -- Match filename patterns

The fnmatch() function checks the string specified by the string parameter to see if it matches the pattern specified by the pattern parameter. This routine follows the match criteria of the glob() fu...

fold_string_w(3) -- maps one wide-character string to another, performing the specified Unicode character transformation

The fold_string_w() function maps one wide-character string to another and performs the specified Unicode character transformation. The function then stores the transformed wide-character string in th...

fopen(3) -- Open a stream

forder(3) -- Database subroutines

forkpty(3) -- Open and fork pseudoterminals

The openpty() function opens the pty master/slave pair and sets the terminal attributes of the slave pseudoterminal according to the specifications in the termp and winp parameters. The forkpty() func...

fprintf(3) -- Print formatted output

The format parameter is a character string that contains two types of objects: Literal characters, which are copied to the output stream. Conversion specifications, each of which causes zero or more i...

fputc(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

The putc() function writes the byte c (converted to an unsigned char) to the output specified by the stream parameter. The byte is written at the position at which the file pointer is currently pointi...

fputs(3) -- Writes a string to a stream

The puts() function writes the null-terminated string pointed to by the string parameter, followed by a newline character, to the standard output stream, stdout. The fputs() function writes the null-t...

fputwc(3) -- Write a wide character to a stream

The fputwc() function converts the wchar_t specified by the wc parameter to its equivalent multibyte character and then writes the multibyte character to the file or terminal associated with the strea...

fputws(3) -- Write a wide-character string to a stream

The fputws() function reads the wchar_t string pointed to by the wcs parameter, converts each wide character to a multibyte character, and writes the result to the output stream pointed to by the stre...

fp_class(3) -- Related miscellaneous IEEE arithmetic functions.

fread(3) -- Perform input/output operations

The fread() function copies num_items of data of length size from the input stream into an array beginning at the location pointed to by the pointer r parameter. The fread() function stops copying byt...

fread_unlocked(3) -- Perform input/output operations

free(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

freeaddrinfo(3) -- Free system resources used by an address information structure

The freeaddrinfo() routine frees one or more addrinfo structures and any dynamic storage associated with the structures. The process continues until the routine encounters a NULL ai_next pointer.

freehostent(3) -- Return hostent structures and dynamic storage to the system

The freehostent() function frees hostent structures and dynamic memory to the system. You should use this return to free hostent structures that were returned by the getipnodebyname() and getipnodebya...

FreeKey(3) -- Clean up keys (CDSA)

freopen(3) -- Open a stream

frexp(3) -- Manipulate floating-point numbers

Every nonzero number can be written uniquely as the normalized mantissa (fraction) z times 2 raised to the power p, where the absolute value of z is in the range [0.5, 1.0), and the exponent p, is an ...

fscanf(3) -- Convert formatted input

The scanf(), fscanf(), and sscanf() functions read character data, interpret it according to a format, and store the converted results into specified memory locations. The format parameter contains co...

fseek(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

fseeko(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

fseek_unlocked(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

fsetpos(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

fsetproplist(3) -- assigns Extended File Attributes to a file

The setproplist() function assigns a buffer of Extended File Attributes, pointed to by nbytes, to a file pointed to by *path. The Extended File Attribute buffer is defined in sys/proplist.h. An Extend...

fs_config_get_devs(3) -- Obtains a list of devices in an AdvFS domain configuration.

Use this function to obtain a list of devices from which an AdvFS domain is built. The list, expressed in XML markup, contains physical disks used directly by AdvFS volumes and those used to make up L...

fs_get_dom_list(3) -- Obtains a list of all AdvFS domains on the current system.

This function obtains a list of both active and inactive AdvFS domain names on a system.

fs_get_fset_list(3) -- Obtains a list of all the filesets in an AdvFS domain.

This function obtains a list of names of all filesets in a named AdvFS domain. Names of both mounted filesets and unmounted filesets are returned. Both active and inactive domains can be queried.

fs_restore_config(3) -- Restores an AdvFS domain configuration.

The fs_restore_config function recreates the configuration of an AdvFS domain by remapping it on cloned disks. You can capture the configuration by using the fs_save_config function and restore it on ...

fs_save_config(3) -- Saves an AdvFS domain configuration.

This function saves the configuration of an AdvFS domain, including information about its filesets and volumes. Filesets and volumes can remain online while the configuration is captured. Valid names ...

ftell(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

ftello(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

ftok(3) -- Generate a standard interprocess communication key

The ftok() function returns a key, based on the path_name and project_id parameters, that is usable in subsequent calls to the msgget(), semget(), and shmget() functions. The ftok() function returns t...

ftrylockfilefunlockfile(3) -- locking functions

ftw(3) -- Walks a file tree

The ftw() function recursively searches the directory hierarchy that descends from the directory specified by the path parameter. For each object in the hierarchy, the ftw() function calls the functio...

fwide(3) -- Set stream orientation to byte or wide-character

The fwide() function, depending on the value of the mode parameter, sets or queries the orientation of a stream of data specified by a FILE structure. If the stream has no orientation, a positive or n...

fwprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters

The wprintf() function converts, formats, and writes its value parameters, under control of the format parameter, to the standard output stream stdout. The fwprintf() function converts, formats, and w...

fwrite(3) -- Perform input/output operations

fwrite_unlocked(3) -- Perform input/output operations

fwscanf(3) -- Convert formatted wide-character input

The wscanf(), fwscanf(), and swscanf() functions read wide-character data, interpret it according to a format, and store the converted results into specified memory locations. The format parameter con...

gai_strerror(3) -- Print an error message string based on a return code from the getaddrinfo or getnameinfo routine

The gai_strerror() routine returns a pointer to a string that describes the error based on an EAI_xxx value returned by the getaddrinfo() or getnameinfo() routine.

gamma(3) -- Compute the logarithm of the gamma function

The lgamma(), lgammaf(), and lgammal() functions return the logarithm of the absolute value of gamma of x, or ln(|G(x)|), where G is the gamma function. The sign of gamma of x is returned in the exter...

gcd(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

gcvt(3) -- Convert a floatingpoint number to a string

GenerateAlgorithmParams(3) -- Generate algorithm parameters (CDSA)

GenerateKey(3) -- Generate a symmetric key (CDSA)

GenerateKeyP(3) -- Generate a key with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to the CSSM_GenerateKey() function. It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the application's privilege ...

GenerateKeyPair(3) -- Generate an asymmetric key pair (CDSA)

GenerateKeyPairP(3) -- Generate an asymmetric key pair with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to the CSSM_GenerateKeyPair() function. It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the application's privil...

GenerateMac(3) -- Compute a message authentication code (CDSA)

This function computes a message authentication code for all data contained in the set of input buffers.

GenerateMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code function.

GenerateMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code function.

GenerateMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of computing a message authentication code (CDSA)

GenerateRandom(3) -- Generate random data (CDSA)

This function generates random data.

getaddrinfo(3) -- Get address information for a network node and service

The getaddrinfo() routine can perform the following: Takes the service location (node name) and returns all addresses that are supported for this name and specified parameters. Takes the service name ...

getbegyx(3) -- Get Curses cursor and window coordinates

getbkgd(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

getbkgrnd(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

getc(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

getcchar(3) -- Get a wide character string and rendition from a cchar_t or set a cchar_t from a wide-character stri...

getch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

getchar(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

getchar_unlocked(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

getclock(3) -- Get current value of system-wide clock

The getclock() function sets the current value of the clock specified by clktyp into the location pointed to by the tp parameter. The clktyp parameter is given as a symbolic constant name, as defined ...

getcwd(3) -- Get the pathname of the current directory

The getcwd() function returns a pointer to a string containing the absolute pathname of the current directory. The getwd() function is called to obtain the pathname. [Tru64 UNIX] If the buffer paramet...

getc_unlocked(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

getdate(3) -- Convert formatted string into time/date structure

The getdate() function fills a struct tm based on a combination of the supplied string argument and the template file of allowable formats for that argument. The template file is obtained from the DAT...

getdate_r(3) -- Convert formatted string into time/date structure

getdiskbyname(3) -- Get the disk description using a disk name

Operations supported by the getdiskbyname function are also supported by the createlabel function. See createlabel(3). The getdiskbyname and getdiskbyname_r functions are supported only for backward c...

getdvagent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

getdvagnam(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

getenv(3) -- Return the value of an environment variable

The getenv() function searches the environment list for a string of the form name=value, and returns a pointer to a string containing the corresponding value for name. The returned string should not b...

getesdfent(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

getesdfnam(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

getesdvent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

getesdvnam(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

getesfient(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getesfinam(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getespwent(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getespwnam(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getespwuid(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getestcent(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getestcnam(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getfsent(3) -- Get information about a file system

getfsent_r(3) -- Get information about a file system

getfsfile(3) -- Get information about a file system

getfsfile_r(3) -- Get information about a file system

getfsspec(3) -- Get information about a file system

getfsspec_r(3) -- Get information about a file system

getgrent(3) -- Access group information in the user database

getgrent_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

getgrgid(3) -- Access group information in the user database

getgrgid_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

getgrnam(3) -- Access group information in the user database

getgrnam_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

gethostbyaddr(3) -- Get a network host entry by address

The gethostbyaddr() routine returns a pointer to a structure of type hostent. Its members specify data obtained from either the local /etc/hosts file or one of the files distributed by DNS/BIND or NIS...

gethostbyaddr_r(3) -- Get a network host entry by address

gethostbyname(3) -- Get a network host entry by name

The gethostbyname() function returns a pointer to a structure of type hostent. Its members specify data obtained from either the local /etc/hosts file or one of the files distributed by DNS/BIND or NI...

gethostbyname_r(3) -- Get a network host entry by name

gethostent(3) -- Open a network host file

The gethostent() (get host entry) function reads the next line of the either the local /etc/hosts file or one of the files distributed by BIND or NIS, opening it if necessary, returning a hostent stru...

gethostent_r(3) -- Open a network host file

gethostsex(3) -- get the byte sex of the host machine

The gethostsex() function returns one of two constants, BIGENDIAN or LITTLEENDIAN, for the sex of the host machine. These constants are in sex.h. gethostsex(3)

getipnodebyaddr(3) -- Get a network host entry by address

The use of this routine is deprecated. Use the getnameinfo(3) routine instead; it is also protocol-independent. The getipnodebyaddr() routine is an evolution of the gethostbyaddr() routine that enable...

getipnodebyname(3) -- Get a network host entry by name for a specific address family

The use of this routine is deprecated. Use the getaddrinfo(3) routine instead; it is also protocol-independent. The getipnodebyname() routine is an evolution of the gethostbyname() routine that enable...

getluid(3) -- Get or set the login UID (Enhanced Security)

The getluid() function gets the login UID associated with the process. The login UID is recorded with most audit events generated by the process, and is sometimes referred to as the audit UID (AUID). ...

getmaxyx(3) -- Get Curses cursor and window coordinates

getmntinfo(3) -- Get information about mounted file systems

The getmntinfo() function returns an array of statfs structures describing each currently mounted file system (see the statfs() reference page). The getmntinfo() function takes a struct statfs **mntbu...

getmntinfo_r(3) -- Get information about mounted file systems

getnameinfo(3) -- Get a node name and service name for an address and port number

The getnameinfo() routine looks up an IP address and port number in a sockaddr structure specified by sa and returns node name and service name text strings in the buffers pointed to by the node and s...

getnetbyaddr(3) -- Get a network entry by address

The getnetbyaddr() function returns a pointer to a structure of type netent. Its members specify data obtained from either the local /etc/networks file or the NIS distributed networks file. To determi...

getnetbyaddr_r(3) -- Get a network entry by address

getnetbyname(3) -- Get a network entry by name

The getnetbyname() function returns a pointer to a structure of type netent. Its members specify data in fields from either the local /etc/networks file or the NIS distributed network database. To det...

getnetbyname_r(3) -- Get a network entry by name

getnetent(3) -- Get a network entry

The getnetent() function retrieves network information by opening and sequentially reading either the local /etc/networks file or the NIS distributed networks file for the requested information. To de...

getnetent_r(3) -- Get a network entry

getnetgrent(3) -- Get network group entry

getnetname(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

getnstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

getnwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

getn_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

GetOperationalStatistics(3) -- Get operational values of a subservice (CDSA)

getopt(3) -- Get option letters from the argument vector

The getopt() function parses argument lists. It returns the next option character in the argv parameter list that matches a character in the optstring parameter. If that option takes an argument, the ...

getparyx(3) -- Get Curses cursor and window coordinates

getpass(3) -- Reads a password

The getpass() function opens the process' controlling terminal file, flushes output, disables echoing, and reads up to a newline character or an end-of-file (EOF) character. The terminal state is the...

getprdfent(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprdfnam(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprfient(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprfinam(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getproplist(3) -- gets the Extended File Attributes of a file

getprotobyname(3) -- Get a protocol entry by protocol name

The getprotobyname() function returns a pointer to a structure of type protoent. Its members specify data in fields from a record line in either the local /etc/protocols file or the NIS network protoc...

getprotobyname_r(3) -- Get a protocol entry by protocol name

getprotobynumber(3) -- Get a protocol entry by number

The getprotobynumber() function returns a pointer to a structure of type protoent. Its members specify data in fields from a record line in either the local /etc/protocols file or NIS distributed netw...

getprotobynumber_r(3) -- Get a protocol entry by number

getprotoent(3) -- Get a protocol entry

The getprotoent() (get protocol entry) function retrieves protocol information from either the local /etc/protocols file or the NIS distributed networks file for the requested information. To determin...

getprotoent_r(3) -- Get a protocol entry

getprpwent(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprpwnam(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprpwuid(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprtcent(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getprtcnam(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

getpw(3) -- get name from uid

The getpw() routine has been superseded by getpwuid(). See getpwent(3). The getpw() routine searches the password file for the (numerical) uid, and fills in buf with the corresponding line; it returns...

getpwent(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getpwent_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getpwnam(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getpwnam_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getpwuid(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getpwuid_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

getrpcbyname(3) -- get rpc entry

getrpcbynumber(3) -- get rpc entry

getrpcent(3) -- get rpc entry

getrpcport(3) -- get RPC port number

The getrpcport() routine returns the port number for version versnum of the RPC program prognam running on host and using protocol proto. It returns 0 if it cannot contact the portmapper or if prognam...

gets(3) -- Get a string from a stream

getservbyname(3) -- Get a service entry by name

The getservbyname() function returns a pointer to a structure of type servent. Its members specify data in fields from a record line in either the local /etc/services file or the NIS distributed netwo...

getservbyname_r(3) -- Get a service entry by name

getservbyport(3) -- Get a service entry by port number

The getservbyport() function returns a pointer to a structure of type servent. Its members specify data in fields from a record line in either the local /etc/services file or the NIS distributed netwo...

getservbyport_r(3) -- Get a service entry by port number

getservent(3) -- Get a services file entry from the /etc/services file.

The getservent() (get service entry) function opens and reads the next line of either the local /etc/services file or the NIS distributed services file for the requested information. To determine whic...

getservent_r(3) -- Get a services file entry from the /etc/services file.

getstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

getsubopt(3) -- Parse suboption arguments from a command line

The getsubopt() function parses suboption arguments in a option argument that was initially parsed by the getopt() function. These suboption arguments must be separated by commas and may consist of ei...

getsvc(3) -- Get a pointer to the svcinfo structure.

The getsvc() function retrieves information from the system about the svcinfo structure by returning a pointer to the structure. This structure is initialized the first time a getsvc() call is made. T...

gettimer(3) -- Get value of a per-process timer

The gettimer() function gets the current value of a perprocess timer.

GetTimeValue(3) -- Get a CSP time value (CDSA)

This function returns a time value maintained by a CSP. This feature will be supported primarily by hardware tokens with an onboard real time clock.

getttyent(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

getttyent_r(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

getttynam(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

getttynam_r(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

gettxt(3) -- Retrieves a text string from a message catalog

A message catalog contains text strings that can be accessed by programs. Message catalogs are created using the gencat and mkcatdefs commands. The gettxt() function searches a message catalog for a s...

getusershell(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

getusershell_r(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

getutent(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutent_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutid(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutid_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutline(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutline_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

getutxent(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

getutxid(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

getutxline(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

getvfsbyname(3) -- Get the virtual file system type number

The getvfsbyname() function returns the type number of the virtual system type identified by typename.

getvfsbynumber(3) -- Get the virtual file system type name

The getvfsbynumber() function returns the symbolic name for the virtual file system type identified by typeno. The type number of a mounted file system can be determined with the statfs() function.

getw(3) -- Get a byte or word from an input stream

getwc(3) -- Get a wide character from an input stream

getwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

getwchar(3) -- Get a wide character from an input stream

getwc_unlocked(3) -- Get a wide character from an input stream

getwd(3) -- Get current directory pathname

The getwd() function determines the absolute pathname of the current directory, then copies that pathname into the array pointed to by the path_name parameter. The maximum pathname length, in characte...

getwin(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

getwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

getyx(3) -- Get Curses cursor and window coordinates

get_crypt_name(3) -- determine the encryption types available (Enhanced Security)

The get_num_crypts() function returns the number of encryption algorithms which the current system supports. This value is non-negative, and at least four. The get_crypt_name() function returns a poin...

get_myaddress(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

get_num_crypts(3) -- determine the encryption types available (Enhanced Security)

get_proplist_entry(3) -- initializes pointers to the corresponding entries in an Extended File Attribute buffer

The get_proplist_entry() function initializes the **name, **value_size, and **value parameters with the corresponding values in the Extended File Attribute buffer pointed to by **bufptr. The function ...

get_seed_es(3) -- Obtain a drand48 seed value for an extended profile (Enhanced Security)

Returns a hashed value of the protected profile for use in random-number generation, such as that used with lrand48 or drand48 and so forth. The get_seed_es() function is used by the login and passwd ...

get_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

get_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

glAccum(3) -- operate on the accumulation buffer

The accumulation buffer is an extended-range color buffer. Images are not rendered into it. Rather, images rendered into one of the color buffers are added to the contents of the accumulation buffer a...

glAlphaFunc(3) -- specify the alpha test function

The alpha test discards fragments depending on the outcome of a comparison between an incoming fragment's alpha value and a constant reference value. glAlphaFunc() specifies the reference value and t...

glAreTexturesResident(3) -- determine if textures are loaded in texture memory

GL establishes a ``working set'' of textures that are resident in texture memory. These textures can be bound to a texture target much more efficiently than textures that are not resident. glAreText...

glArrayElement(3) -- render a vertex using the specified vertex array element

glArrayElement() commands are used within glBegin()/glEnd() pairs to specify vertex and attribute data for point, line, and polygon primitives. If GL_VERTEX_ARRAY is enabled when glArrayElement() is c...

glBegin(3) -- delimit the vertices of a primitive or a group of like primglBeginitives

glBegin() and glEnd() delimit the vertices that define a primitive or a group of like primitives. glBegin() accepts a single argument that specifies in which of ten ways the vertices are interpreted. ...

glBindTexture(3) -- bind a named texture to a texturing target

glBindTexture() lets you create or use a named texture. Calling glBindTexture() with target set to GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_3D and texture set to the name of the newtexture binds the t...

glBitmap(3) -- draw a bitmap

A bitmap is a binary image. When drawn, the bitmap is positioned relative to the current raster position, and frame buffer pixels corresponding to 1's in the bitmap are written using the current rast...

glBlendFunc(3) -- specify pixel arithmetic

In RGBA mode, pixels can be drawn using a function that blends the incoming (source) RGBA values with the RGBA values that are already in the frame buffer (the destination values). Blending is initial...

glCallList(3) -- execute a display list

glCallList() causes the named display list to be executed. The commands saved in the display list are executed in order, just as if they were called without using a display list. If list has not been ...

glCallLists(3) -- execute a list of display lists

glCallLists() causes each display list in the list of names passed as lists to be executed. As a result, the commands saved in each display list are executed in order, just as if they were called with...

glClear(3) -- clear buffers to preset values

glClear() sets the bitplane area of the window to values previously selected by glClearColor(), glClearIndex(), glClearDepth(), glClearStencil(), and glClearAccum(). Multiple color buffers can be clea...

glClearAccum(3) -- specify clear values for the accumulation buffer

glClearAccum() specifies the red, green, blue, and alpha values used by glClear() to clear the accumulation buffer. Values specified by glClearAccum() are clamped to the range [-1, 1].

glClearColor(3) -- specify clear values for the color buffers

glClearColor() specifies the red, green, blue, and alpha values used by glClear() to clear the color buffers. Values specified by glClearColor() are clamped to the range [0, 1].

glClearDepth(3) -- specify the clear value for the depth buffer

glClearDepth() specifies the depth value used by glClear() to clear the depth buffer. Values specified by glClearDepth() are clamped to the range [0, 1].

glClearIndex(3) -- specify the clear value for the color index buffers

glClearIndex() specifies the index used by glClear() to clear the color index buffers. c is not clamped. Rather, c is converted to a fixed-point value with unspecified precision to the right of the bi...

glClearStencil(3) -- specify the clear value for the stencil buffer

glClearStencil() specifies the index used by glClear() to clear the stencil buffer. s is masked with 2 sup m-1, where m is the number of bits in the stencil buffer.

glClipPlane(3) -- specify a plane against which all geometry is clipped

Geometry is always clipped against the boundaries of a six-plane frustum in x, y, and z. glClipPlane allows the specification of additional planes, not necessarily perpendicular to the x, y, or z axis...

glColor(3) -- set the current color

The GL stores both a current single-valued color index and a current four-valued RGBA color. glColor() sets a new four-valued RGBA color. glColor() has two major variants: glColor3() and glColor4(). g...

glColor3b(3) -- set the current color

glColor3bv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3d(3) -- set the current color

glColor3dv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3f(3) -- set the current color

glColor3fv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3i(3) -- set the current color

glColor3iv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3s(3) -- set the current color

glColor3sv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3ub(3) -- set the current color

glColor3ubv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3ui(3) -- set the current color

glColor3uiv(3) -- set the current color

glColor3us(3) -- set the current color

glColor3usv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4b(3) -- set the current color

glColor4bv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4d(3) -- set the current color

glColor4dv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4f(3) -- set the current color

glColor4fv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4i(3) -- set the current color

glColor4iv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4s(3) -- set the current color

glColor4sv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4ub(3) -- set the current color

glColor4ubv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4ui(3) -- set the current color

glColor4uiv(3) -- set the current color

glColor4us(3) -- set the current color

glColor4usv(3) -- set the current color

glColorMask(3) -- enable and disable writing of frame buffer color components

glColorMask() specifies whether the individual color components in the frame buffer can or cannot be written. If red is GL_FALSE, for example, no change is made to the red component of any pixel in an...

glColorMaterial(3) -- cause a material color to track the current color

glColorMaterial() specifies which material parameters track the current color. When GL_COLOR_MATERIAL is enabled, the material parameter or parameters specified by mode, of the material or materials s...

glColorPointer(3) -- define an array of colors

glColorPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of color components to use when rendering. size specifies the number of components per color, and must be 3 or 4. type specifies the data t...

glCopyPixels(3) -- copy pixels in the frame buffer

glCopyPixels() copies a screen-aligned rectangle of pixels from the specified frame buffer location to a region relative to the current raster position. Its operation is well defined only if the entir...

glCopyTexImage1D(3) -- copy pixels into a 1D texture image

glCopyTexImage1D() defines a one-dimensional texture image with pixels from the current GL_READ_BUFFER. The screen-aligned pixel row with left corner at (x, y) and with a length of width+2*border defi...

glCopyTexImage2D(3) -- copy pixels into a 2D texture image

glCopyTexImage2D defines a two-dimensional texture image with pixels from the current GL_READ_BUFFER. The screen-aligned pixel rectangle with lower left corner at (x, y) and with a width of width+2*bo...

glCopyTexSubImage1D(3) -- copy a one-dimensional texture subimage

glCopyTexSubImage1D() replaces a portion of a one-dimensional texture image with pixels from the current GL_READ_BUFFER (rather than from main memory, as is the case for glTexSubImage1D). The screen-a...

glCopyTexSubImage2D(3) -- copy a two-dimensional texture subimage

glCopyTexSubImage2D() replaces a rectangular portion of a two-dimensional texture image with pixels from the current GL_READ_BUFFER (rather than from main memory, as is the case for glTexSubImage2D())...

glCopyTexSubImage3D(3) -- copy a three-dimensional texture subimage

glCopyTexSubImage3D() replaces a rectangular portion of a three-dimensional texture image with pixels from the current GL_READ_BUFFER (rather than from main memory, as is the case for glTexSubImage3D(...

glCullFace(3) -- specify whether front- or back-facing facets can be culled

glCullFace() specifies whether front- or back-facing facets are culled (as specified by mode) when facet culling is enabled. Facet culling is initially disabled. To enable and disable facet culling, c...

glDeleteLists(3) -- delete a contiguous group of display lists

glDeleteLists() causes a contiguous group of display lists to be deleted. list is the name of the first display list to be deleted, and range is the number of display lists to delete. All display list...

glDeleteTextures(3) -- delete named textures

glDeleteTextures() deletes n textures named by the elements of the array textures. After a texture is deleted, it has no contents or dimensionality, and its name is free for reuse (for example by glGe...

glDepthFunc(3) -- specify the value used for depth buffer comparisons

glDepthFunc() specifies the function used to compare each incoming pixel depth value with the depth value present in the depth buffer. The comparison is performed only if depth testing is enabled. (Se...

glDepthMask(3) -- enable or disable writing into the depth buffer

glDepthMask() specifies whether the depth buffer is enabled for writing. If option is GL_FALSE, depth buffer writing is disabled. Otherwise, it is enabled. Initially, depth buffer writing is enabled.

glDepthRange(3) -- specify mapping of depth values from normalized device coordinates to window coordinates

After clipping and division by w, depth coordinates range from -1 to 1, corresponding to the near and far clipping planes. glDepthRange() specifies a linear mapping of the normalized depth coordinates...

glDisable(3) -- enable or disable server-side GL capabilities

glEnable() and glDisable() enable and disable various capabilities. Use glIsEnabled() or glGet() to determine the current setting of any capability. The initial value for each capability with the exce...

glDisableClientState(3) -- enable or disable

glEnableClientState() and glDisableClientState() enable or disable individual client-side capabilities. By default, all client-side capabilities are disabled. Both glEnableClientState() and glDisableC...

glDrawArrays(3) -- render primitives from array data

glDrawArrays() specifies multiple geometric primitives with very few subroutine calls. Instead of calling a GL procedure to pass each individual vertex, normal, texture coordinate, edge option, or col...

glDrawBuffer(3) -- specify which color buffers are to be drawn into

When colors are written to the frame buffer, they are written into the color buffers specified by glDrawBuffer(). The specifications are as follows: No color buffers are written. Only the front left c...

glDrawElements(3) -- render primitives from array data

glDrawElements() specifies multiple geometric primitives with very few subroutine calls. Instead of calling a GL function to pass each individual vertex, normal, texture coordinate, edge option, or co...

glDrawPixels(3) -- write a block of pixels to the frame buffer

glDrawPixels() reads pixel data from memory and writes it into the frame buffer relative to the current raster position, provided that the raster position is valid. Use glRasterPos() to set the curren...

glDrawRangeElements(3) -- render primitives from array data

glDrawRangeElements() is a restricted form of glDrawElements(). mode, start, end, and count match the corresponding arguments to glDrawElements(), with the additional constraint that all values in the...

glEdgeFlag(3) -- option edges as either boundary or nonboundary

Each vertex of a polygon, separate triangle, or separate quadrilateral specified between a glBegin()/glEnd() pair is marked as the start of either a boundary or nonboundary edge. If the current edge o...

glEdgeFlagPointer(3) -- define an array of edge options

glEdgeFlagPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of boolean edge options to use when rendering. stride specifies the byte stride from one edge option to the next allowing vertexes and a...

glEdgeFlagv(3) -- option edges as either boundary or nonboundary

glEnable(3) -- enable or disable server-side GL capabilities

glEnableClientState(3) -- enable or disable

glEnd(3) -- delimit the vertices of a primitive or a group of like primglBeginitives

glEndList(3) -- create or replace a display list

Display lists are groups of GL commands that have been stored for subsequent execution. Display lists are created with glNewList(). All subsequent commands are placed in the display list, in the order...

glEvalCoord(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord1() evaluates enabled one-dimensional maps at argument u. glEvalCoord2() does the same for two-dimensional maps using two domain values, u and v. To define a map, call glMap1() and glMap2()...

glEvalCoord1d(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord1dv(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord1f(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord1fv(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord2d(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord2dv(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord2f(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalCoord2fv(3) -- evaluate enabled one- and twodimensional maps

glEvalMesh(3) -- compute a one- or two-dimensional grid of points or lines

glMapGrid() and glEvalMesh() are used in tandem to efficiently generate and evaluate a series of evenly-spaced map domain values. glEvalMesh() steps through the integer domain of a one- or two-dimensi...

glEvalMesh2(3) -- compute a one- or two-dimensional grid of points or lines

glEvalPoint(3) -- generate and evaluate a single point in a mesh

glMapGrid() and glEvalMesh() are used in tandem to efficiently generate and evaluate a series of evenly spaced map domain values. glEvalPoint() can be used to evaluate a single grid point in the same ...

glEvalPoint1(3) -- generate and evaluate a single point in a mesh

glEvalPoint2(3) -- generate and evaluate a single point in a mesh

glFeedbackBuffer(3) -- controls feedback mode

The glFeedbackBuffer() function controls feedback. Feedback, like selection, is a GL mode. The mode is selected by calling glRenderMode() with GL_FEEDBACK. When the GL is in feedback mode, no pixels a...

glFinish(3) -- block until all GL execution is complete

glFinish() does not return until the effects of all previously called GL commands are complete. Such effects include all changes to GL state, all changes to connection state, and all changes to the fr...

glFlush(3) -- force execution of GL commands in finite time

Different GL implementations buffer commands in several different locations, including network buffers and the graphics accelerator itself. glFlush() empties all of these buffers, causing all issued c...

glFog(3) -- specify fog parameters

Fog is initially disabled. While enabled, fog affects rasterized geometry, bitmaps, and pixel blocks, but not buffer clear operations. To enable and disable fog, call glEnable() and glDisable() with a...

glFogf(3) -- specify fog parameters

glFogfv(3) -- specify fog parameters

glFogi(3) -- specify fog parameters

glFogiv(3) -- specify fog parameters

glFrontFace(3) -- define front- and back-facing polygons

In a scene composed entirely of opaque closed surfaces, back-facing polygons are never visible. Eliminating these invisible polygons has the obvious benefit of speeding up the rendering of the image. ...

glFrustum(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a perspective matrix

glFrustum() describes a perspective matrix that produces a perspective projection. The current matrix (see glMatrixMode()) is multiplied by this matrix and the result replaces the current matrix, as i...

glGenLists(3) -- generate a contiguous set of empty display lists

glGenLists() has one argument, range. It returns an integer n such that range contiguous empty display lists, named n, n+1, ..., n+range -1, are created. If range is 0, if there is no group of range c...

glGenTextures(3) -- generate texture names

glGenTextures() returns n texture names in textures. There is no guarantee that the names form a contiguous set of integers; however, it is guaranteed that none of the returned names was in use immedi...

glGet(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter

These four commands return values for simple state variables in GL. pname is a symbolic constant indicating the state variable to be returned, and params is a pointer to an array of the indicated type...

glGetBooleanv(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter

glGetClipPlane(3) -- return the coefficients of the specified clipping plane

glGetClipPlane() returns in equation the four coefficients of the plane equation for plane.

glGetDoublev(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter

glGetError(3) -- return error information

glGetError() returns the value of the error option. Each detectable error is assigned a numeric code and symbolic name. When an error occurs, the error option is set to the appropriate error code valu...

glGetFloatv(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter

glGetIntegerv(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter

glGetLight(3) -- return light source parameter values

glGetLight() returns in params the value or values of a light source parameter. light names the light and is a symbolic name of the form GL_LIGHTi for 0 <= i < GL_MAX_LIGHTS, where GL_MAX_LIGHTS is an...

glGetLightfv(3) -- return light source parameter values

glGetLightiv(3) -- return light source parameter values

glGetMap(3) -- return evaluator parameters

glMap1() and glMap2() define evaluators. glGetMap() returns evaluator parameters. target chooses a map, query selects a specific parameter, and v points to storage where the values will be returned. T...

glGetMapdv(3) -- return evaluator parameters

glGetMapfv(3) -- return evaluator parameters

glGetMapiv(3) -- return evaluator parameters

glGetMaterial(3) -- return material parameters

glGetMaterial() returns in params the value or values of parameter pname of material face. Six parameters are defined: params returns four integer or floating-point values representing the ambient ref...

glGetMaterialfv(3) -- return material parameters

glGetMaterialiv(3) -- return material parameters

glGetPixelMap(3) -- return the specified pixel map

See the glPixelMap() reference page for a description of the acceptable values for the map parameter. glGetPixelMap() returns in values the contents of the pixel map specified in map. Pixel maps are u...

glGetPixelMapfv(3) -- return the specified pixel map

glGetPixelMapuiv(3) -- return the specified pixel map

glGetPixelMapusv(3) -- return the specified pixel map

glGetPointerv(3) -- return the address of the specified pointer

glGetPointerv() returns pointer information. pname is a symbolic constant indicating the pointer to be returned, and params is a pointer to a location in which to place the returned data.

glGetPolygonStipple(3) -- return the polygon stipple pattern

glGetPolygonStipple() returns to mask a 32 times 32 polygon stipple pattern. The pattern is packed into memory as if glReadPixels() with both height and width of 32, type of GL_BITMAP, and format of G...

glGetString(3) -- return a string describing the current GL connection

glGetString() returns a pointer to a static string describing some aspect of the current GL connection. name can be one of the following: Returns the company responsible for this GL implementation. Th...

glGetTexEnv(3) -- return texture environment parameters

glGetTexEnv() returns in params selected values of a texture environment that was specified with glTexEnv(). target specifies a texture environment. Currently, only one texture environment is defined ...

glGetTexEnvfv(3) -- return texture environment parameters

glGetTexEnviv(3) -- return texture environment parameters

glGetTexGen(3) -- return texture coordinate generation parameters

glGetTexGen() returns in params selected parameters of a texture coordinate generation function that was specified using glTexGen(). coord names one of the (s, t, r, q) texture coordinates, using the ...

glGetTexGendfv(3) -- return texture coordinate generation parameters

glGetTexGendv(3) -- return texture coordinate generation parameters

glGetTexGeniv(3) -- return texture coordinate generation parameters

glGetTexImage(3) -- return a texture image

glGetTexImage() returns a texture image into pixels. target specifies whether the desired texture image is one specified by glTexImage1D() (GL_TEXTURE_1D), glTexImage2D() (GL_TEXTURE_2D), or glTexImag...

glGetTexLevelParameter(3) -- return texture parameter values for a specific level of detail

glGetTexLevelParameter() returns in params texture parameter values for a specific level-of-detail value, specified as level. target defines the target texture, either GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL...

glGetTexLevelParameterfv(3) -- return texture parameter values for a specific level of detail

glGetTexLevelParameteriv(3) -- return texture parameter values for a specific level of detail

glGetTexParameter(3) -- return texture parameter values

glGetTexParameter() returns in params the value or values of the texture parameter specified as pname. target defines the target texture, either GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, or GL_TEXTURE_3D to speci...

glGetTexParameterfv(3) -- return texture parameter values

glGetTexParameteriv(3) -- return texture parameter values

glHint(3) -- specify implementation-specific hints

Certain aspects of GL behavior, when there is room for interpretation, can be controlled with hints. A hint is specified with two arguments. target is a symbolic constant indicating the behavior to be...

glIndex(3) -- set the current color index

glIndex() updates the current (single-valued) color index. It takes one argument, the new value for the current color index. The current index is stored as a floating-point value. Integer values are c...

glIndexd(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexdv(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexf(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexfv(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexi(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexiv(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexMask(3) -- control the writing of individual bits in the color index buffers

glIndexMask() controls the writing of individual bits in the color index buffers. The least significant n bits of mask, where n is the number of bits in a color index buffer, specify a mask. Where a 1...

glIndexPointer(3) -- define an array of color indexes

glIndexPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of color indexes to use when rendering. type specifies the data type of each color index and stride gives the byte stride from one color in...

glIndexs(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexsv(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexub(3) -- set the current color index

glIndexubv(3) -- set the current color index

glInitNames(3) -- initialize the name stack

The name stack is used during selection mode to allow sets of rendering commands to be uniquely identified. It consists of an ordered set of unsigned integers. glInitNames() causes the name stack to b...

glInterleavedArrays(3) -- simultaneously specify and enable several interleaved arrays

glInterleavedArrays() lets you specify and enable individual color, normal, texture and vertex arrays whose elements are part of a larger aggregate array element. For some implementations, this is mor...

glIsEnabled(3) -- test whether a capability is enabled

glIsEnabled() returns GL_TRUE if cap is an enabled capability and returns GL_FALSE otherwise. Initially all capabilities except GL_DITHER are disabled; GL_DITHER is initially enabled. The following ca...

glIsList(3) -- determine if a name corresponds to a displaylist

glIsList() returns GL_TRUE if list is the name of a display list and returns GL_FALSE otherwise.

glIsTexture(3) -- determine if a name corresponds to a texture

glIsTexture() returns GL_TRUE if texture is currently the name of a texture. If texture is zero, or is a non-zero value that is not currently the name of a texture, or if an error occurs, glIsTexture(...

glLight(3) -- set light source parameters

glLight() sets the values of individual light source parameters. light names the light and is a symbolic name of the form GL_LIGHTi, where 0 <= i < GL_MAX_LIGHTS. pname specifies one of ten light sour...

glLightf(3) -- set light source parameters

glLightfv(3) -- set light source parameters

glLighti(3) -- set light source parameters

glLightiv(3) -- set light source parameters

glLightModel(3) -- set the lighting model parameters

glLightModel() sets the lighting model parameter. pname names a parameter and params gives the new value. There are three lighting model parameters: params contains four integer or floating-point valu...

glLightModelf(3) -- set the lighting model parameters

glLightModelfv(3) -- set the lighting model parameters

glLightModeli(3) -- set the lighting model parameters

glLightModeliv(3) -- set the lighting model parameters

glLineStipple(3) -- specify the line stipple pattern

Line stippling masks out certain fragments produced by rasterization; those fragments will not be drawn. The masking is achieved by using three parameters: the 16-bit line stipple pattern pattern, the...

glLineWidth(3) -- specify the width of rasterized lines

glLineWidth() specifies the rasterized width of both aliased and antialiased lines. Using a line width other than 1 has different effects, depending on whether line antialiasing is enabled. To enable ...

glListBase(3) -- set the display-list base for glCallLists

glCallLists() specifies an array of offsets. Display-list names are generated by adding base to each offset. Names that reference valid display lists are executed; the others are ignored.

glLoadIdentity(3) -- replace the current matrix with the identity matrix

glLoadIdentity() replaces the current matrix with the identity matrix. It is semantically equivalent to calling glLoadMatrix() with the identity matrix 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 but in some case...

glLoadMatrix(3) -- replace the current matrix with the specified matrix

glLoadMatrix() replaces the current matrix with the one whose elements are specified by m. The current matrix is the projection matrix, modelview matrix, or texture matrix, depending on the current ma...

glLoadMatrixd(3) -- replace the current matrix with the specified matrix

glLoadMatrixf(3) -- replace the current matrix with the specified matrix

glLoadName(3) -- load a name onto the name stack

The name stack is used during selection mode to allow sets of rendering commands to be uniquely identified. It consists of an ordered set of unsigned integers. glLoadName() causes name to replace the ...

glLogicOp(3) -- specify a logical pixel operation for color index rendering

glLogicOp() specifies a logical operation that, when enabled, is applied between the incoming color index or RGBA color and the color index or RGBA color at the corresponding location in the frame buf...

glMap1(3) -- define a one-dimensional evaluator

Evaluators provide a way to use polynomial or rational polynomial mapping to produce vertices, normals, texture coordinates, and colors. The values produced by an evaluator are sent to further stages ...

glMap1d(3) -- define a one-dimensional evaluator

glMap1f(3) -- define a one-dimensional evaluator

glMap2(3) -- define a two-dimensional evaluator

glMap2d(3) -- define a two-dimensional evaluator

glMap2f(3) -- define a two-dimensional evaluator

glMapGrid(3) -- define a one- or two-dimensional mesh

glMapGrid() and glEvalMesh() are used together to efficiently generate and evaluate a series of evenly-spaced map domain values. glEvalMesh() steps through the integer domain of a one- or two-dimensio...

glMapGrid1d(3) -- define a one- or two-dimensional mesh

glMapGrid1f(3) -- define a one- or two-dimensional mesh

glMapGrid2d(3) -- define a one- or two-dimensional mesh

glMapGrid2f(3) -- define a one- or two-dimensional mesh

glMaterial(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model

glMaterial() assigns values to material parameters. There are two matched sets of material parameters. One, the front-facing set, is used to shade points, lines, bitmaps, and all polygons (when two-si...

glMaterialf(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model

glMaterialfv(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model

glMateriali(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model

glMaterialiv(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model

glMatrixMode(3) -- specify which matrix is the current matrix

glMatrixMode() sets the current matrix mode. mode can assume one of four values: Applies subsequent matrix operations to the modelview matrix stack. Applies subsequent matrix operations to the project...

glMultMatrix(3) -- multiply the current matrix with the specified matrix

glMultMatrix() multiplies the current matrix with the one specified using m, and replaces the current matrix with the product. The current matrix is determined by the current matrix mode (see glMatrix...

glMultMatrixd(3) -- multiply the current matrix with the specified matrix

glMultMatrixf(3) -- multiply the current matrix with the specified matrix

glNewList(3) -- create or replace a display list

glNormal(3) -- set the current normal vector

The current normal is set to the given coordinates whenever glNormal() is issued. Byte, short, or integer arguments are converted to floating-point with a linear mapping that maps the most positive re...

glNormal3b(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3bv(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3d(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3dv(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3f(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3fv(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3i(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3iv(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3s(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormal3sv(3) -- set the current normal vector

glNormalPointer(3) -- define an array of normals

glNormalPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of normals to use when rendering. type specifies the data type of the normal coordinates and stride gives the byte stride from one normal ...

glob(3) -- Generate pathnames matching a pattern

The glob() function constructs a list of accessible files that match the pattern parameter. The glob() function matches all accessible pathnames against this pattern and develops a list of all pathnam...

globfree(3) -- Generate pathnames matching a pattern

glOrtho(3) -- multiply the current matrix with an orthographic matrix

glOrtho() describes a transformation that produces a parallel projection. The current matrix (see glMatrixMode()) is multiplied by this matrix and the result replaces the current matrix, as if glMultM...

glPassThrough(3) -- place a marker in the feedback buffer

Feedback is a GL render mode. The mode is selected by calling glRenderMode() with GL_FEEDBACK. When the GL is in feedback mode, no pixels are produced by rasterization. Instead, information about prim...

glPixelMap(3) -- set up pixel transfer maps

glPixelMap() sets up translation tables, or maps, used by glCopyPixels(), glCopyTexImage1D(), glCopyTexImage2D(), glCopyTexSubImage1D(), glCopyTexSubImage2D(), glCopyTexSubImage3D(), glDrawPixels(), g...

glPixelMapfv(3) -- set up pixel transfer maps

glPixelMapuiv(3) -- set up pixel transfer maps

glPixelMapusv(3) -- set up pixel transfer maps

glPixelStore(3) -- set pixel storage modes

glPixelStore() sets pixel storage modes that affect the operation of subsequent glDrawPixels() and glReadPixels() as well as the unpacking of polygon stipple patterns (see glPolygonStipple()), bitmaps...

glPixelStoref(3) -- set pixel storage modes

glPixelStorei(3) -- set pixel storage modes

glPixelTransfer(3) -- set pixel transfer modes

glPixelTransfer() sets pixel transfer modes that affect the operation of subsequent glCopyPixels(), glCopyTexImage1D(), glCopyTexImage2D(), glCopyTexSubImage1D(), glCopyTexSubImage2D(), glCopyTexSubIm...

glPixelTransferf(3) -- set pixel transfer modes

glPixelTransferi(3) -- set pixel transfer modes

glPixelZoom(3) -- specify the pixel zoom factors

glPixelZoom() specifies values for the x and y zoom factors. During the execution of glDrawPixels() or glCopyPixels(), if (xr , yr ) is the current raster position, and a given element is in the mth r...

glPointSize(3) -- specify the diameter of rasterized points

glPointSize() specifies the rasterized diameter of both aliased and antialiased points. Using a point size other than 1 has different effects, depending on whether point antialiasing is enabled. To en...

glPolygonMode(3) -- select a polygon rasterization mode

glPolygonMode() controls the interpretation of polygons for rasterization. face describes which polygons mode applies to: front-facing polygons (GL_FRONT), back-facing polygons (GL_BACK), or both (GL_...

glPolygonOffset(3) -- set the scale and units used to calculate depth values

When GL_POLYGON_OFFSET_FILL, GL_POLYGON_OFFSET_LINE, or GL_POLYGON_OFFSET_POINT is enabled, each fragment's depth value will be offset after it is interpolated from the depth values of the appropriat...

glPolygonStipple(3) -- set the polygon stippling pattern

Polygon stippling, like line stippling (see glLineStipple()), masks out certain fragments produced by rasterization, creating a pattern. Stippling is independent of polygon antialiasing. mask is a poi...

glPopAttrib(3) -- push and pop the server attribute stack

glPushAttrib() takes one argument, a mask that indicates which groups of state variables to save on the attribute stack. Symbolic constants are used to set bits in the mask. mask is typically construc...

glPopClientAttrib(3) -- push and pop the client attribute stack

glPushClientAttrib() takes one argument, a mask that indicates which groups of client-state variables to save on the client attribute stack. Symbolic constants are used to set bits in the mask. mask i...

glPopMatrix(3) -- push and pop the current matrix stack

There is a stack of matrices for each of the matrix modes. In GL_MODELVIEW mode, the stack depth is at least 32. In the other modes, GL_COLOR, const(PROJECTION), and GL_TEXTURE, the depth is at least ...

glPopName(3) -- push and pop the name stack

The name stack is used during selection mode to allow sets of rendering commands to be uniquely identified. It consists of an ordered set of unsigned integers and is initially empty. glPushName() caus...

glPrioritizeTextures(3) -- set texture residence priority

glPrioritizeTextures() assigns the n texture priorities given in priorities to the n textures named in textures. The GL establishes a ``working set'' of textures that are resident in texture memory....

glPushAttrib(3) -- push and pop the server attribute stack

glPushClientAttrib(3) -- push and pop the client attribute stack

glPushMatrix(3) -- push and pop the current matrix stack

glPushName(3) -- push and pop the name stack

glRasterPos(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

The GL maintains a 3D position in window coordinates. This position, called the raster position, is used to position pixel and bitmap write operations. It is maintained with subpixel accuracy. See glB...

glRasterPos2d(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2dv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2f(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2fv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2i(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2iv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2s(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos2sv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3d(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3dv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3f(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3fv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3i(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3iv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3s(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos3sv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4d(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4dv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4f(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4fv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4i(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4iv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4s(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glRasterPos4sv(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations

glReadBuffer(3) -- select a color buffer source for pixels

glReadBuffer() specifies a color buffer as the source for subsequent glReadPixels(), glCopyTexImage1D(), glCopyTexImage2D(), glCopyTexSubImage1D(), glCopyTexSubImage2D(), glCopyTexSubImage3D(), and gl...

glReadPixels(3) -- read a block of pixels from the frame buffer

glReadPixels() returns pixel data from the frame buffer, starting with the pixel whose lower left corner is at location (x, y), into client memory starting at location pixels. Several parameters contr...

glRect(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRect() supports efficient specification of rectangles as two corner points. Each rectangle command takes four arguments, organized either as two consecutive pairs of (x,y) coordinates, or as two poi...

glRectd(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRectdv(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRectf(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRectfv(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRecti(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRectiv(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRects(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRectsv(3) -- draw a rectangle

glRenderMode(3) -- set rasterization mode

glRenderMode() sets the rasterization mode. It takes one argument, mode, which can assume one of three predefined values: Render mode. Primitives are rasterized, producing pixel fragments, which are w...

glRotate(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a rotation matrix

glRotate() produces a rotation of angle degrees around the vector (x, y, z). The current matrix (see glMatrixMode()) is multiplied by a rotation matrix with the product replacing the current matrix, a...

glRotated(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a rotation matrix

glRotatef(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a rotation matrix

glScale(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a general scaling matrix

glScale() produces a nonuniform scaling along the x, y, and z axes. The three parameters indicate the desired scale factor along each of the three axes. The current matrix (see glMatrixMode()) is mult...

glScaled(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a general scaling matrix

glScalef(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a general scaling matrix

glScissor(3) -- define the scissor box

glScissor() defines a rectangle, called the scissor box, in window coordinates. The first two arguments, x and y, specify the lower left corner of the box. width and height specify the width and heigh...

glSelectBuffer(3) -- establish a buffer for selection mode values

glSelectBuffer() has two arguments: buffer is a pointer to an array of unsigned integers, and size indicates the size of the array. buffer returns values from the name stack (see glInitNames(), glLoad...

glShadeModel(3) -- select flat or smooth shading

GL primitives can have either flat or smooth shading. Smooth shading, the default, causes the computed colors of vertices to be interpolated as the primitive is rasterized, typically assigning differe...

glStencilFunc(3) -- set function and reference value for stencil testing

Stenciling, like depth-buffering, enables and disables drawing on a per-pixel basis. You draw into the stencil planes using GL drawing primitives, then render geometry and images, using the stencil pl...

glStencilMask(3) -- control the writing of individual bits in the stencil planes

glStencilMask() controls the writing of individual bits in the stencil planes. The least significant n bits of mask, where n is the number of bits in the stencil buffer, specify a mask. Where a 1 appe...

glStencilOp(3) -- set stencil test actions

glTexCoord(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord() specifies texture coordinates in one, two, three, or four dimensions. glTexCoord1() sets the current texture coordinates to (s, 0, 0, 1); a call to glTexCoord2() sets them to (s, t, 0, 1)...

glTexCoord13s(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord13sv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1d(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1dv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1f(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1fv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1i(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1iv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1s(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord1sv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2d(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2dv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2f(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2fv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2i(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2iv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2s(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord2sv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3d(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3dv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3f(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3fv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3i(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord3iv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4d(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4dv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4f(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4fv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4i(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4iv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4s(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoord4sv(3) -- set the current texture coordinates

glTexCoordPointer(3) -- define an array of texture coordinates

glTexCoordPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of texture coordinates to use when rendering. size specifies the number of coordinates per element, and must be 1, 2, 3, or 4. type spec...

glTexEnv(3) -- set texture environment parameters

A texture environment specifies how texture values are interpreted when a fragment is textured. target must be GL_TEXTURE_ENV. pname can be either GL_TEXTURE_ENV_MODE or GL_TEXTURE_ENV_COLOR. If pname...

glTexEnvf(3) -- set texture environment parameters

glTexEnvfv(3) -- set texture environment parameters

glTexEnvi(3) -- set texture environment parameters

glTexEnviv(3) -- set texture environment parameters

glTexGen(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGen() selects a texture-coordinate generation function or supplies coefficients for one of the functions. coord names one of the (s, t, r, q) texture coordinates; it must be one of the symbols GL...

glTexGend(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGendv(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGenf(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGenfv(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGeni(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexGeniv(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates

glTexImage1D(3) -- specify a one-dimensional texture image

Texturing maps a portion of a specified texture image onto each graphical primitive for which texturing is enabled. To enable and disable one-dimensional texturing, call glEnable() and glDisable() wit...

glTexImage2D(3) -- specify a two-dimensional texture image

Texturing maps a portion of a specified texture image onto each graphical primitive for which texturing is enabled. To enable and disable two-dimensional texturing, call glEnable() and glDisable() wit...

glTexImage3D(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture image

Texturing maps a portion of a specified texture image onto each graphical primitive for which texturing is enabled. To enable and disable three-dimensional texturing, call glEnable() and glDisable() w...

glTexParameter(3) -- set texture parameters

Texture mapping is a technique that applies an image onto an object's surface as if the image were a decal or cellophane shrink-wrap. The image is created in texture space, with an (s, t) coordinate ...

glTexSubImage1D(3) -- specify a one-dimensional texture subimage

Texturing maps a portion of a specified texture image onto each graphical primitive for which texturing is enabled. To enable or disable one-dimensional texturing, call glEnable() and glDisable() with...

glTexSubImage2D(3) -- specify a two-dimensional texture subimage

glTexSubImage3D(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture subimage

glTranslate(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a translation matrix

glTranslate() produces a translation by (x,y,z). The current matrix (see glMatrixMode()) is multiplied by this translation matrix, with the product replacing the current matrix, as if glMultMatrix() w...

glTranslated(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a translation matrix

glTranslatef(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a translation matrix

gluBeginCurve(3) -- delimit a NURBS curve definition

Use gluBeginCurve() to mark the beginning of a NURBS curve definition. After calling gluBeginCurve(), make one or more calls to gluNurbsCurve() to define the attributes of the curve. Exactly one of th...

gluBeginPolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description

gluBeginPolygon() and gluEndPolygon() delimit the definition of a nonconvex polygon. To define such a polygon, first call gluBeginPolygon(). Then define the contours of the polygon by calling gluTessV...

gluBeginSurface(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface definition

Use gluBeginSurface() to mark the beginning of a NURBS surface definition. After calling gluBeginSurface(), make one or more calls to gluNurbsSurface() to define the attributes of the surface. Exactly...

gluBeginTrim(3) -- delimit a NURBS trimming loop definition

Use gluBeginTrim() to mark the beginning of a trimming loop, and gluEndTrim() to mark the end of a trimming loop. A trimming loop is a set of oriented curve segments (forming a closed curve) that defi...

gluBuild1DMipmaps(3) -- builds a 1-D mipmap

gluBuild1DMipmaps() builds a series of prefiltered 1-D texture maps of decreasing resolutions called a mipmap. This is used for the antialiasing of texture mapped primitives. A return value of 0 indic...

gluBuild2DMipmaps(3) -- builds a 2-D mipmap

gluBuild2DMipmaps() builds a series of prefiltered 2-D texture maps of decreasing resolutions called a mipmap. This is used for the antialiasing of texture mapped primitives. A return value of 0 indic...

gluCylinder(3) -- draw a cylinder

gluCylinder() draws a cylinder oriented along the z axis. The base of the cylinder is placed at z = 0, and the top at z = height. Like a sphere, a cylinder is subdivided around the z axis into slices,...

gluDeleteNurbsRenderer(3) -- destroy a NURBS object

gluDeleteNurbsRenderer() destroys the NURBS object (which was created with gluNewNurbsRenderer()) and frees any memory it uses. Once gluDeleteNurbsRenderer() has been called, nurb cannot be used again...

gluDeleteQuadric(3) -- destroy a quadrics object

gluDeleteQuadric() destroys the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric()) and frees any memory it uses. Once gluDeleteQuadric() has been called, quad cannot be used again.

gluDeleteTess(3) -- destroy a tessellation object

gluDeleteTess() destroys the indicated tessellation object (which was created with gluNewTess()) and frees any memory that it used.

gluDisk(3) -- draw a disk

gluDisk() renders a disk on the z = 0 plane. The disk has a radius of outer, and contains a concentric circular hole with a radius of inner. If inner is 0, then no hole is generated. The disk is subdi...

gluEndCurve(3) -- delimit a NURBS curve definition

gluEndPolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description

gluEndSurface(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface definition

gluEndTrim(3) -- delimit a NURBS trimming loop definition

gluErrorString(3) -- produce an error string from a GL or GLU error code

gluErrorString() produces an error string from a GL or GLU error code. The string is in ISO Latin 1 format. For example, gluErrorString()(GL_OUT_OF_MEMORY) returns the string out of memory. The standa...

gluGetNurbsProperty(3) -- get a NURBS property

gluGetNurbsProperty() retrieves properties stored in a NURBS object. These properties affect the way that NURBS curves and surfaces are rendered. See the gluNurbsProperty() reference page for informat...

gluGetString(3) -- return a string describing the GLU version or GLU extensions

gluGetString() returns a pointer to a static string describing the GLU version or the GLU extensions that are supported. The version number is one of the following forms: major_number.minor_number maj...

gluGetTessProperty(3) -- get a tessellation object property

gluGetTessProperty() retrieves properties stored in a tessellation object. These properties affect the way that tessellation objects are interpreted and rendered. See the gluTessProperty() reference p...

gluLoadSamplingMatrices(3) -- load NURBS sampling and culling matrices

gluLoadSamplingMatrices() uses model, perspective, and view to recompute the sampling and culling matrices stored in nurb. The sampling matrix determines how finely a NURBS curve or surface must be te...

gluLookAt(3) -- define a viewing transformation

gluLookAt() creates a viewing matrix derived from an eye point, a reference point indicating the center of the scene, and an UP vector. The matrix maps the reference point to the negative z axis and t...

gluNewNurbsRenderer(3) -- create a NURBS object

gluNewNurbsRenderer() creates and returns a pointer to a new NURBS object. This object must be referred to when calling NURBS rendering and control functions. A return value of 0 means that there is n...

gluNewQuadric(3) -- create a quadrics object

gluNewQuadric() creates and returns a pointer to a new quadrics object. This object must be referred to when calling quadrics rendering and control functions. A return value of 0 means that there is n...

gluNewTess(3) -- create a tessellation object

gluNewTess() creates and returns a pointer to a new tessellation object. This object must be referred to when calling tessellation functions. A return value of 0 means that there is not enough memory ...

gluNextContour(3) -- mark the beginning of another contour

gluNextContour() is used in describing polygons with multiple contours. After the first contour has been described through a series of gluTessVertex() calls, a gluNextContour() call indicates that the...

gluNurbsCallback(3) -- define a callback for a NURBS object

gluNurbsCallback() is used to define a callback to be used by a NURBS object. If the specified callback is already defined, then it is replaced. If CallBackFunc is NULL, then this callback will not ge...

gluNurbsCallbackDataEXT(3) -- set a user data pointer

gluNurbsCallbackDataEXT() is used to pass a pointer to the application's data to NURBS tessellator. A copy of this pointer will be passed by the tessellator in the NURBS callback functions (set by gl...

gluNurbsCurve(3) -- define the shape of a NURBS curve

Use gluNurbsCurve() to describe a NURBS curve. When gluNurbsCurve() appears between a gluBeginCurve()/gluEndCurve() pair, it is used to describe a curve to be rendered. Positional, texture, and color ...

gluNurbsProperty(3) -- set a NURBS property

gluNurbsProperty() is used to control properties stored in a NURBS object. These properties affect the way that a NURBS curve is rendered. The accepted values for property are as follows: value should...

gluNurbsSurface(3) -- define the shape of a NURBS surface

Use gluNurbsSurface() within a NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) surface definition to describe the shape of a NURBS surface (before any trimming). To mark the beginning of a NURBS surface definit...

gluOrtho2D(3) -- define a 2D orthographic projection matrix

gluOrtho2D() sets up a two-dimensional orthographic viewing region. This is equivalent to calling glOrtho() with near = -1 and far = 1.

gluPartialDisk(3) -- draw an arc of a disk

gluPartialDisk() renders a partial disk on the $ z = 0 $ plane. A partial disk is similar to a full disk, except that only the subset of the disk from start through start + sweep is included (where 0 ...

gluPerspective(3) -- set up a perspective projection matrix

gluPerspective() specifies a viewing frustum into the world coordinate system. In general, the aspect ratio in gluPerspective() should match the aspect ratio of the associated viewport. For example, $...

gluPickMatrix(3) -- define a picking region

gluPickMatrix() creates a projection matrix that can be used to restrict drawing to a small region of the viewport. This is typically useful to determine what objects are being drawn near the cursor. ...

gluProject(3) -- map object coordinates to window coordinates

gluProject() transforms the specified object coordinates into window coordinates using model, proj, and view. The result is stored in winX, winY, and winZ. A return value of GL_TRUE indicates success,...

gluPwlCurve(3) -- describe a piecewise linear NURBS trimming curve

gluPwlCurve() describes a piecewise linear trimming curve for a NURBS surface. A piecewise linear curve consists of a list of coordinates of points in the parameter space for the NURBS surface to be t...

gluQuadricCallback(3) -- define a callback for a quadrics object

gluQuadricCallback() is used to define a new callback to be used by a quadrics object. If the specified callback is already defined, then it is replaced. If CallBackFunc is NULL, then any existing cal...

gluQuadricDrawStyle(3) -- specify the draw style desired for quadrics

gluQuadricDrawStyle() specifies the draw style for quadrics rendered with quad. The legal values are as follows: Quadrics are rendered with polygon primitives. The polygons are drawn in a counterclock...

gluQuadricNormals(3) -- specify what kind of normals are desired for quadrics

gluQuadricNormals() specifies what kind of normals are desired for quadrics rendered with quad. The legal values are as follows: No normals are generated. One normal is generated for every facet of a ...

gluQuadricOrientation(3) -- specify inside/outside orientation for quadrics

gluQuadricOrientation() specifies what kind of orientation is desired for quadrics rendered with quad. The orientation values are as follows: Quadrics are drawn with normals pointing outward (the init...

gluQuadricTexture(3) -- specify if texturing is desired for quadrics

gluQuadricTexture() specifies if texture coordinates should be generated for quadrics rendered with quad. If the value of texture is GL_TRUE, then texture coordinates are generated, and if texture is ...

gluScaleImage(3) -- scale an image to an arbitrary size

gluScaleImage() scales a pixel image using the appropriate pixel store modes to unpack data from the source image and pack data into the destination image. When shrinking an image, gluScaleImage() use...

gluSphere(3) -- draw a sphere

gluSphere() draws a sphere of the given radius centered around the origin. The sphere is subdivided around the z axis into slices and along the z axis into stacks (similar to lines of longitude and la...

gluTessBeginContour(3) -- delimit a contour description

gluTessBeginContour() and gluTessEndContour() delimit the definition of a polygon contour. Within each gluTessBeginContour()/gluTessEndContour() pair, there can be zero or more calls to gluTessVertex(...

gluTessBeginPolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description

gluTessBeginPolygon() and gluTessEndPolygon() delimit the definition of a convex, concave or self-intersecting polygon. Within each gluTessBeginPolygon()/gluTessEndPolygon() pair, there must be one or...

gluTessCallback(3) -- define a callback for a tessellation object

gluTessCallback() is used to indicate a callback to be used by a tessellation object. If the specified callback is already defined, then it is replaced. If CallBackFunc is NULL, then the existing call...

gluTessEndContour(3) -- delimit a contour description

gluTessEndPolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description

gluTessNormal(3) -- specify a normal for a polygon

gluTessNormal() describes a normal for a polygon that the program is defining. All input data will be projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the three coordinate axes before tessellation and a...

gluTessProperty(3) -- set a tessellation object property

gluTessProperty() is used to control properties stored in a tessellation object. These properties affect the way that the polygons are interpreted and rendered. The legal values for which are as follo...

gluTessVertex(3) -- specify a vertex on a polygon

gluTessVertex() describes a vertex on a polygon that the program defines. Successive gluTessVertex() calls describe a closed contour. For example, to describe a quadrilateral gluTessVertex() should be...

gluUnProject(3) -- map window coordinates to object coordinates

gluUnProject() maps the specified window coordinates into object coordinates using model, proj, and view. The result is stored in objX, objY, and objZ. A return value of GL_TRUE indicates success; a r...

glVertex(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex() commands are used within glBegin()/glEnd() pairs to specify point, line, and polygon vertices. The current color, normal, and texture coordinates are associated with the vertex when glVerte...

glVertex2d(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2dv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2f(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2fv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2i(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2iv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2s(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex2sv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3d(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3dv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3f(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3fv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3i(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3iv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3s(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex3sv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4d(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4dv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4f(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4fv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4i(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4iv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4s(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertex4sv(3) -- specify a vertex

glVertexPointer(3) -- define an array of vertex data

glVertexPointer() specifies the location and data of an array of vertex coordinates to use when rendering. size specifies the number of coordinates per vertex and type the data type of the coordinates...

glViewport(3) -- set the viewport

glViewport() specifies the affine transformation of x and y from normalized device coordinates to window coordinates. Let (x[n]d, y[n]d) be normalized device coordinates. Then the window coordinates (...

glXChooseVisual(3) -- return a visual that matches specified attributes

glXChooseVisual() returns a pointer to an XVisualInfo structure describing the visual that best meets a minimum specification. The boolean GLX attributes of the visual that is returned will match the ...

glXCopyContext(3) -- copy state from one rendering context to another

glXCopyContext() copies selected groups of state variables from src to dst. mask indicates which groups of state variables are to be copied. mask contains the bitwise OR of the same symbolic names tha...

glXCreateContext(3) -- create a new GLX rendering context

glXCreateContext() creates a GLX rendering context and returns its handle. This context can be used to render into both windows and GLX pixmaps. If glXCreateContext() fails to create a rendering conte...

glXCreateGLXPixmap(3) -- create an off-screen GLX rendering area

glXCreateGLXPixmap() creates an off-screen rendering area and returns its XID. Any GLX rendering context that was created with respect to vis can be used to render into this off-screen area. Use glXMa...

glXDestroyContext(3) -- destroy a GLX context

If the GLX rendering context ctx is not current to any thread, glXDestroyContext() destroys it immediately. Otherwise, ctx is destroyed when it becomes not current to any thread. In either case, the r...

glXDestroyGLXPixmap(3) -- destroy a GLX pixmap

If the GLX pixmap pix is not current to any client, glXDestroyGLXPixmap() destroys it immediately. Otherwise, pix is destroyed when it becomes not current to any client. In either case, the resource I...

glXFreeContextEXT(3) -- free client-side memory for imported context

glXFreeContextEXT() frees the client-side part of a GLXContext that was created with glXImportContext(). glXFreeContextEXT() does not free the server-side context information or the XID associated wit...

glXGetClientString(3) -- return a string describing the client

glXGetClientString() returns a string describing some aspect of the client library. The possible values for name are GLX_VENDOR, GLX_VERSION, and GLX_EXTENSIONS. If name is not set to one of these val...

glXGetConfig(3) -- return information about GLX visuals

glXGetConfig() sets value to the attrib value of windows or GLX pixmaps created with respect to vis. glXGetConfig() returns an error code if it fails for any reason. Otherwise, zero is returned. attri...

glXGetContextIDEXT(3) -- get the XID for a context.

glXGetContextIDEXT() returns the XID associated with a GLXContext. No round trip is forced to the server; unlike most X calls that return a value, glXGetContextIDEXT() does not flush any pending event...

glXGetCurrentContext(3) -- return the current context

glXGetCurrentContext() returns the current context, as specified by glXMakeCurrent(). If there is no current context, NULL is returned. glXGetCurrentContext() returns client-side information. It does ...

glXGetCurrentDisplay(3) -- get display for current context

glXGetCurrentDisplay() returns the display for the current context. If no context is current, NULL is returned. glXGetCurrentDisplay() returns client-side information. It does not make a round trip to...

glXGetCurrentDrawable(3) -- return the current drawable

glXGetCurrentDrawable() returns the current drawable, as specified by glXMakeCurrent(). If there is no current drawable, None is returned. glXGetCurrentDrawable() returns client-side information. It d...

glXImportContextEXT(3) -- import another process's indirect rendering context.

glXImportContextEXT() creates a GLXContext given the XID of an existing GLXContext. It may be used in place of glXCreateContext(), to share another process's indirect rendering context. Only the serv...

glXIntro(3) -- Introduction to OpenGL in the X window system

glXIsDirect(3) -- indicate whether direct rendering is enabled

glXIsDirect() returns True if ctx is a direct rendering context, False otherwise. Direct rendering contexts pass rendering commands directly from the calling process's address space to the rendering ...

glXMakeCurrent(3) -- attach a GLX context to a window or a GLX pixmap

glXMakeCurrent() does two things: It makes ctx the current GLX rendering context of the calling thread, replacing the previously current context if there was one, and it attaches ctx to a GLX drawable...

glXQueryContextInfoEXT(3) -- query context information

glXQueryContextInfoEXT() returns the the visual id, screen number, and share list of ctx. This call may cause a round trip to the server. glXQueryContextInfoEXT() is part of the EXT_import_context ext...

glXQueryExtension(3) -- indicate whether the GLX extension is supported

glXQueryExtension() returns True if the X server of connection dpy supports the GLX extension, False otherwise. If True is returned, then errorBase and eventBase return the error base and event base o...

glXQueryExtensionsString(3) -- return list of supported extensions

glXQueryExtensionsString() returns a pointer to a string describing which GLX extensions are supported on the connection. The string is null-terminated and contains a space-separated list of extension...

glXQueryServerString(3) -- return string describing the server

glXQueryServerString() returns a pointer to a static, null-terminated string describing some aspect of the server's GLX extension. The possible values for name and the format of the strings is the sa...

glXQueryVersion(3) -- return the version numbers of the GLX extension

glXQueryVersion() returns the major and minor version numbers of the GLX extension implemented by the server associated with connection dpy. Implementations with the same major version number are upwa...

glXSwapBuffers(3) -- exchange front and back buffers

glXSwapBuffers() promotes the contents of the back buffer of drawable to become the contents of the front buffer of drawable. The contents of the back buffer then become undefined. The update typicall...

glXUseXFont(3) -- create bitmap display lists from an X font

glXUseXFont() generates count display lists, named listBase through listBase+count-1, each containing a single glBitmap() command. The parameters of the glBitmap() command of display list listBase+i a...

glXWaitGL(3) -- complete GL execution prior to subsequent X calls

GL rendering calls made prior to glXWaitGL() are guaranteed to be executed before X rendering calls made after glXWaitGL(). Although this same result can be achieved using glFinish(), glXWaitGL() does...

glXWaitX(3) -- complete X execution prior to subsequent GL calls

X rendering calls made prior to glXWaitX() are guaranteed to be executed before GL rendering calls made after glXWaitX(). Although the same result can be achieved using XSync, glXWaitX() does not requ...

gmtime(3) -- converts time units

gmtime64(3) -- converts time units

gmtime64_r(3) -- converts time units

gmtime_r(3) -- converts time units

grantpt(3) -- Permit access to the slave pseudoterminal device

The grantpt() function modifies the ownership and mode of the slave pseudoterminal device associated with its master pseudoterminal counterpart. The modifications of mode and ownership are performed a...

gr_idtoname(3) -- Map between user and group names and IDs (Enhanced Security)

The mapping functions provide an efficient mapping between user and group names and identifiers (IDs). These functions maintain a separate binary database, which is automatically updated each time the...

gr_nametoid(3) -- Map between user and group names and IDs (Enhanced Security)

gsignal(3) -- Set and raise a software signal

These functions are obsolete and are retained for compatibility with earlier versions of the operating system. The ssignal() and gsignal() functions implement a facility similar to that of the signal(...

gsignal_r(3) -- Set and raise a software signal

gss_accept_sec_context(3) -- Establish a remotely-initiated security context.

The gss_accept_sec_context() function allows establishment of a remotely-initiated security context between an application and its peer. A security context must be established prior to exchanging secu...

gss_acquire_cred(3) -- Acquire credentials for a specific internal name.

The gss_acquire_cred() function allows an application to acquire credentials by principal name. The credentials must already exist in a credentials cache created by a kinit command, HP Credentials Man...

gss_add_cred(3) -- Obtain credentials that allow a user to accept security contexts.

The gss_add_cred() function allows an application to construct credentials iteratively by adding credential elements for different security mechanisms. It can be used to: Create new credentials contai...

gss_add_oid_set_member(3) -- Construct a set of OISDs.

The gss_add_oid_set_member() function adds an object identifier to an OID set. Use this function to construct the set of OIDs for Kerberos 5 that is input to gss_acquire_cred(). This function copies t...

gss_canonicalize_name(3) -- Extract single mechanism name from

The gss_canonicalize_name() function reduces an internal form name that contains elements corresponding to multiple security mechanisms, to a mechanism name (MN) that is mechanism-specific. This funct...

gss_close(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility. This function is not require...

gss_compare_name(3) -- Compare two internal form names.

The gss_compare_name() function compares two internal form names to determine if they are the same. When a name is created using a function such as gss_import_name(), an aggregate structure is built w...

gss_context_time(3) -- Determine remaining lifetime of security context.

The gss_context_time() function returns the number of seconds remaining in the security context's lifetime. The HP Application Security SDK does not support context expiration. A security context est...

gss_create_empty_oid_set(3) -- Eatablish an OID set containing no OIDs.

The gss_create_empty_oid_set() function establishes an OID set containing no object identifiers. Use this function in conjunction with gss_add_oid_set_member() to construct a set of OIDs for Kerberos ...

gss_delete_sec_context(3) -- Release a security context.

The gss_delete_sec_context() function releases a security context. The security context is then unusable for further message protection. Local data structures associated with the security context are ...

gss_display_name(3) -- Convert internal form name to plain text.

The gss_display_name() function converts an internal form name to text. This allows an application to obtain a printable representation of the internal name. The syntax of a printable name is defined ...

gss_display_status(3) -- Convert GSS-API return codes to text.

The gss_display_status() function returns text representations of GSS-API status codes for display to the user or for logging purposes. Since some status codes may indicate multiple errors, applicatio...

gss_duplicate_name(3) -- Copy existing internal form name.

The gss_duplicate_name() function creates an exact copy of an existing internal form name. The new name is independent of the original name. This means both names must both be released after use, and ...

gss_export_name(3) -- Produce a contiguous string representation of a mechanism name.

The gss_export_name() function produces a contiguous string representation of a mechanism name. The input_name parameter must specify a valid MN (that is, an internal form name generated by gss_accept...

gss_export_sec_context(3) -- Prepare security context for transfer to another process.

The gss_export_sec_context() function prepares a security context for transfer to another process. It is typically used by the context acceptor in an application where a single process receives incomi...

gss_get_mic(3) -- generate a checksum for a supplied message. Does not include the message

The gss_get_mic() function generates a checksum, called a message integrity code (MIC), for the supplied message. The checksum is placed in a token that is transferred to the peer application when the...

gss_import_name(3) -- Convert text name to internal form name.

The gss_import_name() function converts a text name into an internal form name. The name type describes the parsing syntax, or rule, to use with the text name. The internal form of the name is returne...

gss_import_sec_context(3) -- Import a security context established by another process.

The gss_import_sec_context() function allows a process to import a security context established by another process. A given interprocess token should be imported only once. Note Because of the way seq...

gss_indicate_mechs(3) -- Return an OID set of the available security mecahnisms.

The gss_indicate_mechs() function returns an OID set of the available security mechanisms. The HP implementation of GSS-API supports Kerberos 5.

gss_init_sec_context(3) -- Initiate a security context between an application and its peer.

The gss_init_sec_context() function initiates the establishment of a security context between an application and its peer. A security context must be established prior to exchanging secured messages. ...

gss_inquire_context(3) -- Obtain information about an existing security context.

The gss_inquire_context() function obtains information about a security context. The application must already have initiated the context, although the context need not be fully established. When the a...

gss_inquire_cred(3) -- Obtain information about credentials.

The gss_inquire_cred() function obtains information about credentials. This information includes the principal name whose identity the credentials represent, the remaining validity period (initiators ...

gss_inquire_cred_by_mech(3) -- obtain information about credentials for a specific security mechanism

The gss_inquire_cred_by_mech() function obtains information about credentials for a specified security mechanism. This information includes the principal name whose identity the credentials represent,...

gss_inquire_mechs_for_name(3) -- Identify security mechanisms that can process a given name.

The gss_inquire_mechs_for_name() function identifies the mechanisms that can process the specified name. Since Kerberos 5 is the only security mechanism supported by the HP Application Security Toolki...

gss_inquire_names_for_mech(3) -- Identify name types supported by a specific security mechanism.

The gss_inquire_names_for_mech() function identifies the name types that are supported by a particular mechanism. Since Kerberos 5 is the only security mechanism supported by the HP Application Securi...

gss_oid_to_str(3) -- Display OID as a string.

The function gss_oid_to_str() returns a string representing the input OID in numeric ANS.1 syntax format (enclosed in curly-braces, space-delimited, e.g. "{2 16 840 1 113687 1 2 1}"). The string is ...

gss_open(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility. This function is not require...

gss_process_context_token(3) -- Process token received from peer application.

The gss_process_context_token() function processes a token sent asynchronously from the peer application. Note This function performs no action in the HP implementation of the GSS-API. It is included ...

gss_release_buffer(3) -- Free storage associated with buffer.

The gss_release_buffer() function frees storage associated with a buffer. The storage must have been allocated by a GSS-API function call. Use this function to prevent memory leaks. Passing in a NULL ...

gss_release_cred(3) -- Free resource associated with credential.

The gss_release_cred() function informs the GSS-API that the specified credentials handle is no longer required and frees associated resources. The data structure housing a copy of the credentials wit...

gss_release_name(3) -- Delete an internal form name.

The gss_release_name() function deletes an internal form name. The HP implementation of GSS-API sets the name to GSS_C_NO_NAME upon successful completion of this call. Use this function to free the GS...

gss_release_oid(3) -- Free storage of an OID object.

Allows the caller to release the storage associated with an OBJECT IDENTIFIER buffer allocated by another GSS_API call. This call's specific behavior depends on the language and programming environme...

gss_release_oid_set(3) -- Free the storage associated with an OID set

The gss_release_oid_set() function frees the storage associated with an OID set created previously with a GSS-API function call. Use this function to prevent memory leaks. This function frees the stor...

gss_seal(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility with earlier versions. HP rec...

gss_sign(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility with earlier versions. HP rec...

gss_str_to_oid(3) -- Construct OID from string.

The function gss_str_to_oid() constructs and returns an OID from its printable form. The OID is suitable for release using the function gss_release_oid(). If the input oid_str cannot be translated int...

gss_test_oid_set_member(3) -- Determine if an OID is a member of a set.

The gss_test_oid_set_member() function interrogates an OID set to determine whether a specified OID is a member. Use this function with OID sets returned by a GSS-API function call.

gss_unseal(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility with earlier versions. HP rec...

gss_unwrap(3) -- Converts a protected message to a usable form.

The gss_unwrap() function converts a previously protected message back to a usable form by: Verifying the checksum to check message integrity. Decrypting the message if confidentiality was used. This ...

gss_verify(3) -- Application Security SDK supports this function only for compatibility with earlier versions. HP rec...

gss_verify_mic(3) -- Verify checksum of a message.

The gss_verify_mic() function verifies that the checksum fits the specified message. This function is used in conjunction with gss_get_mic() to protect messages when they are transferred between an ap...

gss_wrap(3) -- generate a checksum for the supplied message. Can also include the message

The gss_wrap() function generates a checksum, called a message integrity code (MIC), for the supplied message. The checksum and the message are placed in a token that is transferred to the peer applic...

gss_wrap_size_limit(3) -- set the maximum input message size for the required maximum output token

The gss_wrap_size_limit() function allows an application to set the maximum input message size for the required maximum output token size. This call is intended for use by applications that communicat...

gtty(3) -- set and get terminal state

The stty() subroutine sets the state of the terminal associated with fd. The gtty() subroutine retrieves the state of the terminal associated with fd. To set the state of a terminal, the stty() call m...

halfdelay(3) -- Curses

hash(3) -- hash database access method

The routine dbopen() is the library interface to database files. One of the supported file formats is hash files. The general description of the database access methods is in dbopen(3); this manual pa...

has_colors(3) -- Curses

has_ic(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

has_il(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

hcreate(3) -- Manage hash tables

The hsearch(), hcreate(), and hdestroy() functions are used to manage hash table operations: The hcreate() function initializes the hash table. You must call the hcreate() function before calling the ...

hcreate_r(3) -- Manage hash tables

hdestroy(3) -- Manage hash tables

hdestroy_r(3) -- Manage hash tables

hline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

hline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

HMAC(3) -- HMAC message authentication code

HMAC is a message authentication code (MAC), i.e. a keyed hash function used for message authentication, which is based on a hash function. The HMAC() function computes the message authentication code...

HMAC_cleanup(3) -- HMAC message authentication code

HMAC_Final(3) -- HMAC message authentication code

HMAC_Init(3) -- HMAC message authentication code

HMAC_Update(3) -- HMAC message authentication code

host2netname(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

hostalias(3) -- Search for host aliases

The hostalias() function searches for the alias associated with the name. The HOSTALIASES environment variable defines the name of a file in which aliases are kept, in the form: host alias

hsearch(3) -- Manage hash tables

hsearch_r(3) -- Manage hash tables

htonl(3) -- Convert an unsigned 32-bit integer from host byte

The htonl() (host-to-network long) function converts an unsigned 32-bit integer from host byte order to Internet network-byte order. The Internet network requires address and port reference data in ne...

htons(3) -- Convert an unsigned short (16-bit) integer from host byte order to network byte order

The htons() (host-to-network short) function converts an unsigned short (16-bit) integer from host byte order to Internet network-byte order. The Internet network requires address and port reference d...

hypot(3) -- Calculate Euclidean distance and absolute value

i2d_DHparams(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

i2d_Netscape_RSA(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

i2d_RSAPrivateKey(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

i2d_RSAPublicKey(3) -- Purpose to be supplied.

To be supplied.

i2d_SSL_SESSION(3) -- Convert SSL_SESSION object to or from ASN1 representation

iconv(3) -- Convert a string of characters from one codeset to another codeset

The iconv() function converts a string of characters in inbuf into a different codeset and returns the results in outbuf. The required converter is identified by cd, which must be a valid descriptor r...

iconv_close(3) -- Close a specified codeset converter

The iconv_close() function closes a converter previously opened with iconv_open() and deallocates any resources used by the specified converter.

iconv_open(3) -- Open a character codeset converter

The iconv_open() function initializes a codeset converter. This converter is used by the iconv function to convert characters from one codeset to another. The iconv_open() function finds the converter...

idaddset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

The ID set operation primitives manipulate sets of member IDs by operating on objects (of type idset_t) that are created by idsetcreate(). Unlike a CPU set or RAD set, whose members are CPU or RAD ide...

idandset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idcok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

idcopyset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idcountset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

iddelset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

iddiffset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idemptyset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

identity(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

idfillset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idisemptyset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idismember(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idlok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

idorset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idsetcreate(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idsetdestroy(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idsetops(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

idxorset(3) -- Perform operations on ID sets (libc library)

id_foreach(3) -- enumerate members of an ID set (libc library)

The id_foreach() function scans the specified idset, starting at the position saved in the cursor parameter, for members of the set and returns the first member found. If the SET_CURSOR_FIRST flag is ...

ieee(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

These routines support the implementation of the IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic. IEEE-format floating-point operations are subject to the following traps: Invalid operation Divisio...

ieee_functions(3) -- Related miscellaneous IEEE arithmetic functions.

ieee_get_fp_control(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

ieee_get_state_at_signal(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

ieee_ignore_state_at_signal(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

ieee_set_fp_control(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

ieee_set_state_at_signal(3) -- libc ieee trap enable support routines

if_freenameindex(3) -- Free dynamic memory allocated to the array of interface names and indexes

The if_freenameindex() function frees dynamic memory allocated to the array of interface names and indexes that the if_nameindex() function returned.

if_indextoname(3) -- Map an interface index to an interface name

The if_indextoname() function maps an interface index number to its corresponding interface name.

if_nameindex(3) -- Return an array of all interface names and indexes

The if_nameindex() function dynamically allocates memory for an array of if_nameindex structures, one structure for each interface. A structure with a zero (0) if_index value and a NULL if_name value ...

if_nametoindex(3) -- Map an interface name to an interface index

The if_nametoindex() function maps an interface name to its corresponding interface index number.

ilogb(3) -- Returns an unbiased exponent

The ilogb(), ilogbf(), and ilogbl() functions return the integral part of the base r logarithm of (|x|) as a signed integral value for non-zero x, where r is the radix of the machine's floating point...

immedok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

inch(3) -- Get a character and its attributes from a Curses window

inchnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

inchstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

index(3) -- Search for character in string

The index() function locates the first occurrence of the integer specified by the c parameter, which is converted to an unsigned char, in the string pointed to by the s parameter. The terminating null...

inet6_opt_append(3) -- Return the length of an IPv6 extension header with a new option and append the option

The inet6_opt_append() function when called with extbuf as a NULL pointer and extlen as 0, returns the updated number of bytes in an extension header. If you specify extbuf as a valid pointer and vali...

inet6_opt_find(3) -- Find a specific option in an extension header

The inet6_opt_find() function searches a received option extension header for an option specified by type. If it finds the specified option, it returns the option length and a pointer to the option da...

inet6_opt_finish(3) -- Return the total length of an IPv6 extension header, including padding, and initialize the option

The inet6_opt_finish() function when called with extbuf as a NULL pointer and extlen as 0, returns the total number of bytes in an extension header, including final padding. If you specify extbuf as a...

inet6_opt_get_val(3) -- Extract data items from the data portion of an IPv6 option

The inet6_opt_get_val() function copies data items from data buffer databuf beginning at offset to the location val. In addition, it returns the offset for the next data field to assist you in extract...

inet6_opt_init(3) -- Return the length of an IPv6 extension header with no options and initialize the header

The inet6_opt_init() function when called with extbuf as a NULL pointer and extlen as 0, returns the number of bytes in an extension header that has no options. If you specify extbuf as a valid pointe...

inet6_opt_next(3) -- Parse received option extension headers

The inet6_opt_next() function parses a received option extension header and returns the next option. In addition, it returns an offset to the next option that you specify in the prevlen parameter to s...

inet6_opt_set_val(3) -- Insert data items into the data portion of the IPv6 option

The inet6_opt_set_val() function copies data items at the location val into a data buffer databuf beginning at offset. In addition, it returns the offset for the next data field to assist you in compo...

inet6_rth_add(3) -- Add an IPv6 address to the Routing header under construction

The inet6_rth_add() function adds IPv6 address to the end of the Routing header under construction. The address pointed to by addr cannot be either an IPv6 V4-mapped address or an IPv6 multicast addre...

inet6_rth_getaddr(3) -- Retrieve an address for an index from an IPv6 Routing header

The inet6_rth_getaddr() function uses a specified index value and retrieves a pointer to an address in a Routing header specified by bp. Call inet6_rth_segments() before calling this function in order...

inet6_rth_init(3) -- Initialize an IPv6 Routing header buffer

The inet6_rth_init() function initializes a buffer and buffer data for an IPv6 Routing header. The function sets the ip60r_segleft, ip6r0_nxt, and ip6r0_reserved members in the ip6_rthdr0 structure to...

inet6_rth_reverse(3) -- Reverse the order of addresses in an IPv6 Routing header

The inet6_rth_reverse() function reads an IPv6 Routing header and writes a new Routing header, reversing the order of addresses in the new header. The in and out parameters can point to the same buffe...

inet6_rth_segments(3) -- Return the number of segments (addresses) in an IPv6 Routing header

The inet6_rth_segments() function returns the number of segments (or addresses) in an IPv6 Routing header.

inet6_rth_space(3) -- Return the number of bytes required for an IPv6 Routing header

The inet6_rth_space() function determines the amount of space, in bytes, required for a Routing header. Although the function returns the amount of space required, it does not allocate buffer space. T...

inet_addr(3) -- Translate an Internet network address string to an Internet address integer

The inet_addr() function translates a dot-formatted Internet character address string to an Internet address integer. The Internet address integer is returned as a network byte-ordered integer. Values...

inet_lnaof(3) -- Translate an Internet address integer into its host (local) address component

The inet_lnaof() function translates an Internet network byte-ordered address into its host (local) address component. The host address is returned in host byte-order.

inet_makeaddr(3) -- Translate an Internet network address and

The inet_makeaddr() function translates a network number and a local host address into their equivalent Internet address. The Internet address is returned in network-byte order.

inet_netof(3) -- Translate an Internet address into its network address component

The inet_netof() function translates an Internet address into its network address component. The network address integer is returned in host-byte order.

inet_network(3) -- Translate an Internet dot-formatted address string to a network address integer

The inet_network() function translates a dot-formatted Internet network character address string to a network byte-ordered address (most significant byte leftmost, least significant byte rightmost). V...

inet_ntoa(3) -- Translate an Internet address into a dot-formatted character string

The inet_ntoa() function translates an Internet network byte-ordered address into a dot-formatted character string.

inet_ntop(3) -- Convert a numeric address to a text string

The use of this routine is deprecated. Use the getnameinfo(3) routine instead. The inet_ntop() function converts a binary Internet address value to a formatted text string.

inet_pton(3) -- Convert a text string to a numeric address

The use of this routine is deprecated. Use the getaddrinfo(3) routine instead; it is also protocol-independent. The inet_pton() function converts a text string to a numeric value in Internet network-b...

initgroups(3) -- Initialize concurrent group set

The initgroups() function reads the defined group membership of the specified user and sets the concurrent group set of the current process to that value. The base_gid parameter is always included in ...

Initialize(3) -- Verify module version (CDSA)

This function checks whether the current version of the module is compatible with the CSSM version specified as input and performs any module-manager-specific setup activities.

initprivs(3) -- Initializes privileges (Enhanced Security)

The initprivs() function initializes the privilege library. The only privilege currently available is that of root.

initscr(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

initstate(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

The random() and srandom() functions are random number generators that have virtually the same calling sequence and initialization properties as the rand() and srand() functions, but produce sequences...

initstate_r(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

init_color(3) -- Curses

init_pair(3) -- Curses

innetgr(3) -- Get network group entry

innstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

innwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

insch(3) -- Insert a character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

insdelln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

insertln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

insnstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

insnwstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

insque(3) -- Insert or removes an element in a queue

The insque() and remque() functions manipulate queues built from doubly-linked lists. The queue can be either circular or linear. An application using these functions must define a structure in which ...

insstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

instr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

inswch(3) -- Insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

inswstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

ins_nwstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

ins_wch(3) -- Insert a complex character and rendition before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

ins_wstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

intrflush(3) -- Curses

intro(3) -- Introduction to library functions

Section 3 reference pages describe functions that may be found in various libraries. The library functions are those other than the functions that directly invoke Tru64 UNIX system primitives, describ...

invert(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

inwch(3) -- Get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a Curses window

inwchnstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

inwchstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

inwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

in_wch(3) -- Input a complex character and rendition from a Curses window

These functions extract the complex character and rendition from the current or specified position in the current or specified window into the object pointed to by wcval.

in_wchnstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

in_wchstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

isalnum(3) -- Classify characters

isalpha(3) -- Classify characters

isascii(3) -- Classify characters

isastream(3) -- Determine if a file descriptor refers to a STREAMS file

The isastream() function tests whether a file descriptor it encounters is actually a STREAMS file.

isatty(3) -- Get the name of a terminal

The ttyname() function gets the name of a terminal. It returns a pointer to a string containing the null-terminated pathname of the terminal device associated with the file-descriptor parameter. The i...

iscntrl(3) -- Classify characters

isdigit(3) -- Classify characters

isendwin(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

isfdtype(3) -- Test a file descriptor for a specific file type

The isfdtype() function tests whether a file descriptor has a specific file type.

isgraph(3) -- Classify characters

islower(3) -- Classify characters

isprint(3) -- Classify characters

ispunct(3) -- Classify characters

isspace(3) -- Classify characters

isupper(3) -- Classify characters

iswalnum(3) -- Classify a wide character

These functions test a wide character wc for membership in a character class in the current locale. Each function tests to see if a wide character is part of a different character class. If the wide c...

iswalpha(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswcntrl(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswctype(3) -- Determine the properties of a wide character

The iswctype() function tests the wide character specified by the wc parameter to determine if it has the property specified by the wc_prop parameter. The wctype() function associates a character prop...

iswdigit(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswgraphiswlower(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswprint(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswpunct(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswspace(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswupper(3) -- Classify a wide character

iswxdigit(3) -- Classify a wide character

isxdigit(3) -- Classify characters

is_linetouched(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

is_starting_egid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

is_starting_euid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

is_starting_luid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

is_starting_rgid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

is_starting_ruid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

is_wintouched(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

itom(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

itrunc(3) -- truncate a floating-point number

The itrunc() function returns the signed integer nearest to the double-precision floating value x in the direction of 0.0. This effectively truncates x by discarding its fraction component. The uitrun...

j0(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

j1(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

jn(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

jrand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

jrand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

keyname(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

keypad(3) -- Curses

key_name(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

killchar(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

killwchar(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

knlist(3) -- look up symbols in the currently running kernel

The knlist() library routine looks up addresses of kernel symbols in the currently running kernel. In addition to finding symbols associated with the kernel image, knlist() will also find symbols defi...

l64a(3) -- convert long integer and base-64 ASCII string

labs(3) -- Computes absolute value and division of integers

lcong48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

lcong48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

ldaclose(3) -- close a common object file

The ldopen() and ldclose() functions provide uniform access to simple object files and object files that are members of archive files. An archive of common object files can be processed as if it is a ...

ldahread(3) -- read the archive header of a member of an archive file

If TYPE(ldptr) is the archive file magic number, ldahread() reads the archive header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at arhead. The ldahread...

ldaopen(3) -- open a common object file for reading

The ldopen() and ldclose() routines provide uniform access to simple object files and to object files that are members of archive files. An archive of common object files can be processed as if it wer...

ldclose(3) -- close a common object file

ldexp(3) -- Manipulate floating-point numbers

ldfhread(3) -- read the file header of a common object file

The ldfhread() routine reads the file header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. It reads the file header into the area of memory beginning at filehead. The ldfhread() routine r...

ldgetaux(3) -- retrieves an auxiliary entry

The ldgetaux() routine returns a pointer to the auxiliary table entry (AUXU) indexed by iaux. The entry is contained in a static buffer. Because the buffer can be overwritten by later calls to ldgetau...

ldgetname(3) -- retrieve symbol name for object file symbol table entry

The ldgetname() routine returns a pointer to the name associated with symbol. The pointer is returned as a string in a static buffer. Because the buffer can be overwritten by later calls to ldgetname(...

ldgetpd(3) -- retrieves procedure descriptor given a procedure descriptor index

The ldgetpd() routine returns a SUCCESS or FAILURE depending on whether the procedure descriptor with index ipd can be accessed. If it can be accessed, the structure pointed to by ppd is filled with t...

ldiv(3) -- Computes absolute value and division of integers

ldlseek(3) -- seek to line number entries of a section of a common object file

The ldlseek() routine seeks to the line number entries of the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. The ldnlseek() routine seeks to the line number e...

ldnlseek(3) -- seek to line number entries of a section of a common object file

ldnrseek(3) -- seek to relocation entries of a section of a common object file

The ldrseek() function seeks to the relocation entries of the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. The ldnrseek() function seeks to the relocation e...

ldnshread(3) -- read an indexed/named section header of a common object file

The ldshread() routine reads the section header specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at secthead. The ldnshread() routine r...

ldnsseek(3) -- seek to an indexed/named section of a common object file

The ldsseek() routine seeks to the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. The ldnsseek() routine seeks to the section specified by sectname. Both rout...

ldohseek(3) -- seek to the optional file header of a common object file

The ldohseek() routine seeks to the optional file header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. It returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If the object file has no optional header or if it ca...

ldopen(3) -- open a common object file for reading

ldrseek(3) -- seek to relocation entries of a section of a common object file

ldr_atexit(3) -- Run termination functions for shared libraries

The ldr_atexit() function runs termination functions for a process' shared libraries and executable file. These termination functions are determined when a shared library or shared executable file is...

ldr_inq_module(3) -- Return information about a loaded module

The ldr_inq_module() function returns information about a specified module contained within the address space of the specified process into the variable pointed to by the info parameter. The info_size...

ldr_inq_region(3) -- Return module information about a region in a loaded module

The ldr_inq_region() function returns information about a specified region within a specified module. The module is contained within the address space of the specified process. The returned informatio...

ldr_next_module(3) -- Return the next module ID for a process

The ldr_next_module() function returns the next module ID for the specified process, given a specified module ID. It iterates through the module IDs of all modules currently loaded in a specified proc...

ldr_xattach(3) -- Attache to another process to permit loading/unloading of modules in that process' address space

The ldr_xattach() function is used to permit a process to load, unload, query, or retrieve the contents of another process' address space.

ldr_xdetach(3) -- Detache from an attached process

The ldr_xdetach() function detaches the calling process from process, with which it had been associated for crossprocess loading and debugging. This procedure should be used only if a ldr_xattach() wa...

ldshread(3) -- read an indexed/named section header of a common object file

ldsseek(3) -- seek to an indexed/named section of a common object file

ldtbread(3) -- read an indexed symbol table entry of a common object file

The ldtbread() routine reads the symbol table entry specified by symindex of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at symbol. It returns SUCCESS or F...

ldtbseek(3) -- seek to the symbol table of a common object file

The ldtbseek() routine seeks to the symbol table of the object file currently associated with ldptr. It returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. It fails if the symbol table has been stripped from the object file ...

leaveok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

len(3) -- return length of Fortran string

The len() routine returns the length of string ch. len(3)

lfind(3) -- Perform a linear search and update

The lsearch() function performs a linear search of a table. This function returns a pointer into a table indicating where a specified key is located in the table. When the key is not found in the tabl...

lgamma(3) -- Compute the logarithm of the gamma function

lhash(3) -- Dynamic hash table

This library implements dynamic hash tables. The hash table entries can be arbitrary structures. Usually they consist of key and value fields. The lh_new() function creates a new LHASH structure. The ...

lh_delete(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_doall(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_doall_arg(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_error(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_free(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_insert(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_new(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_node_stats(3) -- LHASH statistics

The LHASH structure records statistics about most aspects of accessing the hash table. It is a legacy of Eric Young who wrote the library for the purpose of implementing a useful algorithm rather than...

lh_node_stats_bio(3) -- LHASH statistics

lh_node_usage_stats(3) -- LHASH statistics

lh_node_usage_stats_bio(3) -- LHASH statistics

lh_retrieve(3) -- Dynamic hash table

lh_stats(3) -- LHASH statistics

lh_stats_bio(3) -- LHASH statistics

libAF(3) -- Provide Attribute File Library functions to manipulate file attributes

The libAF() functions are provided for programs that use attribute files. These functions perform the following: Closes the specified attribute file. Gets the attribute value matching name from the at...

libcfg(3) -- introduction to the Configuration Management Library

The configuration management library (libcfg.a) provides routines that allow applications to manage static and dynamic kernel subsystems. Applications use the libcfg routines to communicate with the c...

libcssm(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

libcssm_intro(3) -- Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) implemented as

libexc(3) -- an overview of exception support supplied in libexc.a

libpw(3) -- Provide functions for compatibility with existing programs

The libpw functions are provided for compatibility with existing programs. Their use in new programs is not recommended. Determines whether string contains character. Determines the offset in string1 ...

libPW(3) -- Provide functions for compatibility with existing programs

libst(3) -- symbol table and object file access library

The library libst.a contains a collection of functions for accessing object file data and symbol table information. These functions effectively insulate the calling program from knowledge of the overa...

libst_intro(3) -- symbol table and object file access library

lio_listio(3) -- Initiates a list of asynchronous I/O requests

The lio_listio function allows the calling process to initiate a list of I/O requests with a single function call. The mode argument determines whether the function returns after the I/O operations ar...

localeconv(3) -- Retrieve locale-dependent formatting parameters

The localeconv() function provides access to the object that specifies the current locale's conventions for the format of numeric quantities. The lconv structure contains values appropriate for forma...

localtime(3) -- converts time units

localtime64(3) -- converts time units

localtime64_r(3) -- converts time units

localtime_r(3) -- converts time units

locked_out_acct_es(3) -- determine if passwordmanagement disallows user login (Enhanced Security)

The locked_out_acct_es() function determines whether the password management values for an extended profile prohibit the user from logging in. This routine is called as part of the login processing un...

locked_out_es(3) -- determine if passwordmanagement disallows user login (Enhanced Security)

lockf(3) -- Lock and unlocks regions of open file descriptors

The lockf() function locks and unlocks sections of an open file. Unlike the fcntl() function, however, its interface is limited to setting only write (exclusive) locks. Although the lockf() and fcntl(...

log(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

log10(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

log1p(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

log2(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

logb(3) -- Manipulate floating-point numbers

longjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

The setjmp() and longjmp() functions are useful when handling errors and interrupts encountered in low-level functions of a program. The setjmp() function saves the current stack context and signal ma...

longname(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

lrand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

lrand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

lsearch(3) -- Perform a linear search and update

madd(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

mallinfo(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

malloc(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

mallopt(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

mblen(3) -- Determine the length in bytes of a multibyte character

The mblen() function determines the number of bytes in a multibyte character. The behavior of the mblen() function is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale. In locales with shift-sta...

mbrlen(3) -- Determine the length in bytes of a multibyte character

mbrtowc(3) -- Convert a multibyte character to a wide character

The mbtowc() function converts a multibyte character to a wide character and returns the number of bytes of the multibyte character, which is stored as an output variable. In locales with shift-state ...

mbsinit(3) -- Determine whether a multibyte-character string is in the initial conversion state

The mbsinit() function determines whether the sequence of characters being converted is in the initial conversion state; that is, the function determines whether the multibyte encoding for the current...

mbsrtowcs(3) -- Convert a multibyte character string

The mbstowcs() function converts a multibyte-character string into a wide-character string, which is stored at a specified location. The function does not examine or convert any characters that follow...

mbstowcs(3) -- Convert a multibyte character string

mbtowc(3) -- Convert a multibyte character to a wide character

mcmp(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

MD2(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD2, MD4, and MD5 are cryptographic hash functions with a 128 bit output. The MD2(), MD4(), and MD5() functions compute the MD2, MD4, and MD5 message digest of the n bytes at d and place it in md (whi...

MD2_Final(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD2_Init(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD2_Update(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD4(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD4_Final(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD4_Init(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD4_Update(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

md5(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD5(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD5_Final(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD5_Init(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MD5_Update(3) -- MD2, MD4, and MD5 hash functions

MDC2(3) -- MDC2 hash function

MDC2 is a method to construct hash functions with 128 bit output from block ciphers. These functions are an implementation of MDC2 with DES. The MDC2() function computes the MDC2 message digest of the...

MDC2_Final(3) -- MDC2 hash function

MDC2_Init(3) -- MDC2 hash function

MDC2_Update(3) -- MDC2 hash function

mdiv(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

MDS_Initialize(3) -- Initiate service context with MDS (CDSA)

This function initiates a service context with MDS and returns an opaque handle corresponding to that context. The caller provides memory functions that MDS can use to manage memory in the caller's s...

MDS_Install(3) -- Create the object directory database (CDSA)

This function creates the Object Directory database containing the Object relation, and the CDSA Directory database containing the set of CDSA-specific relations defined in this specification. The Mds...

MDS_Terminate(3) -- Terminate the MDS service context (CDSA)

This function terminates the MDS service context identified by the opaque MdsHandle. The MDS handle is invalidated and MDS frees all internal resources associated with the context.

MDS_Uninstall(3) -- Delete the object directory database (CDSA)

This function deletes the Object Directory database containing the Object relation, and the CDSA Directory database containing the set of CDSA-specific relations defined in this specification. The Mds...

memalloc_attr(3) -- Query the memory allocation policy and attributes (libnuma library)

The memalloc_attr() function returns the current memory allocation policy and associated attributes in the buffer pointed to by attr for the address specified by va. If radset information about the me...

memccpy(3) -- Perform memory operations

The memccpy(), memchr(), memcmp(), memcpy(), memmove(), and memset() functions operate on strings in memory areas. A memory area is a group of contiguous characters bound by a count and not terminated...

memchr(3) -- Perform memory operations

memcmp(3) -- Perform memory operations

memcpy(3) -- Perform memory operations

memmove(3) -- Perform memory operations

memset(3) -- Perform memory operations

meta(3) -- Curses

min(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

mkdtemp(3) -- Construct a unique file name or directory

The mktemp() function replaces, with a unique file name, the contents of the template string pointed to by the template parameter. The application should initialize the template string to be a file na...

mkfifo(3) -- Create a FIFO

The mkfifo function used with libc.a is an interface to the mknod function, where the file that is to be created is a FIFO special file (named pipe). When used with libsys5.a, the mkfifo() function cr...

mkstemp(3) -- Construct a unique file name or directory

mkstemps(3) -- Construct a unique file name or directory

mktemp(3) -- Construct a unique file name or directory

mktime(3) -- converts time units

mktime64(3) -- converts time units

mktimer(3) -- Allocate a per-process timer

The mktimer() function is used to allocate a per-process timer using a specified system-wide clock as its timebase. The mktimer() function returns a unique timer ID of type timer_t, which is used to i...

mlock(3) -- Locks or unlocks a specified region in memory (P1003.1b)

The mlock and munlock functions lock and unlock whole pages containing any part of the process address space starting at addr and continuing for len bytes. The mlock function guarantees all whole page...

mlockall(3) -- Locks into memory, or unlocks, all of a specified process's pages (P1003.1b)

The mlockall function causes all of the pages mapped by the process's address space to be memory resident until unlocked by a call to the munlockall function, until the process exits, or until the pr...

modf(3) -- Round floatingpoint

ModuleManagerAuthenticate(3) -- Module manager authentication (CDSA)

This function should perform the elective module manager's half of the bilateral authentication procedure with CSSM. The CssmGuid is used to locate the CSSM's credentials to be verified. The credent...

moncontrol(3) -- Prepare execution profile

When an executable program is compiled for profiling by using either the -p or -pg option with the cc command, the default parameters cause the entire text segment to be profiled. For large programs, ...

monitor(3) -- Prepare execution profile

monitor_signal(3) -- Prepare execution profile

monstartup(3) -- Prepare execution profile

mout(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

move(3) -- Move the Curses window cursor

mp(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

mpool(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

The mpool routines are the library interface that provides page-oriented buffer management of files. The buffers may be shared between processes. The function mpool_open() initializes a memory pool. T...

MPOOL(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_close(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_filter(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_get(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_new(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_open(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_put(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mpool_sync(3) -- shared memory buffer pool

mq_close(3) -- Closes a message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_close function closes a message queue. This function removes the association between the message queue descriptor, mqdes, and its open message queue description. When all message queue descript...

mq_getattr(3) -- Returns the status and attributes of a message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_getattr function returns the status and attributes of a message queue. Use the mq_setattr function to set message queue attributes.

mq_notify(3) -- Attaches a request for asynchronous signal notification to a message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_notify function attaches a request for asynchronous signal notification to a message queue for the calling process. Following a call to this function, the specified signal is sent to the callin...

mq_open(3) -- Establishes the connection between a message queue and a message queue descriptor (P1003.1b)

The mq_open function establishes the connection between a message queue and a message queue descriptor. This function creates a new open message queue description that refers to a specified message qu...

mq_receive(3) -- Receives the oldest, highest-priority message from the message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_receive function receives the oldest, highest-priority message from the message queue. The message is removed from the queue and transferred to the buffer pointed to by the msg_ptr argument. If...

mq_send(3) -- Places a message in the message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_send function places a message in the message queue. This function inserts the message in the queue at the position indicated by the msg_prio argument. A message with a relatively large numeric...

mq_setattr(3) -- Sets the mq_options attributes associated with a message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_setattr function sets the mq_options attributes associated with the message queue descriptor for the calling process. Only the blocking attribute of the queue for the calling process can be mod...

mq_unlink(3) -- Removes a message queue (P1003.1b)

The mq_unlink function removes a message queue named by the pathname. After a successful call to this function, subsequent calls to the mq_open function fail if they specify the queue identified by th...

mrand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

mrand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

MrmCloseHierarchy(3X) -- Closes a UID hierarchy

The MrmCloseHierarchy function closes a UID hierarchy previously opened by MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. All files associated with the hierarchy are closed by the Motif Resource Manager (MRM) and all as...

MrmFetchBitmapLiteral(3X) -- Fetches a bitmap literal from a hierarchy

The MrmFetchBitmapLiteral function fetches a bitmap literal from an MRM hierarchy, and converts the bitmap literal to an X pixmap of depth 1. The function returns this pixmap and its width and height....

MrmFetchColorLiteral(3X) -- Fetches a named color literal from a UID file

The MrmFetchColorLiteral function fetches a named color literal from a UID file, and converts the color literal to a pixel color value. Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specifie...

MrmFetchIconLiteral(3X) -- Fetches an icon literal from a hierarchy

The MrmFetchIconLiteral function fetches an icon literal from an MRM hierarchy, and converts the icon literal to an X pixmap. Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specified icon lit...

MrmFetchLiteral(3X) -- Fetches a literal from a UID file

The MrmFetchLiteral function reads and returns the value and type of a literal (named value) that is stored as a public resource in a single UID file. This function returns a pointer to the value of t...

MrmFetchSetValues(3X) -- Fetches the values to be set from literals stored in UID files

The MrmFetchSetValues function is similar to XtSetValues, except that the values to be set are defined by the UIL named values that are stored in the UID hierarchy. MrmFetchSetValues fetches the value...

MrmFetchWidget(3X) -- Fetches and creates any indexed (UIL named) application widgets and its children

The MrmFetchWidget function fetches and creates an indexed application widget and its children. The indexed application widget is any widget that is named in UIL. In fetch operations, the fetched widg...

MrmFetchWidgetOverride(3X) -- Fetches any indexed (UIL named) application widget. It overrides the arguments specified for this ap...

The MrmFetchWidgetOverride function is the extended version of MrmFetchWidget. It is identical to MrmFetchWidget, except that it allows the caller to override the widget's name and any arguments that...

MrmInitialize(3X) -- Prepares an application to use MRM widgetfetching facilities

The MrmInitialize function must be called to prepare an application to use MRM widget-fetching facilities. You must call this function prior to fetching a widget. However, it is good programming pract...

MrmOpenHierarchy(3X) -- Allocates a hierarchy ID and opens all the UID files in the hierarchy

This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. MrmOpenHierarchy is identical to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay except that MrmO...

MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay(3X) -- Allocates a hierarchy ID and opens all the UID files in the hierarchy

MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay allows you to specify the list of UID files that MRM searches in subsequent fetch operations. All subsequent fetch operations return the first occurrence of the named item e...

MrmRegisterClass(3X) -- Saves the information needed for MRM to

The MrmRegisterClass function allows MRM to access userdefined widget classes. This function registers the necessary information for MRM to create widgets of this class. You must call MrmRegisterClass...

MrmRegisterNames(3X) -- Registers the values associated with the names referenced in UIL (for example, UIL callback function...

The MrmRegisterNames function registers a vector of names and associated values for access in MRM. The values can be callback functions, pointers to user-defined data, or any other values. The informa...

MrmRegisterNamesInHierarchy(3X) -- Registers the values associated with the names referenced in UIL within a single hierarchy (for exam...

The MrmRegisterNamesInHierarchy function registers a vector of names and associated values for access in MRM. The values can be callback functions, pointers to user-defined data, or any other values. ...

msem_init(3) -- Initialize a semaphore in a mapped file or shared memory region

The msem_init() function allocates a new binary semaphore and initializes the state of the new semaphore. If the initial_value parameter is MSEM_LOCKED, the new semaphore is initialized in the locked ...

msem_lock(3) -- Lock a semaphore

The msem_lock() function attempts to lock a binary semaphore. If the semaphore is not currently locked, it is locked and the msem_lock() function returns successfully. If the semaphore is currently lo...

msem_remove(3) -- Remove a semaphore

The msem_remove() function removes a binary semaphore. Any subsequent use of the msemaphore structure before it is again initialized by calling the msem_init() function will have undefined results. Th...

msem_unlock(3) -- Unlock a semaphore

The msem_unlock() function unlocks a binary semaphore. If the condition parameter is 0 (zero), the semaphore is unlocked, whether or not any other processes are currently attempting to lock it. If the...

msqrt(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

msub(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

mult(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

munlock(3) -- Locks or unlocks a specified region in memory (P1003.1b)

munlockall(3) -- Locks into memory, or unlocks, all of a specified process's pages (P1003.1b)

mvaddch(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

mvaddchnstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvaddchstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvaddnstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvaddnwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvaddstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvaddwch(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvaddwchnstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvaddwchstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvaddwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvadd_wch(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

mvadd_wchnstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

mvadd_wchstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

mvchgat(3) -- Change renditions of characters in a Curses window

mvcur(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

mvdelch(3) -- Delete the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvderwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

mvgetch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetnstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetnwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetn_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvgetwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvget_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

mvget_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvhline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

mvhline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

mvinch(3) -- Get a character and its attributes from a Curses window

mvinchnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvinchstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvinnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

mvinnwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

mvinsch(3) -- Insert a character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvinsnstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvinsnwstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvinsstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvinstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

mvinswch(3) -- Insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvinswstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvins_nwstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

mvins_wch(3) -- Insert a complex character and rendition before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvins_wstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

mvinwch(3) -- Get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a Curses window

mvinwchnstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvinwchstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvinwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

mvin_wch(3) -- Input a complex character and rendition from a Curses window

These functions extract the complex character and rendition from the current or specified position in the current or specified window into the object pointed to by wcval.

mvin_wchnstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

mvin_wchstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

mvprintw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

mvscanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

mvvline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

mvvline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

mvwaddch(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

mvwaddchnstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvwaddchstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvwaddnstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvwaddnwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvwaddstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvwaddwch(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvwaddwchnstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvwaddwchstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

mvwaddwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

mvwadd_wch(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

mvwadd_wchnstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

mvwadd_wchstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

mvwchgat(3) -- Change renditions of characters in a Curses window

mvwdelch(3) -- Delete the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwgetch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetnstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetnwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetn_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwgetwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwget_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

mvwget_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

mvwhline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

mvwhline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

mvwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

mvwinch(3) -- Get a character and its attributes from a Curses window

mvwinchnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvwinchstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvwinnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

mvwinnwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

mvwinsch(3) -- Insert a character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwinsnstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwinsnwstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwinsstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwinstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

mvwinswch(3) -- Insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwinswstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwins_nwstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

mvwins_wch(3) -- Insert a complex character and rendition before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

mvwins_wstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

mvwinwch(3) -- Get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a Curses window

mvwinwchnstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvwinwchstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

mvwinwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

mvwin_wch(3) -- Input a complex character and rendition from a Curses window

These functions extract the complex character and rendition from the current or specified position in the current or specified window into the object pointed to by wcval.

mvwin_wchnstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

mvwin_wchstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

mvwprintw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

mvwscanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

mvwvline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

mvwvline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

m_in(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

m_out(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

nacreate(3) -- arena memory allocator

nanosleep(3) -- Suspends a process from execution for the specified timer interval (P1003.1b)

The nanosleep function suspends a process until one of the following conditions is met: The time interval specified in rqtp has elapsed. A signal is delivered to the calling process and the action is ...

napms(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

ndbm(3) -- Database subroutines

neg(3) -- Negate and returns the value of the double operand x

The neg() function returns a negative of the value of the double operand x. neg(3)

netname2host(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

netname2user(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

newpad(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

newterm(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

newwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

nextafter(3) -- Related miscellaneous IEEE arithmetic functions.

nextkey(3) -- Database subroutines

nfork(3) -- Creates a child process (libnuma library)

The nfork() function causes creation of a new process. The new process (child process) is an exact copy of the calling process (parent process). This means the child process inherits the following att...

nftw(3) -- Walk a file tree

The nftw() function recursively searches the directory hierarchy that descends from the directory specified by the path parameter. The nftw() function performs the same operations as ftw(), except tha...

nice(3) -- Change the scheduling priority of a process

The nice() function adds the value specified in the increment parameter to the nice value of the calling process. The nice value is a nonnegative number; a higher nice value gives the process a lower ...

nint(3) -- Round floatingpoint

nl(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

nlist(3) -- gets entries from name list

NOTE The nlist() subroutine has moved from the standard C library to the libmld.a library due to the difference in the object file format. Programs that need to use nlist() must be linked with the -lm...

nloc(3) -- Queries the NUMA Topology or Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

The nloc() function will return in radset the set of RADs that have a distance <= the nattr_distance value from the specified resource. The returned radset value may be used as an argument to explicit...

NLSPATH(3) -- Opening a message catalog

nl_langinfo(3) -- Return language or cultural data defined in the current locale

The nl_langinfo() function returns a pointer to a string containing information relevant to the particular language or cultural area defined in the program's locale. The constant names and values tha...

nmadvise(3) -- Advise the system of the expected paging behavior of a process (libnuma)

The nmadvise() function permits a process to advise the system about its expected behavior in referencing a particular range of pages in the process address space. This advice includes reference patte...

nmmap(3) -- Maps an open file into a process's address space (libnuma library).

If the attr argument is NULL, the nmmap() function behaves identically to the mmap() function. If the attr argument is non-NULL, it points to a memory allocation policy and attributes structure that s...

nocbreak(3) -- Curses

nodelay(3) -- Curses

noecho(3) -- Curses

nonl(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

noqiflush(3) -- Curses

noraw(3) -- Curses

notimeut(3) -- Curses

nrand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

nrand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

nsdispatch(3) -- name service switch dispatcher routine

The nsdispatch() function invokes the callback functions specified in dtab in the order given in /etc/nsswitch.conf for the database until a successful entry is found. retval is passed to each callbac...

nsg_attach_pid(3) -- Attaches a process to, or detaches a process from a NUMA Scheduling Group (libnuma library)

The nsg_attach_pid() function attaches the process identified by the pid argument to an NSG. An NSG is a set of processes and/or threads that will be constrained to reside on the same Resource Affinit...

nsg_destroy(3) -- Destroys a NUMA Scheduling Group (libnuma library)

Remove the NSG identified by nsg and deallocate associated structures. If the NSG is currently non-empty, existing members are removed before deleting the NSG.

nsg_detach_pid(3) -- Attaches a process to, or detaches a process from a NUMA Scheduling Group (libnuma library)

nsg_get(3) -- Query status of a NUMA Scheduling Group (libnuma library)

The nsg_get() function queries the status of the NSG by copying its associated nsgid_ds structure into a buffer pointed to by result.

nsg_get_nsgs(3) -- Returns a list NUMA Scheduling Groups (libnuma library)

The nsg_get_nsgs() function returns a list of NSGs that are active on the system in the buffer pointed to by nsgidlist. The argument numnsgs specifies the number of nsgid_t entries that can be accommo...

nsg_get_pids(3) -- Return a list of a NUMA Scheduling Group's process identifiers (libnuma library)

The nsg_get_pids() function returns a list of process IDs of processes attached to the NSG in the buffer pointed to by pidlist. The argument numpids specifies the number of process IDs that can be acc...

nsg_init(3) -- Look up or create a NUMA Scheduling Group (libnuma library)

The nsg_init() function looks up and possibly creates the NSG identified by the key parameter. The flags parameter supplies options for the lookup or create operation. After creating a new NSG, the ns...

nsg_set(3) -- Set NUMA Scheduling Group owner and permissions (libnuma library)

The nsg_set() function sets the NSG owner IDs (user ID and group ID) and permissions (mode) by using the nsgid_ds structure pointed to by attrib.

nshmget(3) -- Returns (or creates) the ID for a shared memory region (libnuma library)

If the attr argument is NULL, the nshmget() function behaves identically to the shmget() function. If the attr argument is non-NULL, it points to a memory allocation policy and attributes structure th...

ntohl(3) -- Convert an unsigned 32-bit integer from Internet network byte order to host byte order

The ntohl() (network-to-host long) function converts an unsigned 32-bit integer from Internet network-byte order to host-byte order. The Internet network requires address and port reference data in ne...

ntohs(3) -- Convert an unsigned short (16-bit) integer from

The ntohs() (network-to-host short) function converts an unsigned short (16-bit) integer from Internet network-byte order to host-byte order. The Internet network requires address and port reference d...

numa_intro(3) -- Introduction to NUMA support

NUMA, or Non-Uniform Memory Access, refers to a hardware architectural feature in modern multiprocessor platforms that attempts to address the increasing disparity between requirements for processor s...

numa_query_pid(3) -- Returns NUMA-related information for the specified process identifier (libnuma library)

The numa_query_pid() function returns NUMA-related information about a specified pid in the rpinfo structure, which contains the following information: typedef struct __numa_pid_info { pid_t npinfo_pi...

Object(3X) -- The Object widget class

Object is never instantiated. Its sole purpose is as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. Classes [Toc] [Back] The class pointer is objectClass. The class name is Object. New Resour...

ObtainPrivateKeyFromPublicKey(3) -- Convert public key to private key (CDSA)

Given a public key this function returns a reference to the private key. The private key and its associated passphrase can be used as an input to any function requiring a private key value.

omin(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

omout(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

opendir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

openlog(3) -- Control system log

openlog_r(3) -- Control system log

openpty(3) -- Open and fork pseudoterminals

OpenSSL_add_all_algorithms(3) -- Add algorithms to internal table

OpenSSL keeps an internal table of digest algorithms and ciphers. It uses this table to lookup ciphers via functions such as EVP_get_cipher_byname(). The OpenSSL_add_all_digests() function adds all di...

OpenSSL_add_all_ciphers(3) -- Add algorithms to internal table

OpenSSL_add_all_digests(3) -- Add algorithms to internal table

OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms(3) -- Initialize SSL library by registering algorithms

The SSL_library_init() function registers the available ciphers and digests. The OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms() and SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms() functions are synonyms for the SSL_library_init() function...

OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER(3) -- Get OpenSSL version number

OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER is a numeric release version identifier: MMNNFFPPS: major minor fix patch status The status nibble has one of the values 0 for development, 1 to e for betas 1 to 14, and f for r...

overlay(3) -- Overlap and manipulate overlapped Curses windows

OverrideShell(3X) -- The OverrideShell widget class

OverrideShell is used for shell windows that completely bypass the window manager, for example, PopupMenu shells. Classes [Toc] [Back] OverrideShell inherits behavior and resources from Core, Co...

overwrite(3) -- Overlap and manipulate overlapped Curses windows

pair_content(3) -- Curses

PAIR_NUMBER(3) -- Curses

passlen(3) -- Determines minimum password length (Enhanced Security)

The passlen() function takes the password lifetime duration life_dur for an account and the login_delay between login attempts, both values in seconds, and the alphabet_size of distinct characters, an...

PassThrough(3) -- Extend crypto functionality (CDSA)

The CSSM_CSP_PassThrough() (CSSM API), or CSP_PassThrough() (CSP SPI), function is provided to allow CSP developers to extend the crypto functionality of the CSSM API.

pause(3) -- Suspends a process until it receives a signal

The pause() function suspends the calling process until it receives a signal whose action is either to execute a signal-catching function or terminate the process. The signal must be one that is ackno...

pclose(3) -- Closes a pipe to a process

The pclose() function closes a pipe between the calling program and a shell command to be executed. Use the pclose() function to close any stream you have opened with the popen() function. The pclose(...

pechochar(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

pechowchar(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

pecho_wchar(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

pem(3) -- PEM routines

The pem() functions read or write structures in PEM format. In this sense PEM format is simply base64 encoded data surrounded by header lines. Each operation has four functions associated with it. For...

perror(3) -- Write a message explaining the current setting of errno

The perror() function writes a message on the standard error stream that describes the current setting of the external variable errno. The error message includes the string pointed to by the string pa...

pfopen(3) -- Open a packet filter file

The packet filter (see packetfilter(7)) provides raw access to Ethernets and similar network data link layers. The pfopen() function is used to open a packet filter file descriptor. The function hides...

pmap_getmaps(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

pmap_getport(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

pmap_rmtcall(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

pmap_set(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

pmap_unset(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

pnoutrefresh(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

popen(3) -- Initiates a pipe to a process

The popen() function creates a pipe between the calling program and a shell command to be executed. It returns a pointer to a FILE structure for the stream. If the type parameter is the value r, the c...

pow(3) -- Exponential, logarithm, and power functions

prefresh(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

printf(3) -- Print formatted output

printw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

print_pset_error(3) -- Prints an error from a processor set function

The print_pset_error() function prints descriptive information about an error returned by a processor set function.

Programmers_Workbench_Library(3) -- Provide functions for compatibility with existing programs

pthread(3) -- Introduction to POSIX Threads

DECthreads, a multithreading run-time library, provides a set of interfaces for building multithreaded programs. The POSIX threads interface provides routines that implement the IEEE Std 1003.1c-1995,...

pthread_atfork(3) -- Declares fork handler routines to be called when the calling thread's process forks a child process

This routine allows a main program or library to control resources during a fork(2) operation by declaring fork handler routines, as follows: The fork handler routine specified in the prepare argument...

pthread_attr_destroy(3) -- Destroys a thread attributes object

This routine destroys a thread attributes object. Call this routine when a thread attributes object will no longer be referenced. Threads that were created using this thread attributes object are not ...

pthread_attr_getdetachstate(3) -- Obtains the detachstate attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the detachstate attribute of a thread attributes object. This attribute specifies whether threads created using the specified thread attributes object are created in a detached st...

pthread_attr_getguardsize(3) -- Obtains the guardsize attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the guardsize attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument and stores it in the location specified by the guardsize argument. The specifie...

pthread_attr_getinheritsched(3) -- Obtains the inherit scheduling attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the inherit scheduling attribute from the specified thread attributes object. The inherit scheduling attribute specifies whether threads created using the attributes ...

pthread_attr_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name attribute in a thread attributes object

This routine copies the object name attribute from the thread attributes object specified by attr to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer...

pthread_attr_getschedparam(3) -- Obtains the scheduling parameters for an attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the scheduling parameters associated with the scheduling policy attribute of the specified thread attributes object.

pthread_attr_getschedpolicy(3) -- Obtains the scheduling policy attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the scheduling policy attribute of the specified thread attributes object. The scheduling policy attribute defines the scheduling policy for threads created using the...

pthread_attr_getscope(3) -- Obtains the contention scope attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the contention scope attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument and stores it in the location specified by the scope argument. The speci...

pthread_attr_getstackaddr(3) -- Obtains the stack address attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the stack address attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument and stores it in the location specified by the stackaddr argument. The spec...

pthread_attr_getstackaddr_np(3) -- Obtains the stack address attribute of the specified thread attributes object

pthread_attr_getstacksize(3) -- Obtains the value of the stacksize attribute in the specified thread attributes object

This routine obtains the stacksize attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument.

pthread_attr_init(3) -- Initializes a thread attributes object

This routine initializes the thread attributes object specified by the attr argument with a set of default attribute values. A thread attributes object is used to specify the attributes of one or more...

pthread_attr_setdetachstate(3) -- Changes the detachstate attribute in the specified thread attributes object

This routine changes the detachstate attribute in the thread attributes object specified by the attr argument. The detachstate attribute specifies whether the thread created using the specified thread...

pthread_attr_setguardsize(3) -- Changes the guardsize attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine uses the value specified in the guardsize argument to set the guardsize attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument. When creating a thread, use a thread attr...

pthread_attr_setinheritsched(3) -- Changes the inherit scheduling attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine changes the inherit scheduling attribute of the thread attributes object specified by the attr argument. The inherit scheduling attribute specifies whether a thread created using the spec...

pthread_attr_setname_np(3) -- Change the object name attribute in a thread attributes object

This routine changes the object name attribute in the thread attributes object specified by attr to the value specified by name. A new thread created using the thread attributes object is initialized ...

pthread_attr_setschedparam(3) -- Changes the values of the parameters associated with a scheduling policy of the specified thread att...

This routine sets the scheduling parameters associated with the scheduling policy attribute of the thread attributes object specified by the attr argument. Use the sched_priority field of a sched_para...

pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(3) -- Changes the scheduling policy attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine sets the scheduling policy of a thread that is created using the attributes object specified by the attr argument. The default value of the scheduling attribute is SCHED_OTHER. By default...

pthread_attr_setscope(3) -- Sets the contention scope attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine uses the value specified in the scope argument to set the contention scope attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument. When creating a thread, use a thread a...

pthread_attr_setstackaddr(3) -- Changes the stack address attribute of the specified thread attributes object

This routine uses the value specified in the stackaddr argument to set the stack address attribute of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument. When creating a thread, use a thread ...

pthread_attr_setstackaddr_np(3) -- Changes the stack address and size of the specified thread attributes object

This routine uses the values specified in the stackaddr and size arguments to set the base stack address and size of the thread attributes object specified in the attr argument. When creating a thread...

pthread_attr_setstacksize(3) -- Changes the stacksize attribute in the specified thread attributes object

This routine sets the stacksize attribute in the thread attributes object specified by the attr argument. Use this routine to adjust the size of the writable area of the stack for a new thread. The si...

pthread_cancel(3) -- Allows a thread to request a thread to terminate execution

This routine sends a cancellation request to the specified target thread. A cancellation request is a mechanism by which a calling thread requests the target thread to terminate as quickly as possible...

pthread_cleanup_pop(3) -- (Macro) Removes the cleanup handler routine from the calling thread's cleanup handler stack and opti...

This routine removes the cleanup handler routine established by the matching call to pthread_cleanup_push(3) from the calling thread's cleanup handler stack, then executes it if the value specified i...

pthread_cleanup_push(3) -- (Macro) Establishes a cleanup handler routine to be executed when the thread exits or is canceled

This routine pushes the specified routine onto the calling thread's cleanup handler stack. The cleanup handler routine is popped from the stack and executed with the arg argument when any of the foll...

pthread_condattr_destroy(3) -- Destroys a condition variable attributes object

This routine destroys the specified condition variable attributes object--that is, the object becomes uninitialized. Condition variables that were created using this attributes object are not affected...

pthread_condattr_getpshared(3) -- Obtain the process-shared attribute of a condition variable attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the process-shared attribute in the condition variable attributes object referenced by attr and stores it at the location pshared. The object referenced by attr must ...

pthread_condattr_init(3) -- Initializes a condition variable attributes object

This routine initializes the condition variable attributes object specified by the (attr) argument with a set of default attribute values. When an attributes object is used to create a condition varia...

pthread_condattr_setpshared(3) -- Change the process-shared attribute of a condition variable attributes object

This routine uses the value specified in the pshared argument to set the process-shared attribute of the condition variable attributes object specified in the attr argument. Creating a condition varia...

pthread_cond_broadcast(3) -- Wakes all threads that are waiting on the specified condition variable

This routine unblocks all threads waiting on the specified condition variable cond. Calling this routine implies that data guarded by the associated mutex has changed, so that it might be possible for...

pthread_cond_destroy(3) -- Destroys a condition variable

This routine destroys the condition variable specified by cond. This effectively uninitializes the condition variable. Call this routine when a condition variable will no longer be referenced. Destroy...

pthread_cond_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name from a condition variable object

This routine copies the object name from the condition variable object specified by cond to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer indicate...

pthread_cond_init(3) -- Initializes a condition variable

This routine initializes the condition variable (cond) with attributes referenced by attr. If attr is NULL, the default condition variable attributes are used. A condition variable is a synchronizatio...

pthread_cond_setname_np(3) -- Changes the object name in a condition variable object

This routine changes the object name in the condition variable object specified by cond to the value specified by name. To set a new condition variable object's object name, call this routine immedia...

pthread_cond_signal(3) -- Wakes at least one thread that is waiting on the specified condition variable

This routine unblocks at least one thread waiting on the specified condition variable cond. Calling this routine implies that data guarded by the associated mutex has changed, thus it might be possibl...

pthread_cond_signal_int_np(3) -- Wakes one thread that is waiting on the specified condition variable (called from interrupt level on...

This routine wakes one thread waiting on the specified condition variable. It can only be called from a software interrupt handler routine (that is, from a Tru64 UNIX signal handler or OpenVMS AST). C...

pthread_cond_sig_preempt_int_np(3) -- Wakes one thread that is waiting on the specified condition variable (called from interrupt level on...

This routine wakes one thread waiting on a condition variable. It can only be called from a software interrupt handler routine. Calling this routine implies that it might be possible for a single wait...

pthread_cond_timedwait(3) -- Causes a thread to wait for the

This routine causes a thread to wait until one of the following occurs: The specified condition variable is signaled or broadcasted. The current system clock time is greater than or equal to the time ...

pthread_cond_wait(3) -- Causes a thread to wait for the specified condition variable to be signaled or broadcasted

This routine causes a thread to wait for the specified condition variable to be signaled or broadcasted. Each condition corresponds to one or more Boolean relations, called a predicate, based on share...

pthread_create(3) -- Creates a thread

This routine creates a thread. A thread is a single, sequential flow of control within a program. It is the active execution of a designated routine, including any nested routine invocations. Successf...

pthread_delay_np(3) -- Delays a thread's execution

This routine causes a thread to delay execution for a specific interval of time. This interval ends at the current time plus the specified interval. The routine will not return before the end of the i...

pthread_detach(3) -- Marks a thread object for deletion

This routine marks the specified thread object to indicate that storage for the corresponding thread can be reclaimed when the thread terminates. This includes storage for the thread argument's retur...

pthread_equal(3) -- Compares one thread identifier to another thread identifier

This routine compares one thread identifier to another thread identifier. If either t1 or t2 are not valid thread identifiers, this routine's behavior is undefined.

pthread_exc_get_status_np(3) -- (Macro) Obtains a systemdefined error status from a DECthreads status exception object

This routine obtains and returns the system-specific status value from the DECthreads status exception object specified in the exception argument. This value must have already been associated with the...

pthread_exc_matches_np(3) -- (Macro) Determines whether two DECthreads exception objects are identical

This routine compares two DECthreads exception objects, taking into consideration whether each is an address exception or status exception. This routine returns either the C language value TRUE or the...

pthread_exc_report_np(3) -- Produces a message that reports what a specified DECthreads status exception object represents

This routine produces a one-line text message on the stderr device (Tru64 UNIX) or SYS$ERROR device (OpenVMS systems) that describes the exception whose exception object is specified in the exception ...

pthread_exc_set_status_np(3) -- (Macro) Imports a systemdefined error status into a DECthreads address exception object

This routine associates a system-specific status value with the specified DECthreads address exception object. This transforms the address exception object into a DECthreads status exception object. T...

pthread_exit(3) -- Terminates the calling thread

This routine terminates the calling thread and makes a status value (value_ptr) available to any thread that calls pthread_join(3) and specifies the terminating thread. Any cleanup handlers that have ...

pthread_getconcurrency(3) -- Obtains the value of the concurrency level global variable for this process

This routine obtains and returns the value of the "concurrency level" global setting for the calling thread's process. Because DECthreads automatically manages the concurrency of all threads in a m...

pthread_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name from the thread object of an existing thread

This routine copies the object name from the thread object specified by thread to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer indicated by name....

pthread_getschedparam(3) -- Obtains the current scheduling policy and scheduling parameters of a thread

This routine obtains both the current scheduling policy and associated scheduling parameters of the thread specified by the thread argument. The priority value returned in the param structure is the v...

pthread_getsequence_np(3) -- Obtains the unique identifier for the specified thread

This routine obtains and returns the DECthreads thread sequence number for the thread identified by the thread object specified in the thread argument. The thread sequence number provides a unique ide...

pthread_getspecific(3) -- Obtains the thread-specific data associated with the specified key

This routine obtains the thread-specific data associated with the specified key for the current thread. Obtain this key by calling the pthread_key_create(3) routine. This routine returns the value cur...

pthread_get_expiration_np(3) -- Obtains a value representing a desired expiration time

This routine adds a specified interval to the current absolute system time and returns a new absolute time. This new absolute time is used as the expiration time in a call to pthread_cond_timedwait(3)...

pthread_intro(3) -- Introduction to POSIX Threads

pthread_join(3) -- Causes the calling thread to wait for the termination of the specified thread

This routine suspends execution of the calling thread until the specified target thread thread terminates. On return from a successful pthread_join(3) call with a non-NULL value_ptr argument, the valu...

pthread_key_create(3) -- Generates a unique thread-specific data key

This routine generates a unique, thread-specific data key that is visible to all threads in the process. The variable key provided by this routine is an opaque object used to locate thread-specific da...

pthread_key_delete(3) -- Deletes a thread-specific data key

This routine deletes the thread-specific data key specified by the key argument, which must have been previously returned by pthread_key_create(3). The thread-specific data values associated with key ...

pthread_key_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name from a

This routine copies the object name from the thread-specific data key object specified by key to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer ind...

pthread_key_setname_np(3) -- Change the object name in a

This routine changes the object name in the thread-specific data key object specified by key to the value specified by name. To set a new thread-specific data key object's object name, call this rout...

pthread_kill(3) -- Delivers a signal to a specified thread. (This routine is available only on a UNIX system.)

This routine sends a signal to the specified target thread thread. Any signal defined to stop, continue, or terminate will stop or terminate the process, even though it can be handled by the thread. F...

pthread_lock_global_np(3) -- Locks the DECthreads global mutex

This routine locks the DECthreads global mutex. If the global mutex is currently held by another thread when a thread calls this routine, the calling thread waits for the global mutex to become availa...

pthread_mutexattr_destroy(3) -- Destroys the specified mutex attributes object

This routine destroys a mutex attributes object--that is, the object becomes uninitialized. Call this routine when your program no longer needs the specified mutex attributes object. After this routin...

pthread_mutexattr_getpshared(3) -- Obtains the process-shared attribute of a mutex attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the process-shared attribute in the mutex attributes object referenced by attr and stores it at the location pshared. The object referenced by attr must be initialize...

pthread_mutexattr_gettype(3) -- Obtains the mutex type attribute in the specified mutex attributes object

This routine obtains the value of the mutex type attribute in the mutex attributes object specified by the attr argument and stores it in the location specified by the type argument. See the pthread_m...

pthread_mutexattr_init(3) -- Initializes a mutex attributes object

This routine initializes the mutex attributes object specified by the attr argument with a set of default values. A mutex attributes object is used to specify the attributes of one or more mutexes whe...

pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(3) -- Sets the process-shared attribute of a mutex attributes object

This routine uses the value in pshared to set the processshared attribute in the mutex attributes object referenced by attr. The object referenced by attr must be initialized before this routine is ca...

pthread_mutexattr_settype(3) -- Specifies the mutex type attribute that is used when a mutex is created

This routine sets the mutex type attribute that is used to determine which type of mutex is created based on a subsequent call to pthread_mutex_init(3).

pthread_mutex_destroy(3) -- Destroys a mutex

This routine destroys the specified mutex by uninitializing it, and should be called when a mutex object is no longer referenced. After this routine is called, DECthreads may reclaim internal storage ...

pthread_mutex_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name from a mutex object

This routine copies the object name from the mutex object specified by mutex to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer indicated by name. T...

pthread_mutex_init(3) -- Initializes a mutex

This routine initializes a mutex with the attributes specified by the mutex attributes object specified in the attr argument. A mutex is a synchronization object that allows multiple threads to serial...

pthread_mutex_lock(3) -- Locks an unlocked mutex

This routine locks a mutex with behavior that depends upon the type of mutex, as follows: If a normal or default mutex is specified, a deadlock can result if the current owner of the mutex calls this ...

pthread_mutex_setname_np(3) -- Changes the object name in a mutex object

This routine changes the object name in the mutex object specified by mutex to the value specified by name. To set a new mutex object's object name, call this routine immediately after initializing t...

pthread_mutex_trylock(3) -- Attempts to lock the specified mutex, without waiting if already locked

This routine attempts to lock the mutex specified in the mutex argument. When a thread calls this routine, an attempt is made to immediately lock the mutex. If the mutex is successfully locked, this r...

pthread_mutex_unlock(3) -- Unlocks the specified mutex

This routine unlocks the mutex specified by the mutex argument. This routine behaves as follows, based on the type of the specified mutex: For a normal, default, or errorcheck mutex: if the mutex is o...

pthread_nsg_attach(3) -- Attaches a thread to a NUMA Scheduling Group (libpthread library)

The pthread_nsg_attach() function attaches the thread specified by the thread argument to a NUMA Scheduling Group (NSG) specified by the nsg argument. An NSG is a set of processes and/or threads that ...

pthread_nsg_detach(3) -- Detaches a thread from a NUMA Scheduling Group (libpthread library)

The pthread_nsg_detach() function detaches the thread specified by the thread argument from the NSG to which it is attached. The function does not reassign the thread to a new NSG.

pthread_nsg_get(3) -- Gets the list of threads in a NUMA Scheduling Group (libpthread library)

The pthread_nsg_get() returns into the buffer pointed to by list an array of nsg_thread structures containing the process ids and thread indexes for all threads attached to the specified NSG. The list...

pthread_once(3) -- Calls a routine to be executed by a single thread, once.

The first call to this routine by any thread in a process with a given once_control will call the specified routine with no arguments. Subsequent calls to pthread_once(3) with the same once_control wi...

pthread_rad_attach(3) -- Attaches or binds a thread to a NUMA Resource Affinity Domain (libpthread library)

The pthread_rad_attach() function attaches the thread specified by the thread argument to the RAD set specified by the radset argument. The pthread_rad_bind() function binds the specified thread to th...

pthread_rad_bind(3) -- Attaches or binds a thread to a NUMA Resource Affinity Domain (libpthread library)

pthread_rad_detach(3) -- Detach a thread from its Resource Affinity Domain (libpthread library)

The pthread_rad_detach() function detaches the thread specified by the thread argument from its current Resource Affinity Domain. The thread is free to be scheduled in any RAD available to the process...

pthread_rwlockattr_destroy(3) -- Destroys a previously initialized

This routine destroys the read-write lock attributes object referenced by attr--that is, the object becomes uninitialized. After successful completion of this routine, the results of using attr in a c...

pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared(3) -- Obtains the process-shared

This routine obtains the value of the process-shared attribute in the read-write lock attributes object referenced by attr and stores it at the location pshared. The object referenced by attr must be ...

pthread_rwlockattr_init(3) -- Initialize a read-write lock attributes object

This routine initializes the read-write lock attributes object referenced by attr and sets its attributes with default values. The results of calling this routine are undefined if attr references an a...

pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(3) -- Sets the process-shared

This routine uses the value in pshared to set the processshared attribute in the read-write lock attributes object referenced by attr. The object referenced by attr must be initialized before this rou...

pthread_rwlock_destroy(3) -- Destroys a read-write lock object

This routine destroys the specified read-write lock object by uninitializing it, and should be called when the object is no longer referenced in your program. After this routine is called, DECthreads ...

pthread_rwlock_getname_np(3) -- Obtain the object name from a

This routine copies the object name from the read-write lock object specified by rwlock to the buffer at the location name. Before calling this routine, your program must allocate the buffer indicated...

pthread_rwlock_init(3) -- Initializes a read-write lock object

This routine initializes a read-write lock object with the attributes specified by the read-write lock attributes object specified in attr. A read-write lock is a synchronization object that serialize...

pthread_rwlock_rdlock(3) -- Acquires a read-write lock for read access

This routine acquires a read-write lock for read access. If no thread already holds the lock for write access and there are no writers waiting to acquire the lock, the lock for read access is granted ...

pthread_rwlock_setname_np(3) -- Changes the object name in a

This routine changes the object name in the read-write lock object specified by rwlock to the value specified by name. To set a new read-write lock object's object name, call this routine immediately...

pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock(3) -- Attempts to acquire a readwrite lock for read access without waiting

This routine attempts to acquire a read-write lock for read access, but does not wait for the lock if it not immediately available. If a thread already holds the lock for read access, the lock is gran...

pthread_rwlock_trywrlock(3) -- Attempts to acquire a readwrite lock for write access without waiting

This routine attempts to acquire the read-write lock referenced by rwlock for write access. If any thread already holds that lock for write access or read access, this routine fails and returns [EBUSY...

pthread_rwlock_unlock(3) -- Unlock a read-write lock

This routine releases a lock acquisition held on the readwrite lock object referenced by rwlock. Results are undefined if rwlock is not held by the calling thread. If this routine is called to release...

pthread_rwlock_wrlock(3) -- Acquires a read-write lock for write access

This routine attempts to acquire a read-write lock for write access. If any thread already has acquired the lock for write access or read access, the lock is not granted and the calling thread blocks ...

pthread_self(3) -- Obtains the identifier of the calling thread

This routine returns the address of the calling thread's own thread identifier. For example, you can use this thread object to obtain the calling thread's own sequence number. To do so, pass the ret...

pthread_setcancelstate(3) -- Sets the calling thread's cancelability state

This routine sets the current thread's cancelability state and returns the calling thread's previous cancelability state in oldstate. When cancelability state is set to PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE, a can...

pthread_setcanceltype(3) -- Sets the current thread's cancelability type

This routine sets the cancelability type and returns the previous type in oldtype. When the cancelability state is set to PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE, (see pthread_setcancelstate), a cancel cannot be deliv...

pthread_setconcurrency(3) -- Changes the value of the concurrency level global variable for this process

This routine stores the value specified in the level argument in the "concurrency level" global setting for the calling thread's process. Because DECthreads automatically manages the concurrency of...

pthread_setname_np(3) -- Changes the object name in the thread object for an existing thread

This routine changes the object name in the thread object specified by thread to the value specified by name. To set an existing thread's object name, call this routine after creating the thread. How...

pthread_setschedparam(3) -- Changes a thread's scheduling policy and scheduling parameters

This routine changes both the current scheduling policy and associated scheduling parameters of the thread specified by thread to the policy and associated parameters provided in policy and param, res...

pthread_setspecific(3) -- Sets the thread-specific data value associated with the specified key for the current thread

This routine sets the thread-specific data value associated with the specified key for the current thread. If a value is defined for the key in this thread (the current value is not NULL), the new val...

pthread_sigmask(3) -- Examine or change the current thread's signal mask

This routine is for UNIX systems only. This routine examines or changes the calling thread's signal mask. Typically, you use the SIG_BLOCK option for the how value to block signals during a critical ...

pthread_testcancel(3) -- Requests delivery of a pending cancellation request to the calling thread

This routine requests delivery of a pending cancellation request to the calling thread. Thus, calling this routine creates a cancellation point within the calling thread. The cancellation request is d...

pthread_unlock_global_np(3) -- Unlocks the DECthreads global mutex

This routine unlocks the DECthreads global mutex. Because the global mutex is recursive, the unlock occurs when each call to pthread_lock_global_np(3) has been matched by a call to this routine. For e...

pthread_use_only_cpu(3) -- Restricts a thread to running only on the specified CPU. If that CPU is unavailable for any reason, ...

This routine restricts thread to cpu_id, preventing the thread from utilizing any other available processor resources even when cpu_id may be busy for an extended time with other work or is otherwise ...

pthread_yield_np(3) -- Notifies the scheduler that the current thread is willing to release its processor to other threads ...

This routine notifies the thread scheduler that the current thread is willing to release its processor to other threads of equivalent or greater scheduling precedence. (A thread generally will release...

ptsname(3) -- Get the name of a slave pseudoterminal device

The ptsname() function returns the name of the slave pseudoterminal device associated with a master pseudoterminal device.

ptsname_r(3) -- Get the name of a slave pseudoterminal device

The ptsname() function returns the name of the slave pseudoterminal device associated with a master pseudoterminal device.

putc(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

putchar(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

putchar_unlocked(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

putc_unlocked(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

putdvagnam(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

putenv(3) -- Sets an environment variable

The putenv() function sets the value of an environment variable by altering an existing variable or by creating a new one. The new environment variable remains in effect even after the program setting...

putesdfnam(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

putesdvnam(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

putesfinam(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

putespwnam(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

putestcnam(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

putlong(3) -- Places long byte quantities into the byte stream

The putlong() function places long byte quantities into the byte stream or arbitrary byte boundaries. The putlong() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resolver, a set of functions t...

putp(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

putprdfnam(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

putprfinam(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

putprpwnam(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

putprtcnam(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

putpwent(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

puts(3) -- Writes a string to a stream

putshort(3) -- Places short byte quantities into the byte stream

The putshort() function puts short byte quantities into the byte stream or arbitrary byte boundaries. The putshort() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resolver, a set of functions ...

pututline(3) -- Access utmp file entries

pututline_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

pututxline(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

putw(3) -- Write a byte or a word to a stream

putwc(3) -- Write a wide character to a stream

putwchar(3) -- Write a wide character to a stream

putwin(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

pw_idtoname(3) -- Map between user and group names and IDs (Enhanced Security)

pw_mapping(3) -- Map between user and group names and IDs (Enhanced Security)

pw_nametoid(3) -- Map between user and group names and IDs (Enhanced Security)

qiflush(3) -- Curses

qsort(3) -- Sort a table in place

The qsort() function sorts a table having a specified number of entries. The contents of the table are sorted in ascending order according to a user-specified comparison function (the strcmp() functio...

QueryKeySizeInBits(3) -- Get CSP logical and effective sizes (CDSA)

QuerySize(3) -- Get size of the output data (CDSA)

radaddset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

The radsetops primitives manipulate a specified set of Resource Affinity Domains (RADs). These functions operate on data objects (of type radset_t) that are created by calls to radsetcreate(). The rad...

radandset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radcopyset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radcountset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

raddelset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

raddiffset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

rademptyset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radfillset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radisemptyset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radismember(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radorset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radsetcreate(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radsetdestroy(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radsetops(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

radxorset(3) -- Perform operations on a set of Resource Affinity Domains (libnuma library)

rad_attach_pid(3) -- Attaches or binds a process to a Resource Affinity Domain by process ID (libnuma library)

The rad_attach_pid() function attaches the process specified by pid to the set of RADs specified by radset. The rad_bind_pid() function binds the process specified by pid to the set of RADs specified ...

rad_bind_pid(3) -- Attaches or binds a process to a Resource Affinity Domain by process ID (libnuma library)

rad_detach_pid(3) -- Detach a process from a Resource Affinity Domain by pid (libnuma library)

The rad_detach_pid() function frees a process that has been bound or attached to a RAD through the functions rad_bind_pid() or rad_attach_pid(), respectively. If the pid argument is NULL, the call is ...

rad_foreach(3) -- Enumerates the members of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma library)

The rad_foreach() function scans the specified RAD set, starting at the position saved in cursor, for members of the set and returns the first member found. If the SET_CURSOR_FIRST flag is set, the cu...

rad_fork(3) -- Creates a new process on a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma library)

The rad_fork() function behaves the same as nfork() when the latter specifies a resource type of R_RAD and a resource descriptor that points to a RAD set containing a single RAD identifier. For a desc...

rad_get_cpus(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

A Resource Affinity Domain (RAD) is a collection of resources that are related by the platform hardware topology. The collection of processors and I/O buses connected to a local memory of a NUMA platf...

rad_get_current_home(3) -- Returns the caller's home Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma library)

The rad_get_current_home() function returns the home Resource Affinity Domain (RAD) of the caller.

rad_get_freemem(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

rad_get_info(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

rad_get_max(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

rad_get_num(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

rad_get_physmem(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

rad_get_state(3) -- Query resource complements of a Resource Affinity Domain (libnuma)

raise(3) -- Send a signal to the executing process or thread

The raise() function sends the signal specified by the signal parameter to the invoking thread. In singlethreaded programs this is equivalent to: kill(getpid(), signal); The behavior of the raise() fu...

rand(3) -- Generate pseudorandom numbers

The rand() function returns successive pseudorandom numbers in the range from 0 (zero) to RAND_MAX. The sequence of values returned depends on the seed value set with the srand() function. If rand() i...

random(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

randomchars(3) -- Generate random passwords (Enhanced Security)

These functions generate random passwords for use in password selection. All of them are generated by the system, based on seeds and set in the function. Such seeds can be created with the drand48(), ...

randomletters(3) -- Generate random passwords (Enhanced Security)

randomword(3) -- Generate random passwords (Enhanced Security)

random_r(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

RAND_add(3) -- Add entropy to the PRNG

The RAND_add() function mixes the num bytes at buf into the PRNG state. Thus, if the data at buf are unpredictable to an adversary, this increases the uncertainty about the state and makes the PRNG ou...

RAND_bytes(3) -- Generate random data

The RAND_bytes() function puts num cryptographically strong pseudo-random bytes into buf. An error occurs if the PRNG has not been seeded with enough randomness to ensure an unpredictable byte sequenc...

RAND_cleanup(3) -- Erase the PRNG state

The RAND_cleanup() function erases the memory used by the PRNG.

RAND_egd(3) -- Query entropy gathering daemon

The RAND_egd() function queries the entropy gathering daemon EGD on socket path. It queries 255 bytes and uses RAND_add() to seed the OpenSSL built-in PRNG. The RAND_egd(path) is a wrapper for RAND_eg...

RAND_event(3) -- Add entropy to the PRNG

RAND_file_name(3) -- PRNG seed file

The RAND_load_file() function reads a number of bytes from file filename and adds them to the PRNG. If max_bytes is non-negative, up to max_bytes are read; starting with OpenSSL 0.9.5, if max_bytes is...

RAND_get_rand_method(3) -- Select RAND method

A RAND_METHOD specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for random number generation. By modifying the method, alternative implementations such as hardware RNGs may be used. Initially, the default is ...

RAND_load_file(3) -- PRNG seed file

RAND_pseudo_bytes(3) -- Generate random data

rand_r(3) -- Generate pseudorandom numbers

RAND_screen(3) -- Add entropy to the PRNG

RAND_seed(3) -- Add entropy to the PRNG

RAND_set_rand_method(3) -- Select RAND method

rand_ssl(3) -- Pseudo-random number generator

These functions implement a cryptographically secure pseudo-random number generator (PRNG). It is used by other library functions, for example, to generate random keys. Applications can use it when th...

RAND_SSLeay(3) -- Select RAND method

RAND_status(3) -- Add entropy to the PRNG

RAND_write_file(3) -- PRNG seed file

ranhash(3) -- access routine for the symbol table definition file in archives

The ranhashinit() routine initializes static information for future use by ranhash() and ranlookup(). The ranhash() routine, given a name, returns a hash number. It uses a multiplicative hashing algor...

ranhashinit(3) -- access routine for the symbol table definition file in archives

ranlookup(3) -- access routine for the symbol table definition file in archives

rapi_dispatch(3) -- Dispatch an Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API event

An application calls the rapi_dispatch() routine whenever a read event is signaled on the file descriptor returned by the rapi_getfd() routine. You can call the rapi_dispatch() routine at any time, bu...

rapi_event_rtn_t(3) -- Execute an Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API upcall routine

An event upcall is invoked by a call to the rapi_dispatch() routine. The upcall executes the procedure whose address was specified by the Event_rtn parameter in the rapi_session() routine.

rapi_fmt_adspec(3) -- Format an RSVP API (RAPI) Adspec

The rapi_fmt_adspec() routine reads a given RAPI Adspec and formats it into a fixed length buffer whose address is specified by buffer and whose size is specified by length. If the buffer size is too ...

rapi_fmt_filtspec(3) -- Format an RSVP API (RAPI) filter spec

The rapi_fmt_filtspec() routine reads a given RAPI filter spec and formats it into a fixed length buffer whose address is specified by buffer and whose size is specified by length. If the buffer size ...

rapi_fmt_flowspec(3) -- Format an RSVP API (RAPI) flowspec

The rapi_fmt_flowspec() routine reads a given RAPI flowspec and formats it into a fixed length buffer whose address is specified by buffer and whose size is specified by length. If the buffer size is ...

rapi_fmt_tspec(3) -- Format an RSVP tspec

The rapi_fmt_tspec() routine reads a given RSVP API (RAPI) Tspec and formats it into a fixed length buffer whose address is specified by buffer and whose size is specified by length. If the buffer siz...

rapi_getfd(3) -- Get the file descriptor for the Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) daemon's socket

The rapi_getfd() routine obtains the file descriptor associated with the UNIX socket connected to the RSVP daemon, rsvpd. An application typically calls this routine after a call to the rapi_session()...

rapi_release(3) -- Remove a Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API session

The rapi_release() routine removes any reservations and the state corresponding to a given session handle. If an application terminates without terminating its RSVP API sessions, the rapi_release() ro...

rapi_reserve(3) -- Make, modify, or delete a Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) session reservation

The rapi_reserve() routine makes, modifies, or deletes a resource reservation for an RSVP session. Applications can call this routine in repeatedly, with different parameters, to modify or remove rese...

rapi_sender(3) -- Specify Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API sender parameters

The rapi_sender() routine defines, redefines, or deletes the parameters for a flow of data it intends to send and for which receivers can make reservations. An application can call this routine more t...

rapi_session(3) -- Create an Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API session

The rapi_session() routine creates an RSVP API session. If the call to rapi_session() succeeds, the application might receive upcalls of type RAPI_PATH_EVENT for the API session.

rapi_strerror(3) -- Get a RAPI error message string

The rapi_strerror() routine maps an error code and value to an error message string, and returns a pointer to that error message string.

rapi_version(3) -- Obtain the current Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) API version

The rapi_version() routine obtains the version number of the Resource ReSerVation Protocol API (RAPI) interface. An application can call this routine if it needs to know the specific version of the RA...

raw(3) -- Curses

rc4(3) -- RC4 encryption

This library implements the Alleged RC4 cipher, which is described in Applied Cryptography. It is believed to be compatible with RC4, a proprietary cipher of RSA Security Inc. R...

RC4(3) -- RC4 encryption

This library implements the Alleged RC4 cipher, which is described in Applied Cryptography. It is believed to be compatible with RC4, a proprietary cipher of RSA Security Inc. R...

RC4_set_key(3) -- RC4 encryption

This library implements the Alleged RC4 cipher, which is described in Applied Cryptography. It is believed to be compatible with RC4, a proprietary cipher of RSA Security Inc. R...

rcmd(3) -- Allow execution of commands on a remote host

The rcmd() (remote command) function allows execution of certain commands on a remote host. For example, the rcmd() function is used by rsh and rlogin, among others. The rcmd() function looks up a hos...

rcmd_r(3) -- Allow execution of commands on a remote host

readdir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

readdir_r(3) -- Perform operations on directories

read_rnd(3) -- sets and returns IEEE dynamic rounding

The write_rnd() function sets the dynamic rounding mode in the floating-point control register (fpcr) for IEEE floating-point operations and returns the previous dynamic rounding mode. Dynamic roundin...

realloc(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

realpath(3) -- Resolve pathname

The realpath() function derives, from the file pointed to by file_name, an absolute pathname that names the same file, whose resolution does not involve ".", "..", or symbolic links. The generated...

recno(3) -- record number database access method

The routine dbopen() is the library interface to database files. One of the supported file formats is record number (recno) files. The general description of the database access methods is in dbopen(3...

RectObj(3X) -- The RectObj widget class

RectObj is never instantiated. Its sole purpose is as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. Classes [Toc] [Back] RectObj inherits behavior and a resource from Object. The class point...

redrawwin(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

refresh(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

RefreshFunctionTable(3) -- Gets EMM-defined API function (CDSA)

CSSM invokes this function to obtain the EMM-defined API function. The table is returned to CSSM in FuncNameAddrPtr and CSSM returns the table to the application. The application uses this table to in...

regcmp(3) -- Compile and execute regular expression

The regcmp() function compiles a regular expression consisting of the concatenated arguments and returns a pointer to the compiled form. The end of arguments is indicated by a null pointer. The malloc...

regcomp(3) -- Compare string to regular expression

The regcomp(), regerror(), regexec(), and regfree() functions perform regular expression matching. The regcomp() function compiles a regular expression and the regexec() function compares the compiled...

regerror(3) -- Compare string to regular expression

regex(3) -- Compile and execute regular expression

regexec(3) -- Compare string to regular expression

regexp(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

regfree(3) -- Compare string to regular expression

RegisterDispatchTable(3) -- Provide the EMM with CSSM function pointers (CDSA)

This EMM-defined function is invoked by CSSM once for each CSSM_ModuleAttach(), operation requesting a service provider of the type managed by the EMM. CSSM uses this function to provide the EMM with ...

registerrpc(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

reltimer(3) -- Establishe timeout intervals of a per-process timer

The reltimer() function establishes initial and offset timeout intervals of a per-process timer specified by the tmrid parameter. Initial and offset timeout interval information is stored in an itimer...

remainder(3) -- Compute the floating-point remainder

remove(3) -- Remove a file

The remove() function causes a file named by the pathname pointed to by path to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that name will fail unless it is crea...

remque(3) -- Insert or removes an element in a queue

reset_prog_mode(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

reset_shell_mode(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

restartterm(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

res_init(3) -- Search for a default domain name and Internet address

The res_init() function reads the /etc/resolv.conf file for the default domain name and the Internet address of the initial hosts running the name server, even if the name server is not functioning. T...

res_mkquery(3) -- Make query messages for name servers

The res_mkquery() function makes packets for name servers in the Internet domain. The res_mkquery() function makes a standard query message and places it in the location pointed to by the buffer param...

res_query(3) -- Query a domain server and check the response

The res_search() and res_query() functions construct a query, send it to the local server, and await a response. In addition, res_search() implements the default and search rules specified by the RES_...

res_search(3) -- Query a domain server and check the response

res_send(3) -- Send a query to a name server and retrieve a response

The res_send() function sends a query to name servers and calls the res_init() function if the RES_INIT option of the _resdata structure is not set. This function sends the query to the local name ser...

RetrieveCounter(3) -- Get the value of a tamper resistant clock (CDSA)

This function returns the value of a tamper resistant clock/counter of the cryptographic device.

RetrieveUniqueId(3) -- Get identifier (CDSA)

This function returns an identifier that could be used to uniquely differentiate the cryptographic device from all other devices from the same vendor or different vendors.

rewind(3) -- Reposition the file pointer of a stream

rewinddir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

rexec(3) -- Allow command execution on a remote host

The rexec() (remote execution) function allows the calling process to execute commands on a remote host. If the rexec() connection succeeds, a socket in the Internet domain of type SOCK_STREAM is retu...

rexec_r(3) -- Allow command execution on a remote host

re_comp(3) -- Handle regular expressions

The re_comp() function converts a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching. The re_exec() function compares the string pointed to by the string parameter with the last string passed ...

re_exec(3) -- Handle regular expressions

rindex(3) -- Search for character in string

rint(3) -- Round floatingpoint

RIPEMD160(3) -- RIPEMD-160 hash function

RIPEMD-160 is a cryptographic hash function with a 160 bit output. The RIPEMD160() function computes the RIPEMD-160 message digest of the n bytes at d and places it in md (which must have space for RI...

RIPEMD160_Final(3) -- RIPEMD-160 hash function

RIPEMD160_Init(3) -- RIPEMD-160 hash function

RIPEMD160_Update(3) -- RIPEMD-160 hash function

ripoffline(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

rmtimer(3) -- Free a per-process timer

The rmtimer() function is used to free a previously allocated per-process timer (previously returned by the mktimer() function). Any pending per-process timer event generated by the timer specified by...

rpc(3) -- library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

rpc_clnt(3) -- library routines for client ONC remote procedure calls

rpc_createrr(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

rpc_functions(3) -- library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

rpc_misc(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

rpc_svc(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

rpc_xdr(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

rpmatch(3) -- Determine whether a response is affirmative or negative

The rpmatch() function determines whether the string value of the response parameter matches the affirmative or negative response expression as specified by the LC_MESSAGES category in the program's ...

rpow(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

rresvport(3) -- Retrieve a socket with a privileged address

The rresvport() function obtains a socket with a privileged address bound to the socket. A privileged Internet port is one that falls in the range of 0 to 1023. Only processes with an effective user I...

rresvport_af(3) -- Retrieve a socket with a privileged address

The rresvport_af() function obtains a socket with a privileged address bound to the socket. A privileged Internet port is one that falls in the range of 0 to 1023. Only processes with an effective use...

rsa(3) -- RSA public key cryptosystem

These functions implement RSA public key encryption and signatures as defined in PKCS #1 v2.0 [RFC 2437]. The RSA structure consists of several BIGNUM components. It can contain public as well as priv...

RSA_blinding_off(3) -- Protect the RSA operation from timing attacks

RSA is vulnerable to timing attacks. In a setup where attackers can measure the time of RSA decryption or signature operations, blinding must be used to protect the RSA operation from that attack. The...

RSA_blinding_on(3) -- Protect the RSA operation from timing attacks

RSA_check_key(3) -- Validate private RSA keys

This function validates RSA keys. It checks that p and q are prime, and that n = p*q. It also checks that d*e = 1 mod (p-1*q-1), and that dmp1, dmq1 and iqmp are set correctly or are NULL. As such, th...

RSA_flags(3) -- Select RSA method

An RSA_METHOD specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for RSA operations. By modifying the method, alternative implementations such as hardware accelerators can be used. Initially, the default is to...

RSA_free(3) -- Allocate and free RSA objects

The RSA_new() function allocates and initializes an RSA structure. The RSA_free() function frees the RSA structure and its components. The key is erased before the memory is returned to the system.

RSA_generate_key(3) -- Generate RSA key pair

The RSA_generate_key() function generates a key pair and returns it in a newly allocated RSA structure. The pseudorandom number generator must be seeded prior to calling RSA_generate_key(). The modulu...

RSA_get_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_get_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to RSA structures

Several OpenSSL structures can have application specific data attached to them. This has several potential uses, it can be used to cache data associated with a structure (for example the hash of some ...

RSA_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Add application specific data to RSA structures

RSA_get_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_new(3) -- Allocate and free RSA objects

The RSA_new() function allocates and initializes an RSA structure. The RSA_free() function frees the RSA structure and its components. The key is erased before the memory is returned to the system.

RSA_new_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_null_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_padding_add_none(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

The RSA_padding_xxx_xxx() functions are called from the RSA encrypt, decrypt, sign and verify functions. Normally they should not be called from application programs. However, they can also be called ...

RSA_padding_add_PKCS1_OAEP(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_add_PKCS1_type_1(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_add_PKCS1_type_2(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_add_SSLv23(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_check_none(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_check_PKCS1_OAEP(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_check_PKCS1_type_1(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_check_PKCS1_type_2(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_padding_check_SSLv23(3) -- Asymmetric encryption padding

RSA_PKCS1_RSAref(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_PKCS1_SSLeay(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_print(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

RSA_print_fp(3) -- Print cryptographic parameters

A human-readable hexadecimal output of the components of the RSA key, DSA parameters or key or DH parameters is printed to bp or fp. The output lines are indented by offset spaces.

RSA_private_decrypt(3) -- RSA public key cryptography

The RSA_public_encrypt() function encrypts the flen bytes at from (usually a session key) using the public key rsa and stores the ciphertext in to. The to must point to RSA_size(rsa) bytes of memory. ...

RSA_private_encrypt(3) -- Low level signature operations

These functions handle RSA signatures at a low level. The RSA_private_encrypt() function signs the flen bytes at from (usually a message digest with an algorithm identifier) using the private key rsa ...

RSA_public_decrypt(3) -- Low level signature operations

RSA_public_encrypt(3) -- RSA public key cryptography

RSA_set_default_openssl_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_set_ex_data(3) -- Add application specific data to RSA structures

RSA_set_method(3) -- Select RSA method

RSA_sign(3) -- RSA signatures

The RSA_sign() function signs the message digest m of size m_len using the private key rsa as specified in PKCS #1 v2.0. It stores the signature in sigret and the signature size in siglen. The sigret ...

RSA_sign_ASN1_OCTET_STRING(3) -- RSA signatures

The RSA_sign_ASN1_OCTET_STRING() function signs the octet string m of size m_len using the private key rsa represented in DER using PKCS #1 padding. It stores the signature in sigret and the signature...

RSA_size(3) -- Get RSA modulus size

This function returns the RSA modulus size in bytes. It can be used to determine how much memory must be allocated for an RSA encrypted value. The rsa->n must not be NULL.

RSA_verify(3) -- RSA signatures

RSA_verify_ASN1_OCTET_STRING(3) -- RSA signatures

rtime(3) -- Get remote time

The rtime() function consults the Internet Time Server at the address pointed to by addrp and returns the remote time in the timeval struct pointed to by timep. Normally, the UDP protocol is used when...

RtlUnwindRfp(3) -- entry points that support resuming execution of user code

RtlVirtualUnwind(3) -- routines to unwind a context

ruserok(3) -- Allow servers to authenticate clients

The ruserok() (remote command user OK) function allows servers to authenticate clients requesting services. The hostname must be specified. If the local domain and remote domain are the same, specifyi...

safe_open(3) -- Open a file for I/O with comprehensive or customized security checks

The safe_open() function attempts to open the file system object identified by its pathname parameter and makes validity checks, as controlled by the oflags and sflags parameters. The validity checkin...

savetty(3) -- Low-level Curses routines

scalb(3) -- Manipulate floating-point numbers

scandir(3) -- Scan or sorts directory contents

scanf(3) -- Convert formatted input

scanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

sched_getparam(3) -- Returns the scheduling parameters of the specified process (P1003.1b)

The sched_getparam function returns the scheduling parameters of a process. If the pid is zero, the scheduling parameters are returned for the calling process. Use the sched_setparam function to chang...

sched_getscheduler(3) -- Returns the scheduling policy of a process (P1003.1b)

The sched_getscheduler function returns the current scheduling policy of a process. The values that can be returned are defined in the header file . The sched_setscheduler function changes th...

sched_get_priority_max(3) -- Returns the maximum or minimum priority for the specified scheduling policy (P1003.1b)

The sched_get_priority_max and sched_get_priority_min functions return the maximum or minimum priority for the specified scheduling policy. The value of the policy argument must be one of the scheduli...

sched_get_priority_min(3) -- Returns the maximum or minimum priority for the specified scheduling policy (P1003.1b)

sched_rr_get_interval(3) -- Returns the current quantum for process execution under the SCHED_RR policy (P1003.1b)

The sched_rr_get_interval function updates the timespec structure referenced by the interval argument to contain the current quantum for the process executing under the SCHED_RR policy. If a process r...

sched_setparam(3) -- Sets the scheduling parameters of the specified process (P1003.1b)

The sched_setparam function changes the scheduling parameters of a process. Setting priorities such that the most critical process has the highest priority allows applications to determine more effect...

sched_setscheduler(3) -- Sets the scheduling policy and scheduling parameters of the specified process (P1003.1b)

The sched_setscheduler function changes the scheduling policy and priority of a process. Changing the scheduling policy and priority ensures that an application can determine more effectively when a p...

sched_yield(3) -- Signals scheduler a willingness to yield to another thread

This routine forces the running thread to relinquish the processor until it again becomes the head of its thread list. This routine notifies the thread scheduler that the current thread is willing to ...

scrl(3) -- Scroll a Curses window

scroll(3) -- Scroll a Curses window

scrollok(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

scr_dump(3) -- Read or write a Curses screen from or to a file

scr_init(3) -- Read or write a Curses screen from or to a file

scr_restore(3) -- Read or write a Curses screen from or to a file

scr_set(3) -- Read or write a Curses screen from or to a file

sdiv(3) -- Perform multiple precision integer arithmetic

seed48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

seed48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

seekdir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

sem_close(3) -- Deallocates the specified named semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_close function makes a semaphore available for reuse by deallocating any system resources allocated for use by the current process for the named semaphore indicated by sem. If the semaphore ha...

sem_destroy(3) -- Destroys an unnamed semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_destroy function destroys an unnamed semaphore indicated by sem. Only a semaphore created using sem_init may be destroyed using sem_destroy. The potential for deadlock exists if a process call...

sem_getvalue(3) -- Gets the value of a specified semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_getvalue function updates a location referenced by the sval argument with the value of semaphore sem. The updated value represents an actual semaphore value that occurred during the call, but ...

sem_init(3) -- Initializes an unnamed semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_init() function creates a new counting semaphore with a specific value. A semaphore is used to limit access to a critical resource. When a process requires access to the resource without inter...

sem_open(3) -- Opens/creates a named semaphore for use by a process (P1003.1b)

Use the sem_open function to establish the connection between a named semaphore and a process. Subsequently, the calling process can reference the semaphore by using the address returned from the call...

sem_post(3) -- Unlocks a semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_post function unlocks the specified semaphore by performing the semaphore unlock operation on that semaphore. The appropriate function (sem_open for named semaphores or sem_init for unnamed se...

sem_trywait(3) -- Performs (or conditionally performs) a semaphore lock (P1003.1b)

The sem_wait function locks the semaphore referenced by sem by performing a semaphore lock operation on it. If the semaphore value is zero, the sem_wait function blocks until it either locks the semap...

sem_unlink(3) -- Removes the specified named semaphore (P1003.1b)

The sem_unlink function removes a semaphore named by the string name. If the semaphore is referenced by other processes, sem_unlink does not change the state of the semaphore. If other processes have ...

sem_wait(3) -- Performs (or conditionally performs) a semaphore lock (P1003.1b)

setbuf(3) -- Assign buffering to a stream

The setbuf() function causes the character array pointed to by the buffer parameter to be used instead of an automatically allocated buffer. Use the setbuf() function after a stream has been opened bu...

setbuffer(3) -- Assign buffering to a stream

setcchar(3) -- Get a wide character string and rendition from a cchar_t or set a cchar_t from a wide-character stri...

setclock(3) -- Set value of system-wide clock

The setclock() function sets a time value into the systemwide clock whose symbolic name is specified by the clktyp parameter, which must be TIMEOFDAY, defined in the sys/timers.h header file. The sour...

setdvagent(3) -- Manipulate device assignment database entry (Enhanced Security)

setegid(3) -- Set the process's group IDs

The setegid() function sets the process's effective group ID to the value of the egid parameter if the egid parameter is equal to the current real, effective, or saved group ID. The setrgid() functio...

seteuid(3) -- Set the process's user IDs

The setruid() and seteuid() functions reset the process's real and effective user IDs, respectively. A process with the superuser privilege can set either ID to any value. An unprivileged process can...

setfsent(3) -- Get information about a file system

setfsent_r(3) -- Get information about a file system

setgrent(3) -- Access group information in the user database

setgrent_r(3) -- Access group information in the user database

sethostent(3) -- Open a network host file

sethostent_r(3) -- Open a network host file

setjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

setkey(3) -- DES encryption

setlinebuf(3) -- Assign buffering to a stream

setlocale(3) -- Change or queries the program's current locale

The setlocale() function sets or queries the appropriate portion of the program's locale as specified by the category and locale parameters. The LC_ALL value for the category parameter names the enti...

setlogmask(3) -- Control system log

setlogmask_r(3) -- Control system log

setluid(3) -- Get or set the login UID (Enhanced Security)

setnetent(3) -- Open, rewind, or close the networks file

setnetent_r(3) -- Open, rewind, or close the networks file

setnetgrent(3) -- Get network group entry

setprdfent(3) -- Manipulate system default database entry (Enhanced Security)

setprfient(3) -- Manipulate file control database entry (Enhanced Security)

setproplist(3) -- assigns Extended File Attributes to a file

setprotoent(3) -- Open or rewind the protocols file

The setprotoent() (set protocol entry) function opens either the local /etc/protocols file or the NIS distributed protocols file and sets the file marker to the beginning of the file. To determine whi...

setprotoent_r(3) -- Open or rewind the protocols file

setprpwent(3) -- Manipulate protected password database entry (Enhanced Security)

setprtcent(3) -- Manipulate terminal control database entry (Enhanced Security)

setpwent(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

setpwent_r(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

setpwfile(3) -- Access user attribute information in the user database

setrgid(3) -- Set the process's group IDs

setrpcent(3) -- get rpc entry

setruid(3) -- Set the process's user IDs

setscrreg(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

setservent(3) -- Open or rewind the services file

The setservent() (set service entry) function opens either the local /etc/services file or the NIS distributed services file, and sets the file marker at the beginning of the file. To determine which ...

setservent_r(3) -- Open or rewind the services file

setstate(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

setstate_r(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

setttyent(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

setttyent_r(3) -- Get a /etc/securettys file entry

setupterm(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

setusershell(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

setusershell_r(3) -- Get the names of legal user shells

setutent(3) -- Access utmp file entries

setutent_r(3) -- Access utmp file entries

setutxent(3) -- Access user accounting database functions

setvbuf(3) -- Assign buffering to a stream

setvbuf_unlocked(3) -- Assign buffering to a stream

set_auth_parameters(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

set_curterm(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

set_term(3) -- Curses routines for screen initialization and manipulation

set_unhandled_exception(3) -- support routines for unhandled exceptions

set_usage(3) -- checks whether a disk partition is in use and sets the fstype of the partition in the disk label

The set_usage() function checks whether the special device file is in use, that is, whether it contains a valid file system, is part of LSM, or is being used by a database or for swap space. It also c...

sha(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) is a cryptographic hash function with a 160-bit output. The SHA1() function computes the SHA-1 message digest of the n bytes at d and places it in md (which must have spa...

SHA(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA1(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA1_Final(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA1_Init(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA1_Update(3) -- Secure Hash Algorithm

Shell(3X) -- The Shell widget class

Shell is a top-level widget (with only one managed child) that encapsulates the interaction with the window manager. At the time the shell's child is managed, the child's width is used for both widg...

shm_open(3) -- Opens a shared memory object, creating the object if necessary (P1003.1b)

The shm_open function establishes a connection between a shared memory object and a file descriptor. It creates an open file descriptor that refers to the shared memory object and a file descriptor th...

shm_unlink(3) -- Removes a shared memory object created by a call to the shm_open function (P1003.1b)

The shm_unlink function removes the name of the shared memory object pointed to by name. If this file descriptor is used by other functions, all references to the shared memory object are removed, but...

siad_chg_finger(3) -- Dependent SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_chg_finger() This routine is called by sia_chg_finger() to accomplish processing associated with the chfn command with respect to a specific security mechanism. Only one siad_chg_finger() routine...

siad_chg_password(3) -- Dependent SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_chg_shell(3) -- Dependent SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_chk_invoker(3) -- check invoker dependent routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_chk_invoker() The siad_chk_invoker() routine is called to verify that the calling program is sufficiently privileged to perform security checks or security information updates. Usually only the l...

siad_chk_user(3) -- check user dependent routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_chk_user() This routine is called by the SIA change information interfaces to determine if a particular mechanism can change the specified users password, finger, or shell.

siad_endgrent(3) -- group routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getgrent() The siad_getgrent() routine is called indirectly (by the sia_switch() function) from the sia_getgroup() routine which is called from the libc and libc_r routines getgrent() and getgren...

siad_endpwent(3) -- password routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

This series of mechanism dependent routines is used access the corresponding getpw* series of calls. The actual result string is placed in the buffer provided and result points to the resultant struct...

siad_getgrent(3) -- group routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getgrgid(3) -- group routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getgrnam(3) -- group routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getpwent(3) -- password routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getpwnam(3) -- password routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_getpwuid(3) -- password routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_get_groups(3) -- mechanism-specific routine called from sia_get_groups to fill in a user's supplementary groups for S...

This routine is responsible for ensuring that any group it adds to the list of GIDs found is not a duplicate. __sia_isagroup(3) is provided specifically to make that determination simpler for the mech...

siad_init(3) -- initialization routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The siad_init() routine is called from siainit() to do mechanism-specific processing once per reboot.

siad_ses_authent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_init() This routine is called by sia_ses_init() to initialize a session with respect to a mechanism. This call is used to check resources and subsystems associated with a security mechanism. ...

siad_ses_estab(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_init(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_launch(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_reauthent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_release(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_ses_suauthent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_setgrent(3) -- group routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_setpwent(3) -- password routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

siad_test_newpass(3) -- test passphrase against rules and policy routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The siad_test_newpass() routine tests and compares the string at *newpass against the passphrase rules and policy for the mechanism. This routine is called from the sia_chg_password() routine when it ...

siad_update_pass(3) -- store new passphrase routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The siad_update_pass() routine stores the new password in the mechanism's user database. An entity must have been set up and the siad_chk_user() routine must have been able to handle the CHGENTITY fl...

sia_audit(3) -- Variable format interface for audgen - SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_audit() routine is an interface for the audgen system call. It accepts a variable number of arguments describing the event and audit data, then calls with the appropriate parameters to generat...

sia_become_user(3) -- su routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

This routine allows a privileged process to establish the full set of credentials for a specified user, for whichever system security mechanisms are in use. This is specifically intended for daemons l...

sia_chdir(3) -- Interface to the chdir system call - SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_chdir() routine implements a "NFS-safe" way to change the current working directory. This routine calls the chdir() system call which is protected by alarm() and signal-handling for SIGALRM,...

sia_chg_finger(3) -- SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_chg_finger() The sia_chg_finger() routine is used to change information about users in the /etc/passwd file. This information is used by the finger program, among others. The user is offered a men...

sia_chg_password(3) -- SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_chg_shell(3) -- SIA change routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_chk_invoker(3) -- Check invoker routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_chk_invoker() routine checks the calling application for appropriate privileges, typically root, for accessing and changing security sensitive information.

sia_collect_trm(3) -- Parameter collection routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_collect_trm() routine provides parameter collection capability. The SIA session interfaces and change secure information interfaces use a pre-defined parameter collection capability. The calli...

sia_getgroup(3) -- interface to the getpw* and getgr* routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_getpasswd() routine provides thread locking for the libc_r routines (-D_THREAD_SAFE), provides static storage for non reentrant getpw* routines, and calls the appropriate siad_getpw* routine. ...

sia_getpasswd(3) -- interface to the getpw* and getgr* routines for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_get_groups(3) -- retrieve user's group information for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_get_groups() routine is called to obtain a user's group array.

sia_init(3) -- initialization routine for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_init() routine is called by every sia_* routine to initialize the SIA configuration. This routine indirectly sets up the matrix of switches used to drive the SIA interfaces.

sia_log(3) -- Log events and errors - SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_log() routine logs events and error messages into the sialog file. Each entry is time and PID stamped to track when and who was making the log entry. The sia_log() routine appends to an existi...

sia_make_entity_pwd(3) -- Make entity password - SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_make_entity_pwd() routine fills in the pwd field of the entity structure, using malloc() to ensure that the copied data is not overwritten by subsequent calls to getpwent().

sia_ses_authent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_init() The sia_ses_init() routine initializes SIA sessions. The routine allocates an entity handle structure and initializes various values in that structure. It must be called before any of t...

sia_ses_estab(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_init(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_launch(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_reauthent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_release(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_ses_suauthent(3) -- SIA session routines (Security Integration Architecture)

sia_timed_action(3) -- Time limit routine - SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_timed_action() routine provides a way to call a function with a time limit and signal protection. If SIGHUP, SIGINT, SIGQUIT, SIGTERM, or SIGALRM is received, sia_timed_action() fails.

sia_validate_user(3) -- perform password validation for SIA (Security Integration Architecture)

The sia_validate_user() routine performs password validation by calling sia_ses_init(), sia_ses_reauthent(), and sia_ses_release().

sigaddset(3) -- Create and manipulates signal masks

The sigemptyset(),sigfillset(),sigaddset()sigdelset() and sigismember() functions manipulate sets of signals. These functions operate on data objects that can be addressed by the application, not on a...

sigdelset(3) -- Create and manipulates signal masks

sigemptyset(3) -- Create and manipulates signal masks

sigfillset(3) -- Create and manipulates signal masks

sighold(3) -- Compatibility interfaces for signal management

The sigset(), sighold(), sigrelse(), and sigignore() functions provide simplified signal management. The sigset() function is used to modify signal dispositions. The value of the function parameter de...

sigignore(3) -- Compatibility interfaces for signal management

siginterrupt(3) -- Allow signals to interrupt functions

The siginterrupt() function is used to change the restart behavior of a system call when it is interrupted by the signal specified by the sig parameter. When the flag parameter is FALSE (0), system ca...

sigismember(3) -- Create and manipulates signal masks

siglongjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

The sigsetjmp() and siglongjmp() functions are useful when handling errors and interrupts encountered in low-level functions of a program. The sigsetjmp() function saves the current stack context in t...

SignData(3) -- Sign all buffer data (CDSA)

SignDataFinal(3) -- Complete the final stage of the sign data (CDSA)

This function completes the final stage of the sign data function.

SignDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged sign data (CDSA)

SignDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged signing process input buffer data (CDSA)

This function continues the staged signing process over all data contained in the set of input buffers. Signing is performed using the private key specified in the context.

sigpause(3) -- Provide a compatibility interface to the sigsuspend function

The sigpause() function call blocks the signals specified by the signal_mask parameter and then suspends execution of the process until delivery of a signal whose action is either to execute a signal-...

sigqueue(3) -- Queues a signal and data to a running process

The sigqueue function causes the signal specified by signo to be sent with the value specified by value to the process specified by pid. The conditions required for a process to have permission to que...

sigrelse(3) -- Compatibility interfaces for signal management

sigset(3) -- Compatibility interfaces for signal management

sigsetjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

sigtimedwait(3) -- Suspend a calling thread until a signal arrives

The sigwait functions suspend the calling thread until at least one of the signals in the set parameter is in the caller's set of pending signals. When this happens, one of those signals is automatic...

sigwait(3) -- Suspend a calling thread until a signal arrives

sigwaitinfo(3) -- Suspend a calling thread until a signal arrives

sin(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

sind(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

sinh(3) -- Hyperbolic functions

sizeof_proplist_entry(3) -- determines space necessary to store an Extended File Attribute

The sizeof_proplist_entry() function determines the minimum size of the Extended File Attribute buffer required to store an Extended File Attribute, specified by the *name and value_size parameters. A...

sleep(3) -- Suspend execution for an interval of time

The sleep() function suspends execution of a process for the interval specified by the seconds parameter. The suspension time may be longer than requested due to the scheduling of other activity by th...

slk_attroff(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_attron(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_attrset(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_attr_off(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_attr_on(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_attr_set(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_clear(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_color(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_init(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_label(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_noutrefresh(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_refresh(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_restore(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_set(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_touch(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

slk_wset(3) -- Curses soft-label routines

snprintf(3) -- Print formatted output

sockatmark(3) -- Test whether a socket is at the out-of-band mark

The sockatmark() function enables applications to determine which received data precede the out-of-band data and which data follow the out-of-band data. The function uses the file descriptor for the s...

sprintf(3) -- Print formatted output

sqrt(3) -- Square and cube root functions

srand(3) -- Generate pseudorandom numbers

srand48(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

srand48_r(3) -- Generate uniformly distributed pseudorandom number sequences

srandom(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

srandom_r(3) -- Generate pseudo-random number

sscanf(3) -- Convert formatted input

ssignal(3) -- Set and raise a software signal

ssignal_r(3) -- Set and raise a software signal

ssl(3) -- OpenSSL SSL/TLS library

The OpenSSL ssl library implements the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) protocols. It provides a rich API which is documented here. At first, the library must be ...

SSL(3) -- OpenSSL SSL/TLS library

SSLeay(3) -- Get OpenSSL version number

SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms(3) -- Initialize SSL library by registering algorithms

SSLeay_version(3) -- Get OpenSSL version number

SSL_accept(3) -- Wait for a TLS/SSL client to initiate a TLS/SSL handshake

The SSL_accept() function waits for a TLS/SSL client to initiate the TLS/SSL handshake. The communication channel must already have been set and assigned to the ssl by setting an underlying BIO.

SSL_add_client_CA(3) -- Set list of CAs sent to the client when requesting a client certificate

The SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list() function sets the list of CAs sent to the client when requesting a client certificate for ctx. The SSL_set_client_CA_list() function sets the list of CAs sent to the c...

SSL_add_session(3) -- Manipulate session cache

The SSL_CTX_add_session() function adds the session c to the context ctx. The reference count for session c is incremented by 1. If a session with the same session id already exists, the old session i...

SSL_alert_desc_string(3) -- Get description of an SSL alert

The SSL_alert_desc_string() returns two-letter strings indicating SSL alerts. The SSL_alert_desc_string_long() returns message strings about SSL alerts.

SSL_alert_desc_string_long(3) -- Get description of an SSL alert

The SSL_alert_desc_string() returns two-letter strings indicating SSL alerts. The SSL_alert_desc_string_long() returns message strings about SSL alerts.

SSL_alert_type_string(3) -- Get textual description of alert information

The SSL_alert_type_string() function returns a one letter string indicating the type of the alert specified by value. The SSL_alert_type_string_long() function returns a string indicating the type of ...

SSL_alert_type_string_long(3) -- Get textual description of alert information

SSL_callback_ctrl(3) -- Perform an operation (get or set information in SSL) for the SSL structure

The SSL_ctrl() function performs an operation (get or set information in SSL) for the SSL structure. The second argument cmd accepts the macros in the following table: Table 1: Macros for cmd"" ----...

SSL_check_private_key(3) -- Checks the private key against the public key of the certificate in the SSL structure

The SSL_check_private_key() function checks if the private key matches against the public key of the certificate loaded in the SSL structure.

SSL_CIPHER_description(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER properties

The SSL_CIPHER_get_name() function returns a pointer to the name of cipher. If the argument is the NULL pointer, a pointer to the constant value NONE is returned. The SSL_CIPHER_get_bits() function re...

SSL_CIPHER_get_bits(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER properties

SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER properties

SSL_CIPHER_get_version(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER properties

SSL_clear(3) -- Reset SSL object to allow another connection

Reset ssl to allow another connection. All settings (method, ciphers, BIOs) are kept.

SSL_COMP_add_compression_method(3) -- Handle SSL/TLS integrated compression methods

The SSL_COMP_add_compression_method() function adds the compression method cm with the identifier id to the list of available compression methods. This list is globally maintained for all SSL operatio...

SSL_connect(3) -- Initiate the TLS/SSL handshake with an TLS/SSL server

The SSL_connect() function initiates the TLS/SSL handshake with a server. The communication channel must already have been set and assigned to the ssl by setting an underlying BIO.

SSL_copy_session_id(3) -- Copies the session-id from one SSL structure to another

The SSL_copy_session_id() function copies an SSL sessionid from SSL structure f and to SSL structure t.

SSL_ctrl(3) -- Performs an operation (get or set information in SSL) for the SSL structure

SSL_CTX_add_client_CA(3) -- Set list of CAs sent to the client when requesting a client certificate

SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3) -- Add certificate to chain

The SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert() function adds the certificate x509 to the certificate chain presented together with the certificate. Several certificates can be added one after the other.

SSL_CTX_add_session(3) -- Manipulate session cache

SSL_CTX_callback_ctrl(3) -- Internal handling functions for SSL_CTX and SSL objects

The SSL_*_ctrl() family of functions is used to manipulate settings of the SSL_CTX and SSL objects. Depending on the cmd parameter, the arguments larg, parg, or fp are evaluated. These functions shoul...

SSL_CTX_check_private_key(3) -- Load certificate and key data

These functions load the certificates and private keys into the SSL_CTX or SSL object, respectively. The SSL_CTX_* class of functions loads the certificates and keys into the SSL_CTX object ctx. The i...

SSL_CTX_ctrl(3) -- Internal handling functions for SSL_CTX and SSL objects

SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3) -- Remove expired sessions

The SSL_CTX_flush_sessions() function causes a run through the session cache of ctx to remove sessions expired at time (tm). The SSL_flush_sessions() function is a synonym for the SSL_CTX_flush_sessio...

SSL_CTX_free(3) -- Free an allocated SSL_CTX object

The SSL_CTX_free() function decrements the reference count of ctx, and removes the SSL_CTX object pointed to by ctx and frees up the allocated memory if the the reference count has reached 0. If appli...

SSL_CTX_get_cert_store(3) -- Get the X509_STORE structure in the SSL_CTX structure

The SSL_CTX_get_cert_store() function gets the X509_STORE structure in the SSL_CTX structure. An X509_STORE structure holds information for certificate verification including cache of trusted certific...

SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list(3) -- Get list of client CAs

The SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list() function returns the list of client CAs explicitly set for ctx using the SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list() function. The SSL_get_client_CA_list() function returns the list ...

SSL_CTX_get_client_cert_cb(3) -- Handle client certificate callback function

The SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb() function sets the client_cert_cb() callback that is called when a client certificate is requested by a server and no certificate was set for the SSL object. When clien...

SSL_CTX_get_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_CTX_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_CTX_get_info_callback(3) -- Handle information callback for SSL connections

The SSL_CTX_set_info_callback() function sets the callback function that can be used to obtain state information for SSL objects created from ctx during connection setup and use. The setting for ctx i...

SSL_CTX_get_mode(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine mode

The SSL_CTX_set_mode() function adds the mode set via bitmask in mode to ctx. Options already set before are not cleared. The SSL_set_mode() function adds the mode set via bitmask in mode to ssl. Opti...

SSL_CTX_get_options(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine options

The SSL_CTX_set_options() function adds the options set via bitmask in options to ctx. Options already set before are not cleared. The SSL_set_options() function adds the options set via bitmask in op...

SSL_CTX_get_quiet_shutdown(3) -- Get the value of the quietshutdown flag in the SSL_CTX data structure

The SSL_CTX_get_quiet_shutdown() function returns a mode of the quiet shutdown flag in the SSL_CTX structure.

SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode(3) -- Enable or disable session caching

The SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode() function enables or disables session caching by setting the operational mode for ctx to . The SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode() function returns the currently...

SSL_CTX_get_timeout(3) -- Manipulate timeout values for session caching

The SSL_CTX_set_timeout() function sets the timeout for newly created sessions for ctx to t. The timeout value t must be given in seconds. The SSL_CTX_get_timeout() function returns the currently set ...

SSL_CTX_get_verify_callback(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

The SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode() function returns the verification mode currently set in ctx. The SSL_get_verify_mode() function returns the verification mode currently set in ssl. The SSL_CTX_get_verify...

SSL_CTX_get_verify_depth(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) -- Set default locations for trusted CA certificates

The SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations() function specifies the locations for ctx, at which CA certificates for verification purposes are located. The certificates available via CAfile and CApath are trust...

SSL_CTX_need_tmp_rsa(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

The SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback() and function sets the callback function for ctx to be used when a temporary/ephemeral RSA key is required to tmp_rsa_callback(). The callback is inherited by all SSL...

SSL_CTX_new(3) -- Create a new SSL_CTX object as framework for TLS/SSL enabled functions

The SSL_CTX_new() function creates a new SSL_CTX object as framework to establish TLS/SSL enabled connections.

SSL_CTX_remove_session(3) -- Manipulate session cache

SSL_CTX_sessions(3) -- Access internal session cache

The SSL_CTX_sessions() function returns a pointer to the lhash databases containing the internal session cache for ctx.

SSL_CTX_sess_accept(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

The SSL_CTX_sess_number() function returns the current number of sessions in the internal session cache. The SSL_CTX_sess_connect() function returns the number of started SSL/TLS handshakes in client ...

SSL_CTX_sess_accept_good(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_accept_renegotiate(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_cache_full(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_cb_hits(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_connect(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_connect_good(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_connect_renegotiate(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_get_cache_size(3) -- Manipulate session cache size

The SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size() function sets the size of the internal session cache of context ctx to t. The SSL_CTX_sess_get_cache_size() function returns the currently valid session cache size.

SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

The SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb() function sets the callback function which is called whenever an SSL/TLS client proposes to resume a session but the session could not be found in the internal session cac...

SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

SSL_CTX_sess_get_remove_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

SSL_CTX_sess_hits(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_misses(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_number(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3) -- Manipulate session cache size

The SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size() function sets the size of the internal session cache of context ctx to t. The SSL_CTX_sess_get_cache_size() function returns the currently valid session cache size.

SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

SSL_CTX_sess_set_remove_cb(3) -- Provide callback functions for server side external session caching

SSL_CTX_sess_timeouts(3) -- Obtain session cache statistics

SSL_CTX_set_cert_store(3) -- Manipulate X509 certificate verification storage.

The SSL_CTX_set_cert_store() function sets/replaces the certificate verification storage of ctx to/with store. If another X509_STORE object is currently set in ctx, it will be X509_STORE_free()ed. The...

SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_cb(3) -- Set peer certificate verification procedure

The SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_cb() sets the verification callback function for ctx. SSL objects that are created from ctx inherit the setting valid at the time SSL_new() is called. The arg is currently ...

SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3) -- Choose list of available SSL_CIPHERs

The SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list() function sets the list of available ciphers for ctx using the control string str. The format of the string is described in ciphers(1). The list of ciphers is inherited by...

SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3) -- Set list of CAs sent to the client when requesting a client certificate

SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3) -- Handle client certificate callback function

SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3) -- Set password callback for encrypted PEM file handling

The SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb() function sets the default password callback called when loading or storing a PEM certificate with encryption. The SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata() function ...

SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata(3) -- Set password callback for encrypted PEM file handling

SSL_CTX_set_def_verify_paths(3) -- Sets default file path and file name of trusted CA certificate

The SSL_CTX_set_def_verify_paths() function sets pre-compiled default CA path and file name for certificate verification. The default CA file path and name are defined as follows: #define X509_CERT_DI...

SSL_CTX_set_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3) -- Handle information callback for SSL connections

SSL_CTX_set_mode(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine mode

SSL_CTX_set_options(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine options

SSL_CTX_set_purpose(3) -- Set a purpose value to the SSL_CTX structure

The SSL_CTX_set_purpose() function sets a purpose value in the SSL_CTX structure. The purpose values and their macros are defined in x509v3.h as follows: #define X509_PURPOSE_SSL_CLIENT 1 #define X509...

SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3) -- Manipulate shutdown behavior

The SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown() function sets the quiet shutdown flag for ctx to be mode. SSL objects created from ctx inherit the mode valid at the time SSL_new(3) is called. mode may be 0 or 1. SSL...

SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3) -- Enable or disable session caching

The SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode() function enables or disables session caching by setting the operational mode for ctx to . The SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode() function returns the currently...

SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3) -- Set context within which session can be reused (server side only)

The SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context() function sets the context sid_ctx of length sid_ctx_len within which a session can be reused for the ctx object. The SSL_set_session_id_context() function sets the...

SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3) -- Choose a new TLS/SSL method

The SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version() function sets a new default TLS/SSL method for SSL objects newly created from this ctx. SSL objects already created with the SSL_new() function are not affected, except w...

SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3) -- Manipulate timeout values for session caching

SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh(3) -- Handle DH keys for ephemeral key exchange

The SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback() function sets the callback function for ctx to be used when DH parameters are required to tmp_dh_callback. The callback is inherited by all ssl objects created from c...

SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3) -- Handle DH keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_CTX_set_trust(3) -- Set a trust value to the SSL_CTX structure

The SSL_CTX_set_trust() function sets a trust value in the SSL_CTX structure. The trust values and their macros are defined in x509v3.h as follows: #define X509_TRUST_COMPAT #define X509_TRUST_SSL_CLI...

SSL_CTX_set_verify(3) -- Set peer certificate verification parameters

The SSL_CTX_set_verify() function sets the verification flags for ctx to be mode and specifies the verify_callback() function to be used. If no callback function is specified, the NULL pointer can be ...

SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth(3) -- Set peer certificate verification parameters

SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_do_handshake(3) -- Perform a TLS/SSL handshake

The SSL_do_handshake() function will wait for an SSL/TLS handshake to take place. If the connection is in client mode, the handshake will start. The handshake routines may have to be explicitly set in...

SSL_dup(3) -- duplicates the specified SSL structure

The SSL_dup() function duplicates the specified SSL structure and returns an address of the newly created SSL structure.

SSL_dup_CA_list(3) -- Duplicate the list of CAs

The SSL_dup_CA_list() function duplicates the specified list of CAs and return an address of the newly created list of CAs.

SSL_flush_sessions(3) -- Remove expired sessions

SSL_free(3) -- Free an allocated SSL structure

The SSL_free() function decrements the reference count of ssl, and removes the SSL structure pointed to by ssl and frees up the allocated memory if the the reference count has reached 0.

SSL_get_accept_state(3) -- Prepare SSL object to work in client or server mode

The SSL_set_connect_state() function sets ssl to work in client mode. The SSL_set_accept_state() function sets ssl to work in server mode.

SSL_get_certificate(3) -- Return an X.509 certificate loaded in the SSL structure

The SSL_get_certificate() function returns an X.509 certificate loaded in the SSL structure. Before calling this function, an X509 certificate must be loaded into the SSL structure with another API (f...

SSL_get_cipher(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER of a connection

The SSL_get_current_cipher() function returns a pointer to an SSL_CIPHER object containing the description of the actually used cipher of a connection established with the ssl object. The SSL_get_ciph...

SSL_get_ciphers(3) -- Get list of available SSL_CIPHERs

SSL_get_cipher_bits(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER of a connection

SSL_get_cipher_list(3) -- Get list of available SSL_CIPHERs

SSL_get_cipher_name(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER of a connection

SSL_get_cipher_version(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER of a connection

SSL_get_client_CA_list(3) -- Get list of client CAs

SSL_get_current_cipher(3) -- Get SSL_CIPHER of a connection

SSL_get_default_timeout(3) -- Get default session timeout value

The SSL_get_default_timeout() function returns the default timeout value assigned to SSL_SESSION objects negotiated for the protocol valid for ssl.

SSL_get_error(3) -- Obtain result code for TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_get_error() function returns a result code (suitable for the C switch statement) for a preceding call to the SSL_connect(), SSL_accept(), SSL_do_handshake(), SSL_read(), SSL_peek(), or SSL_wri...

SSL_get_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3) -- Get ex_data index to access SSL structure from X509_STORE_CTX

The SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx() function returns the index number under which the pointer to the SSL object is stored into the X509_STORE_CTX object.

SSL_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_get_fd(3) -- Get file descriptor linked to an SSL object

The SSL_get_fd() function returns the file descriptor which is linked to ssl. The SSL_get_rfd() and SSL_get_wfd() functions return the file descriptors for the read or the write channel, which can be ...

SSL_get_finished(3) -- Get the latest "Finished" message sent out and return the length of the message.

The SSL_get_finished function copies the latest "Finished" message (sent out from this side) to buf and returns the length of the "Finished" message of the SSL handshake.

SSL_get_info_callback(3) -- Get the callback function set by SSL_set_info_callback

The SSL_get_info_callback() function returns a pointer to the informational callback function set (in info_callback of the SSL structure) by theSSL_set_info_callback() function.

SSL_get_mode(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine mode

SSL_get_options(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine options

SSL_get_peer_certificate(3) -- Get the X509 certificate of the peer

The SSL_get_peer_certificate() function returns a pointer to the X509 certificate the peer presented. If the peer did not present a certificate, NULL is returned.

SSL_get_peer_cert_chain(3) -- Get the X509 certificate chain of the peer

The SSL_get_peer_cert_chain() function returns a pointer to STACKOF(X509) certificates forming the certificate chain of the peer. If called on the client side, the stack also contains the peer's cert...

SSL_get_peer_finished(3) -- Gets the latest "Finished" message received and return the length of the message.

The SSL_get_finished() function copies the latest "Finished" message (received on this side) to buf and returns the length of the "Finished" message of the SSL handshake.

SSL_get_privatekey(3) -- Get a private-key of the X.509 certificate loaded in the SSL structure

The SSL_get_privatekey() function returns a pointer to a private-key of the X.509 certificate loaded in the SSL structure. Before calling this function, a private-key must be loaded into the SSL struc...

SSL_get_quiet_shutdown(3) -- Get a value of the quiet-shutdown flag in the ssl data structure

The SSL_get_quiet_shutdown() function returns a mode of the quiet shutdown flag in the ssl structure.

SSL_get_rbio(3) -- Get BIO linked to an SSL object

The SSL_get_rbio() and SSL_get_wbio() functions return pointers to the BIOs for the read or the write channel, which can be different. The reference count of the BIO is not incremented.

SSL_get_read_ahead(3) -- Get the read-ahead flag in the SSL structure.

The SSL_get_read_ahead() function receives an SSL structure as an argument and returns the read-ahead flag in the SSL structure.

SSL_get_session(3) -- Retrieve TLS/SSL session data

The SSL_get_session() function returns a pointer to the SSL_SESSION actually used in ssl. The reference count of the SSL_SESSION is not incremented, so that the pointer can become invalid by other ope...

SSL_get_shared_ciphers(3) -- Get the shared ciphers from the SSL connection.

The SSL_get_shared_ciphers() function returns a pointer to a buffer (*buf) containing a list of shared ciphers. The function can be used only for SSLv2 connection. It does not work for SSLv3 and TLSv1...

SSL_get_shutdown(3) -- Manipulate shutdown state of an SSL connection

The SSL_set_shutdown() function sets the shutdown state of ssl to mode. The SSL_get_shutdown() function returns the shutdown mode of ssl.

SSL_get_SSL_CTX(3) -- Get the SSL_CTX from which an SSL is created

The SSL_get_SSL_CTX() function returns a pointer to the SSL_CTX object from which ssl was created with SSL_new().

SSL_get_ssl_method(3) -- Choose a new TLS/SSL method

SSL_get_verify_callback(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

SSL_get_verify_depth(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

SSL_get_verify_mode(3) -- Get currently set verification parameters

SSL_get_verify_result(3) -- Get result of peer certificate verification

The SSL_get_verify_result() function returns the result of the verification of the X509 certificate presented by the peer, if any.

SSL_get_version(3) -- Get the protocol version of a connection.

The SSL_get_cipher_version() function returns the name of the protocol used for the connection ssl.

SSL_library_init(3) -- Initialize SSL library by registering algorithms

SSL_load_client_CA_file(3) -- Load certificate names from file

The SSL_load_client_CA_file() function reads certificates from file and returns a STACK_OF(X509_NAME) with the subject names found.

SSL_load_error_strings(3) -- Load error strings

SSL_need_tmp_rsa(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_new(3) -- Create a new SSL structure for a connection

The SSL_new() function creates a new SSL structure which is needed to hold the data for a TLS/SSL connection. The new structure inherits the settings of the underlying context ctx: connection method (...

SSL_peek(3) -- Copy the data in the SSL buffer into the buffer passed to this API

The SSL_peek() function copies num bytes from the specified ssl into the buffer buf. In constrast to the SSL_read() function, the data in the SSL buffer is unmodified after the SSL_peek() operation.

SSL_pending(3) -- Obtain number of readable bytes buffered in an SSL object

The SSL_pending() function returns the number of bytes which are available inside ssl for immediate read.

SSL_read(3) -- Read bytes from a TLS/SSL connection.

The SSL_read() function tries to read num bytes from the specified ssl into the buffer buf.

SSL_remove_session(3) -- Manipulate session cache

SSL_renogiate(3) -- Turn on flags for renegotiation so that renegotiation will happen

The SSL_renegotiate() function sets flags to initiate renegotiation. The renegotiation may happen at the next I/O operation provided that client/server are ready for renegotiation.

SSL_rstate_string(3) -- Get textual description of state of an SSL object during read operation

The SSL_rstate_string() function returns a 2 letter string indicating the current read state of the SSL object ssl. The SSL_rstate_string_long() function returns a string indicating the current read s...

SSL_rstate_string_long(3) -- Get textual description of state of an SSL object during read operation

SSL_SESSION_cmp(3) -- Compare two SSL_SESSION structures

SSL_SESSION_cmp() compares two SSL_SESSION structures. If the two structures are the same, this API return 0, otherwise non-zero value is returned.

SSL_SESSION_free(3) -- Free an allocated SSL_SESSION structure

The SSL_SESSION_free() function decrements the reference count of session and removes the SSL_SESSION structure pointed to by session and frees up the allocated memory, if the the reference count has ...

SSL_SESSION_get_ex_data(3) -- Unternal application specific data functions

SSL_SESSION_get_ex_new_index(3) -- Unternal application specific data functions

SSL_SESSION_get_time(3) -- Retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings

The SSL_SESSION_get_time() function returns the time at which the session s was established. The time is given in seconds since the Epoch and therefore compatible to the time delivered by the time() c...

SSL_SESSION_get_timeout(3) -- Retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings

SSL_SESSION_hash(3) -- Return a session ID formatted as an

The SSL_SESSION_hash() function formats session_id[0...3] of the received SSL_SESSION into a unsigned long data and returns it.

SSL_SESSION_new(3) -- Create a new SSL_SESSION structure

The SSL_SESSION_new() function creates an SSL_SESSION structure and returns an address of the structure. 60*5+4 is set to timeout value of a newly created SSL_SESSION structure.

SSL_SESSION_print(3) -- Write data in the SSL_SESSION structure to the BIO or to an I/O stream specified by the file pointer

The SSL_SESSION_print() writes SSL_SESSION information (including protocol type, cipher types, session id, and master key) into the BIO. If this function succeeds, it returns 1. The SSL_SESSION_print_...

SSL_SESSION_print_fp(3) -- Write data in the SSL_SESSION structure to the BIO or to an I/O stream specified by the file pointer

SSL_session_reused(3) -- Query whether a reused session was negotiated during handshake

The SSL_session_reused() function queries whether a reused session was negotiated during the handshake.

SSL_SESSION_set_ex_data(3) -- Unternal application specific data functions

SSL_SESSION_set_time(3) -- Retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings

SSL_SESSION_set_timeout(3) -- Retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings

SSL_set_bio(3) -- Connect the SSL object with a BIO

The SSL_set_bio() function connects the BIOs rbio and wbio for the read and write operations of the TLS/SSL (encrypted) side of ssl. The SSL engine inherits the behavior of rbio and wbio, respectively...

SSL_set_cipher_list(3) -- Choose list of available SSL_CIPHERs

SSL_set_client_CA_list(3) -- Set list of CAs sent to the client when requesting a client certificate

SSL_set_connect_state(3) -- Prepare SSL object to work in client or server mode

The SSL_set_connect_state() function sets ssl to work in client mode. The SSL_set_accept_state() function sets ssl to work in server mode.

SSL_set_ex_data(3) -- Internal application specific data functions

SSL_set_fd(3) -- Connect the SSL object with a file descriptor

The SSL_set_fd() function sets the file descriptor fd as the input/output facility for the TLS/SSL (encrypted) side of ssl. The fd will typically be the socket file descriptor of a network connection....

SSL_set_info_callback(3) -- Set a callback which will be called during the specified SSL connection

The SSL_set_info_callback() function sets a callback which will be called during the specified SSL connection. This function is useful to trace an SSL connection.

SSL_set_mode(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine mode

SSL_set_options(3) -- Manipulate SSL engine options

SSL_set_purpose(3) -- Set a purpose value to the SSL structure

The SSL_set_purpose() function sets a purpose value in the SSL structure. The purpose values and their macros are defined in x509v3.h as follows: #define X509_PURPOSE_SSL_CLIENT 1 #define X509_PURPOSE...

SSL_set_quiet_shutdown(3) -- Set a value to the quiet-shutdown flag in the ssl data structure

The SSL_set_quiet_shutdown() function sets a mode of quiet shutdown to the ssl structure. To turn on the quiet shutdown, mode == 1 needs to be passed. The mode == 0 turns off the quiet shutdown flag o...

SSL_set_read_ahead(3) -- sets the read-ahead flag in the SSL structure.

SSL_get_read_ahead() sets a value (int yes) to the readahead flag in the SSL structure. In order to turn on the flag, a non-zero value must be set.

SSL_set_session(3) -- Set a TLS/SSL session to be used during TLS/SSL connect

The SSL_set_session() function sets session to be used when the TLS/SSL connection is to be established. The SSL_set_session() function is only useful for TLS/SSL clients. When the session is set, the...

SSL_set_session_id_context(3) -- Set context within which session can be reused (server side only)

SSL_set_shutdown(3) -- Manipulate shutdown state of an SSL connection

The SSL_set_shutdown() function sets the shutdown state of ssl to mode. The SSL_get_shutdown() function returns the shutdown mode of ssl.

SSL_set_ssl_method(3) -- Choose a new TLS/SSL method

SSL_set_tmp_dh(3) -- Handle DH keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_set_tmp_dh_callback(3) -- Handle DH keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_set_tmp_rsa(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3) -- Handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange

SSL_set_trust(3) -- sets a trust value to the SSL structure

The SSL_set_trust() function sets a trust value in the SSL structure. The trust values and their macros are defined in x509v3.h as follows: #define X509_TRUST_COMPAT 1 #define X509_TRUST_SSL_CLIENT 2 ...

SSL_set_verify(3) -- Set peer certificate verification parameters

SSL_set_verify_depth(3) -- Set peer certificate verification parameters

SSL_set_verify_result(3) -- Override result of peer certificate verification

The SSL_set_verify_result() function sets verify_result of the object ssl to be the result of the verification of the X509 certificate presented by the peer, if any.

SSL_shutdown(3) -- Shut down a TLS/SSL connection

The SSL_shutdown() function shuts down an active TLS/SSL connection. It sends the "lose notify" shutdown alert to the peer.

SSL_state(3) -- Get a description of an SSL state

These APIs are used to get the information about the current SSL state. The SSL_state() function takes the address of the current SSL structure and return its state code (integer). The SSL_state_strin...

SSL_state_string(3) -- Get textual description of state of an SSL object

The SSL_state_string() function returns a six-- letter string indicating the current state of the SSL object ssl. The SSL_state_string_long() function returns a string indicating the current state of ...

SSL_state_string_long(3) -- Get textual description of state of an SSL object

SSL_use_certificate(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_certificate_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_certificate_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_PrivateKey(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_PrivateKey_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_file(3) -- Load certificate and key data

SSL_version(3) -- Get a version of the SSL structure

The SSL_version() function returns an SSL version (one of SSL2_VERSION, SSL3_VERSION, TLS1_VERSION).

SSL_want(3) -- Obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_want() function returns state information for the SSL object ssl. The other SSL_want_*() functions are shortcuts for the possible states returned by SSL_want().

SSL_want_nothing(3) -- Obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_want() function returns state information for the SSL object ssl. The other SSL_want_*() functions are shortcuts for the possible states returned by SSL_want().

SSL_want_read(3) -- Obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_want() function returns state information for the SSL object ssl. The other SSL_want_*() functions are shortcuts for the possible states returned by SSL_want().

SSL_want_write(3) -- Obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_want() function returns state information for the SSL object ssl. The other SSL_want_*() functions are shortcuts for the possible states returned by SSL_want().

SSL_want_x509_lookup(3) -- Obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation

The SSL_want() function returns state information for the SSL object ssl. The other SSL_want_*() functions are shortcuts for the possible states returned by SSL_want().

SSL_write(3) -- Write bytes to a TLS/SSL connection.

The SSL_write() function writes num bytes from the buffer buf into the specified ssl connection.

standend(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

standout(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

starting_egid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

starting_euid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

starting_luid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

starting_rgid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

starting_ruid(3) -- Get or check user or group IDs (Enhanced Security)

start_color(3) -- Curses

staux(3) -- routines that provide scalar interfaces to auxiliaries

Auxiliary entries are unions with a fixed length of four bytes per entry. Much information is packed within the auxiliaries. Rather than have the compiler front-ends handle each type of auxiliary entr...

stcu(3) -- routines that provide a compilation unit symbol table interface

The stcu() routines provide an interface to objects that occur once per object rather than once per file descriptor (for example, external symbols, strings, and dense numbers). The routines provide ac...

stdarg(3) -- Handle a variable-length parameter list

The stdarg set of macros allows you to write portable functions that accept a variable number of parameters. Subroutines that have variable-length parameter lists (such as the printf() function), but ...

stdio(3) -- locking functions

step(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

step_r(3) -- Regular expression compile and match routines

stfd(3) -- routines that provide access to per file descriptor section of the symbol table

The stfd routines provide an interface to objects handled on a per file descriptor (fd) level (for example, local symbols, auxiliaries, local strings, line numbers, optimization entries, procedure des...

stfe(3) -- routines that provide a high-level interface to basic functions needed to access and add to the symb...

The stfe routines provide a high-level interface to the symbol table based on common needs of the compiler frontends. Should be called upon encountering each cpp directive in the front end. It calls s...

stime(3) -- Set the system-wide time-of-day clock

The stime() function sets the time and date of the system.

stio(3) -- routines that provide a binary read/write interface to the symbol table

The CHDRR structure (see stcu(3)) represents a symbol table in memory. A new CHDRR can be created by reading a symbol table from disk. The st_readbinary() and st_readst() routines read a symbol table ...

store(3) -- Database subroutines

strcasecmp(3) -- Perform case-insensitive string comparisons

The strcasecmp() function compares the string pointed to by the s1 parameter to the string pointed to by the s2 parameter, while ignoring differences in case. The strncasecmp() function is similar to ...

strcat(3) -- Perform operations on strings

The strcat() function appends a copy of the string pointed to by the s2 parameter (including the terminating null byte) to the end of the string pointed to by the s1 parameter. The initial byte of s2 ...

strchr(3) -- Search for character in string

strcmp(3) -- Perform operations on strings

strcoll(3) -- Compares strings using locale collation

The strcoll() function compares the string pointed to by the s1 parameter with the string pointed to by the s2 parameter, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current loca...

strcpy(3) -- Perform operations on strings

strcspn(3) -- Return length of initial segment of string

The strspn() function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by the s1 parameter, which consists entirely of bytes from the string pointed to by the s2 parameter. ...

strdup(3) -- Perform operations on strings

strerror(3) -- Access message explaining function error

The strerror() function maps the error number specified by the errnum parameter to a error message string and returns a pointer to the string. The string pointed to by the return value is not modified...

strerror_r(3) -- Access message explaining function error

strfmon(3) -- Formats monetary strings

The strfmon() function converts numeric values to monetary strings according to the specifications in the format parameter. The function converts the double-precision floating-point value parameters u...

strftime(3) -- Convert a date and time to a string

The strftime() function places characters into the array pointed to by the s parameter as controlled by the string pointed to by the format parameter. Local time zone information is used as though the...

string(3) -- Perform operations on strings

strlen(3) -- Find the length of a string

The strlen() function returns the number of bytes in the string pointed to by the s parameter. The string length value does not include the terminating null character. Note If you pass a NULL pointer ...

strncasecmp(3) -- Perform case-insensitive string comparisons

strncat(3) -- Perform operations on string

The strncat() function appends no more than n bytes from the array pointed to by the s2 parameter to the end of the array pointed to by the s1 parameter. The initial byte of the array pointed to by s2...

strncmp(3) -- Perform operations on string

strncpy(3) -- Perform operations on string

strpbrk(3) -- Find one of a set of bytes in a string

The strpbrk() function scans the string pointed to by the s1 parameter for the first occurrence of any byte in the string pointed to by the s2 parameter. The strpbrk() function treats the s2 parameter...

strptime(3) -- Convert a character string to a time value

The strptime() function converts the characters pointed to by the buf parameter to values that are stored in the tm structure, using the format specified by the format parameter. The strptime() functi...

strrchr(3) -- Search for character in string

strspn(3) -- Return length of initial segment of string

strstr(3) -- Find a substring

The strstr() function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by the s1 parameter of the sequence of bytes in the string pointed to by the s2 parameter, excluding the terminating null ch...

strtod(3) -- Converts a character

strtof(3) -- Converts a character

strtok(3) -- Split string into tokens

The strtok() function splits the string pointed to by the s1 parameter into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a byte equal to one of the bytes in the s2 parameter. Usually, the strto...

strtok_r(3) -- Split string into tokens

strtol(3) -- Convert a character string to the specified integer data type

strtold(3) -- Converts a character

strtoul(3) -- Convert a character string to the specified integer data type

strxfrm(3) -- Transforms string for collation in current locale

The strxfrm() function transforms the string pointed to by the s2 parameter into an internal form suitable for collation and places the result in the address specified by s1. This transformation is pe...

stty(3) -- set and get terminal state

st_addr_to_file(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

These functions convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle and offset: Returns the file handle corresponding to the specified text address. Retur...

st_addr_to_line(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

st_addr_to_obj(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

These functions create, close, or perform operations on object lists: Either creates a list of objects or appends an object to an existing object list. It either creates a new object list (when you sp...

st_addr_to_proc(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

st_addr_to_sym(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

st_ar_member_next(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

The st_obj_open() function opens the named object file for read access. It maps the file in memory using mmap(), if possible. If mmap() fails, it dynamically allocates memory in which to read the file...

st_check_proc_line_range(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

These functions return information about a procedure or perform operations on the procedures in an object or file: Determines whether the specified procedure is an alternate entry or nested routine. R...

st_class_str(3) -- translate symbol table codes to printable strings

These functions are used to get a printable string corresponding to an encoded value in an object file's symbol table. The st_lang_str() function determines the source language for a file. The st_typ...

st_cm_add(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

These functions are used to read, create or modify comment section data. Return an opaque handle for the comment section to the cmscn parameter. You can use this handle as an input argument in subsequ...

st_cm_append(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_cleanup(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_data(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_delete(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_del_entry(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_find_sscn(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_flags(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_get_flags(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_layout(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_next(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_print(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_print_one(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_setup(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_set_flags(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_start(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_cm_tag(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_data_addr_to_sym(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

st_dyn_addr(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

These functions are used to read dynamic section entries in an object file. The dynamic section is an array of tag and value pairs providing information that is used to navigate and interpret addition...

st_dyn_count(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_dyn_find_tag(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_dyn_next(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_dyn_start(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_dyn_tag(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_dyn_value(3) -- Access routines for dynamic header information in shared objects

st_end_sym(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

These functions return information about the symbols in an object. Symbols may represent files, procedures, or local or global symbols. Return the value, type, and class of a given symbol. Returns the...

st_external_name_sym(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_fd_get_version_byname(3) -- access version information in an object file

These functions access version information in an object file. The st_get_known_versions() routine returns the version stamp values (from the file /usr/include/stamp.h) that libst.a was built with. The...

st_file_is_archive(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

st_file_lang(3) -- access information about the files in an object

All of the functions described in this reference page return information about the files in an object: Identifies the source language (for example, C++) of the specified file. Returns a pointer to a n...

st_file_name(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_file_proc_count(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_file_proc_next(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_file_proc_start(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_file_sym_start(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_file_to_obj(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_foreach_obj(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_foreach_obj_proc(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_foreach_proc(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_foreach_proc_sorted(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_frame_offset_to_sym(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_free_name(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_get_format_versions(3) -- access version information in an object file

st_get_known_versions(3) -- access version information in an object file

st_get_mangled_name_flag(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_get_version_byname(3) -- access version information in an object file

st_is_alternate_entry(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_is_file_locally_stripped(3) -- access information about the files in an object

st_is_obj_archive(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

st_is_obj_call_shared(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

These routines return information about an object: Determine whether the specified object is a call-shared object, a nonshared object, or a shared library. Determines whether the symbol table has been...

st_is_obj_shared(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_is_obj_stripped(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_is_sym_global(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_is_sym_local(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_is_sym_weak(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_lang_str(3) -- translate symbol table codes to printable strings

st_mem_get_format_versions(3) -- access version information in an object file

st_mem_get_version_byname(3) -- access version information in an object file

st_object_type(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

st_objlist_append(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_objlist_close(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_objlist_delete(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_objlist_external_name_sym(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_objlist_first(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_objlist_last(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_obj_bss_size(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_bss_start(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_calls(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_close(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

st_obj_cm_setup(3) -- access and modify comment section information in an object file

st_obj_data_size(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_data_start(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_esym_count(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

An object or executable can contain multiple files, procedures, and symbols. These routines provide the interface for accessing each of these entities sequentially. Separate interfaces are provided to...

st_obj_esym_next(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_esym_start(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_file_count(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_file_next(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_file_start(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_libnames(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_lsym_count(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_lsym_next(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_lsym_start(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_mem_addr(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_name(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_open(3) -- routines to check whether an object is an archive and to process object files within an archive

st_obj_path(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_proc_count(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_proc_has_ppod(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

These functions are used to read, create, or modify optimization symbol table data. The optimization symbol table is a part of an object file that contains the ppod table. The term, ppod, refers to Pe...

st_obj_proc_next(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_proc_pp(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_obj_proc_start(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_pt_setup(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_obj_rpath(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_soname(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_sym_count(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_sym_next(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_sym_start(3) -- access information about an object's files, procedures, and symbols

st_obj_text_size(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_obj_text_start(3) -- general calls for accessing information about an object file

st_outer_proc_end_line(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_ppod_data(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_ppod_print(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_ppod_tag(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_add(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_append(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_delete(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_find_tag(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_next(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_print(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pp_start(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_proc_addr(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_end_line(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_end_sym(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_proc_has_ppod(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_proc_name(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_pp(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_proc_sort(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_sorted_next(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_sorted_start(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_start_line(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_sym(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_to_file(3) -- access information about the procedures in an object

st_proc_to_obj(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_pt_cleanup(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pt_layout(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pt_next(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pt_setup(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_pt_start(3) -- access and modify optimization symbol table information in an object file

st_set_mangled_name_flag(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_strerror(3) -- translate a libst return code to a printable error message

The st_strerror() function translates a libst error code to a printable error message and copies that error message to the memory region addressed by the buf parameter. If the error message exceeds th...

st_sym_class(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_name(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_name_copy(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_size(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_to_file(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_to_obj(3) -- create, close, or perform operations on object lists

st_sym_to_outer_scope_sym(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_type(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_sym_value(3) -- access information about the symbols in an object, and access or set symbol name demangling controls

st_text_addr_to_sym(3) -- convert an address in an object to a file handle, procedure handle, line number, or symbol handle an...

st_type_str(3) -- translate symbol table codes to printable strings

subpad(3) -- Routines that create and display Curses pads

subwin(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

svcerr_auth(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_decode(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_noproc(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_noprog(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_progvers(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_systemerr(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcerr_weakauth(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcfd_create(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcraw_create(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svctcp_create(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svcudp_create(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_destroy(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_fdset(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_freeargs(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_getargs(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_getcaller(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_getreq(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_getreqset(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_register(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_run(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_sendreply(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

svc_unregister(3) -- library routines for ONC server remote procedure calls

swab(3) -- Swap bytes

The swab() function copies the number of bytes specified by the nbytes parameter from the location pointed to by the src parameter to the array pointed to by the dest parameter, exchanging adjacent by...

swprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters

swscanf(3) -- Convert formatted wide-character input

syncok(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

sysconf(3) -- Get configurable system variables

The sysconf() function provides a method for the application to determine the current value of a configurable system limit or whether optional features are supported. The following is a list of system...

syslog(3) -- Control system log

syslog_r(3) -- Control system log

system(3) -- Execute a shell command

The system() function passes the string parameter to the sh command, which interprets string as a command and executes it. See sh(1) to determine which command interpreter is defined by sh on your sys...

tan(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

tand(3) -- Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions in radian and degree calculations.

tanh(3) -- Hyperbolic functions

tcdrain(3) -- Wait for output to complete

The tcdrain() function waits until all output written to the object referred to by the filedes parameter has been transmitted. A process group is sent a SIGTTOU signal if the tcdrain() function is cal...

tcflow(3) -- Perform flow control functions

The tcflow() function suspends transmission or reception of data on the object referred to by the filedes parameter, depending on the value of the action parameter. A process group is sent a SIGTTOU s...

tcflush(3) -- Flush nontransmitted output data or nonread input data

The tcflush() function discards any data written to the object referred to by the filedes parameter, or data received but not read by the object referred to by filedes, depending on the value of the q...

tcgetattr(3) -- Get the parameters associated with the terminal

The tcgetattr() function gets the parameters associated with the object referenced by the filedes parameter and stores them in the termios structure referenced by the termios_p parameter. If the devic...

tcgetpgrp(3) -- Get foreground process group ID

The tcgetpgrp() function returns the value of the process group ID of the foreground process group associated with the terminal. The function can be called from a background process; however, the info...

tcgetsid(3) -- returns the session ID of the terminal

The tcgetsid() routine is a part of the general terminal interface. This routine obtains the session ID of the terminal as specified by the fildes parameter.

tcsendbreak(3) -- Send a break on an asynchronous serial data line

If the terminal is using asynchronous serial data transmission, the tcsendbreak() function causes transmission of a continuous stream of zero-valued bits for a specific duration. If the terminal is no...

tcsetattr(3) -- Set the parameters associated with the terminal

The tcsetattr() function sets the parameters associated with the terminal referred to by the open file descriptor filedes from the termios structure referenced by termios_p as follows: If optional_act...

tcsetpgrp(3) -- Set foreground process group ID

If the process has a controlling terminal, the tcsetpgrp() function sets the foreground process group ID associated with the terminal to the value of the pgrp_id parameter. The file associated with th...

tdelete(3) -- Manage binary search trees

The tsearch(), tfind(), tdelete() and twalk() functions are used to operate on binary search trees. Comparisons are done with a user-supplied function whose address is passed as the compar parameter i...

telldir(3) -- Perform operations on directories

tempnam(3) -- Construct the name for a temporary file

The tmpnam() and tempnam() functions generate filenames for temporary files. The tmpnam() function generates a filename using the pathname defined as P_tmpdir in the stdio.h header file. Files created...

termattrs(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

termcap(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

These functions extract and use capabilities from the terminal capability database termcap(4). These are low level routines; see curses(3) for a higher level package. The tgetent function extracts the...

Terminate(3) -- Clean up module-manager-specific activities (CDSA)

This function performs any module-manager-specific cleanup activities in preparation for unloading of the elective module manager.

termname(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

term_attrs(3) -- Routines for querying the Curses environment

tfind(3) -- Manage binary search trees

tgetent(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

tgetent(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

tgetflag(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

tgetnum(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

tgetnum(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

tgetoption(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

tgetstr(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

tgetstr(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

tgoto(3) -- Curses interfaces that support termcap capabilities

tgoto(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

threads(3) -- OpenSSL thread support

tigetflag(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

tigetnum(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

tigetstr(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

time(3) -- Get time, converts time between time_t and time64_t

The time() function returns the time in seconds since the Epoch. The Epoch is referenced to 00:00:00 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) 1 Jan 1970. The time64_t data type is a 64-bit signed value which,...

time64(3) -- Get time, converts time between time_t and time64_t

timeout(3) -- Curses

timer_create(3) -- Allocates a per-process timer

The timer_create function allocates a per-process timer using the specified clock as the timing base. The timer_create function returns timer_id, which identifies the timer in timer requests. The time...

timer_delete(3) -- Deallocates a previously allocated per-process timer (P1003.1b)

The timer_delete function frees a per-process timer previously allocated by a call to the timer_create function. If the timer is armed when the timer_delete function is called, the timer is disarmed a...

timer_getoverrun(3) -- Obtains the overrun count for a specified timer

The timer_getoverrun function returns the overrun count for a specified timer. The count contains the number of extra timer expirations that occurred between the time the signal was queued and when it...

timer_gettime(3) -- Obtains or sets the expiration

The timer_gettime function returns the amount of time remaining in the current time interval before the expiration of the specified timer. The timer_settime function sets the expiration time of the sp...

timer_settime(3) -- Obtains or sets the expiration

times(3) -- Get process and child process times

The times() function fills the type tms structure space pointed to by the buffer parameter with time-accounting information. All time values reported by this function are in hardware-dependent clock t...

TIMET32TO64(3) -- Get time, converts time between time_t and time64_t

TIMET64TO32(3) -- Get time, converts time between time_t and time64_t

timezone(3) -- sets and accesses time zone conversion information

time_lock_es(3) -- Check time-of-day locking (Enhanced Security)

The time_lock_es() function performs time-of-day lock checking for the current date and time against the timeof-day specification in the fd_tod string of the prpwd parameter. The function returns 1 if...

tis(3) -- Introduction to Thread-Independent Services (tis)

Thread-independent services (tis) routines compose an HPproprietary interface to the DECthreads multitasking library. The tis interface provides services that assist with the development of thread-saf...

tis_cond_broadcast(3) -- Wakes all threads that are waiting on the specified condition variable

When threads are not present, this routine performs no actions. When threads are present, this routine unblocks all threads waiting on the specified condition variable cond. For more information about...

tis_cond_destroy(3) -- Destroys the specified condition variable

This routine destroys the condition variable specified by cond. After this routine is called, DECthreads may reclaim internal storage used by the condition variable object. Call this routine when a co...

tis_cond_init(3) -- Initializes a condition variable

This routine initializes a condition variable (cond) with the DECthreads default condition variable attributes. A condition variable is a synchronization object used in conjunction with a mutex. A mut...

tis_cond_signal(3) -- Wakes at least one thread that is waiting on the specified condition variable

When threads are present, this routine unblocks at least one thread that is waiting on the specified condition variable cond. When threads are not present, this routine has no effect. For more informa...

tis_cond_timedwait(3) -- Causes a thread to wait for the specified condition variable to be signaled or broadcast, such that ...

If threads are not present, this function is equivalent to sleep(3). This routine causes a thread to wait until one of the following occurs: The specified condition variable is signaled or broadcast. ...

tis_cond_wait(3) -- Causes a thread to wait for the specified condition variable to be signaled or broadcast

When threads are present, this routine causes a thread to wait for the specified condition variable cond to be signaled or broadcast. Calling this routine in a single-threaded environment is a coding ...

tis_getspecific(3) -- Obtains the data associated with the

This routine returns the value currently bound to the specified thread-specific data key. This routine can be called from a data destructor function. When threads are present, the data and keys are th...

tis_get_expiration(3) -- Obtains a value representing a desired expiration time

If threads are not present, this routine has no effect. This routine adds a specified time interval to the current absolute system time and returns a new absolute time. This new absolute time is used ...

tis_intro(3) -- Introduction to Thread-Independent Services (tis)

tis_key_create(3) -- Generates a unique thread-specific data key

This routine generates a unique thread-specific data key. The key argument points to an opaque object used to locate data. This routine generates and returns a new key value. The key reserves a cell. ...

tis_key_delete(3) -- Deletes the specified thread-specific data key

This routine deletes a thread-specific data key key previously returned by a call to the tis_key_create(3) routine. The data values associated with key need not be NULL at the time this routine is cal...

tis_lock_global(3) -- Locks the DECthreads global mutex

This routine locks the DECthreads global mutex. The global mutex is recursive. For example, if you called tis_lock_global(3) three times, tis_unlock_global(3) unlocks the global mutex when you call it...

tis_mutex_destroy(3) -- Destroys the specified mutex object

This routine destroys a mutex object by uninitializing it, and should be called when a mutex object is no longer referenced. After this routine is called, DECthreads can reclaim internal storage used ...

tis_mutex_init(3) -- Initializes a mutex object

This routine initializes a mutex object with the DECthreads default mutex attributes. A mutex is a synchronization object that allows multiple threads to serialize their access to shared data. The mut...

tis_mutex_lock(3) -- Locks an unlocked mutex

This routine locks the specified mutex mutex. A deadlock can result if the current owner of a mutex calls this routine in an attempt to lock the same mutex a second time. (DECthreads does not detect o...

tis_mutex_trylock(3) -- Attempts to lock the specified mutex

This routine attempts to lock the specified mutex mutex. When this routine is called, an attempt is made immediately to lock the mutex. If the mutex is successfully locked, zero (0) is returned. If th...

tis_mutex_unlock(3) -- Unlocks the specified mutex

This routine unlocks the specified mutex mutex. For more information about actions taken when threads are present, refer to the pthread_mutex_unlock description.

tis_once(3) -- Calls an initialization routine that can be executed by only one thread, once

The first call to this routine by a process with a given once_control calls the init_routine with no arguments. Thereafter, subsequent calls to tis_once(3) with the same once_control do not call the i...

tis_read_lock(3) -- Acquires a read-write lock for read access

This routine acquires a read-write lock for read access. This routine waits for any existing lock holder for write access to relinquish its lock before granting the lock for read access. This routine ...

tis_read_trylock(3) -- Attempts to acquire a read-write lock for read access and does not wait if the lock cannot be immedi...

This routine attempts to acquire a read-write lock for read access. If the lock cannot be granted, the routine returns without waiting. When a thread calls this routine, an attempt is made to immediat...

tis_read_unlock(3) -- Unlocks a read-write lock that was acquired for read access

This routine unlocks a read-write lock that was acquired for read access. If there are no other holders of the lock for read access and another thread is waiting to acquire the lock for write access, ...

tis_rwlock_destroy(3) -- Destroys the specified read-write lock object

This routine destroys the specified read-write lock object. Prior to calling this routine, ensure that there are no locks granted to the specified read-write lock and that there are no threads waiting...

tis_rwlock_init(3) -- Initializes a read-write lock object

This routine initializes a read-write lock object. The routine initializes the tis_rwlock_t structure that holds the object's lock states. To destroy a read-write lock object, call the tis_rwlock_des...

tis_self(3) -- Obtains the identifier of the calling thread

This routine allows a thread to obtain its own thread identifier. This value becomes meaningless when the thread is destroyed. The initial thread in a process can "change identity" when thread syste...

tis_setcancelstate(3) -- Changes the calling thread's cancelability state

This routine sets the calling thread's cancelability state to the value specified in the state argument and returns the calling thread's previous cancelability state in the location referenced by th...

tis_setspecific(3) -- Changes the value associated with the

This routine sets the value associated with the specified thread-specific data key. If a value is defined for the key (that is, the current value is not NULL), the new value is substituted for it. The...

tis_testcancel(3) -- Creates a cancellation point in the calling thread

This routine requests delivery of a pending cancellation request to the calling thread. Thus, this routine creates a cancellation point in the calling thread. The cancellation request is delivered onl...

tis_unlock_global(3) -- Unlocks the DECthreads global mutex

This routine unlocks the DECthreads global mutex. Because the global mutex is recursive, the unlock occurs when each call to tis_lock_global(3) has been matched by a call to this routine. For example,...

tis_write_lock(3) -- Acquires the specified read-write lock for write access

This routine acquires a read-write lock for write access. This routine waits for any other active locks (for either read or write access) to be unlocked before this acquisition request is granted. Thi...

tis_write_trylock(3) -- Attempts to acquire the specified

This routine attempts to acquire a read-write lock for write access. The routine attempts to immediately acquire the lock. If the lock is acquired, zero (0) is returned. If the lock is held by another...

tis_write_unlock(3) -- Unlocks the specified read-write lock that was acquired for write access

This routine unlocks a read-write lock that was acquired for write access. Upon completion of this routine, any thread waiting to acquire the lock for read access will have those acquisitions granted....

tmpfile(3) -- Create a temporary file

The tmpfile() function creates a temporary file and returns its FILE pointer. The file is opened for update. The temporary file is automatically deleted when the process using it terminates.

tmpnam(3) -- Construct the name for a temporary file

toascii(3) -- Translate characters

tolower(3) -- Translate characters

TopLevelShell(3X) -- The TopLevelShell widget class

TopLevelShell is used for normal top-level windows such as any additional top-level widgets an application needs. Classes [Toc] [Back] TopLevelShell inherits behavior and resources from Core, Co...

touchline(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

touchwin(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

toupper(3) -- Translate characters

towctrans(3) -- Convert a wide character according to a property defined in the current locale

The towctrans() function maps a wide character to its counterpart value according to a specified property, for example, tolower or toupper. Before calling towctrans(), you must call wctrans() to deter...

towlower(3) -- Convert uppercase and lowercase wide characters

The towlower() function converts the uppercase wide character specified by the wc parameter into the corresponding lowercase wide character. The towupper() function converts the lowercase wide charact...

towupper(3) -- Convert uppercase and lowercase wide characters

tparm(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

tputs(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

tputs(3x) -- Terminal independent operation routines

TP_ApplyCrlToDb(3) -- Update persistent storage (CDSA)

TP_CertCreateTemplate(3) -- Allocate and initialize template memory (CDSA)

TP_CertGetAllTemplateFields(3) -- Get CertTemplate field values (CDSA)

TP_CertGroupConstruct(3) -- Construct credential (CDSA)

TP_CertGroupPrune(3) -- Remove locally issued anchor certificates (CDSA)

TP_CertGroupToTupleGroup(3) -- Create a set of authorization tuples (CDSA)

TP_CertGroupVerify(3) -- Determine if a certificate is trusted (CDSA)

TP_CertReclaimAbort(3) -- Terminate the process of reclaiming certificates (CDSA)

TP_CertReclaimKey(3) -- Get private key associated with a certificate (CDSA)

TP_CertRemoveFromCrlTemplate(3) -- Determine if the revoking certificate group can remove the subject certificate group from the CRL te...

TP_CertRevoke(3) -- Determine if the revoking certificate group can revoke the subject certificate group (CDSA)

TP_CertSign(3) -- Determine if signer certificate is trusted (CDSA)

TP_ConfirmCredResult(3) -- Confirm credentials (CDSA)

TP_CrlCreateTemplate(3) -- Create

TP_CrlSign(3) -- Determine if signer certificate is trusted (CDSA)

TP_CrlVerify(3) -- Verify integrity of the certificate revocation list (CDSA)

TP_FormRequest(3) -- Get form from authority (CDSA)

TP_FormSubmit(3) -- Submit form to ClearanceAuthority (CDSA)

TP_PassThrough(3) -- Extend trust policy functionality

TP_ReceiveConfirmation(3) -- Poll for confirmation (CDSA)

TP_SubmitCredRequest(3) -- Submit credential request (CDSA)

TP_TupleGroupToCertGroup(3) -- Create a set of certificate templates (CDSA)

TransientShell(3X) -- The TransientShell widget class

TransientShell is used for shell windows that can be manipulated by the window manager but are not allowed to be iconified separately. For example, Dialog boxes make no sense without their associated ...

trunc(3) -- Round floatingpoint

tsearch(3) -- Manage binary search trees

ttyname(3) -- Get the name of a terminal

ttyname_r(3) -- Get the name of a terminal

ttyslot(3) -- Find the slot for the current user in the user accounting database

The ttyslot() function returns the index of the current user's entry in the user accounting database. The current user's entry is an entry for which the utline member matches the name of a terminal ...

twalk(3) -- Manage binary search trees

typeahead(3) -- Curses

tzname(3) -- sets and accesses time zone conversion information

tzset(3) -- sets and accesses time zone conversion information

t_accept(3) -- Accept a connect request

The t_accept() function is an XTI connection-oriented service function that is issued by a transport user to accept a connect request after a connect indication has arrived. Structures of types t_call...

t_alloc(3) -- Allocate a library structure

The t_alloc() XTI memory utility function is used to dynamically allocate memory for structures required by various XTI transport interface functions. The structure to allocate is specified by a struc...

t_bind(3) -- Bind an address to a transport endpoint

The t_bind() XTI function is used in connectionless and connection-oriented transport service to associate a protocol address with the transport endpoint returned by the t_open() function and to activ...

t_close(3) -- Close a transport endpoint.

The t_close() XTI function is used in connection-oriented and connectionless transport service to inform a transport provider that the transport user has finished with the transport endpoint. The tran...

t_connect(3) -- Establish a connection with another transport user

The t_connect() XTI function is a connection-oriented service function issued by a transport user to request connection to the specified destination transport user. By default, this function executes ...

t_error(3) -- Produce an error message

The t_error() function is a general utility function used to produce an error message on the standard error output device. The error message describes the last error encountered during execution of an...

t_free(3) -- Free a library structure

The t_free() function is an XTI general utility function used to deallocate memory buffers previously allocated with the t_alloc() function. When executed, t_free() deallocates memory for the named st...

t_getinfo(3) -- Get protocol-specific information

The t_getinfo() function is an XTI general utility function that provides information about the underlying transport protocol associated with a file descriptor previously returned by the t_open() func...

t_getprotaddr(3) -- Get the protocol address

The t_getprotaddr() function returns local and remote protocol addresses currently associated with the transport endpoint specified by fd.

t_getstate(3) -- Get the current state of the transport provider

The t_getstate() function is a general utility function used to get the current state of the transport provider. The transport endpoint, which is specified by a file descriptor, is regarded as a finit...

t_listen(3) -- Listen for a connect request

The t_listen() function is an XTI connection-oriented service function that listens for a connect request from a calling transport user. The transport endpoint where the connect indications arrive is ...

t_look(3) -- Look at the current event on a transport endpoint.

The t_look() XTI function is used in connectionless and connection-oriented transport service to monitor the current event at the transport endpoint specified by a file descriptor previously returned ...

t_open(3) -- Establishes a transport endpoint

The t_open() XTI function must be the first one called when initializing a transport endpoint. Two modes of operation may be specified, synchronous and asynchronous. In synchronous mode, a transport u...

t_optmgmt(3) -- Manage protocol options for a transport endpoint

The t_optmgmt() XTI function is used in connectionless and connection-oriented transport service. The t_optmgmt() function associates specific optional parameters with a bound transport endpoint previ...

t_rcv(3) -- Receive normal data or expedited data on a connection

The t_rcv() function is an XTI connection-oriented service function that is used to receive normal or expedited data. The transport endpoint through which data arrives is specified by a file descripto...

t_rcvconnect(3) -- Receive the confirmation from a connect request

The t_rcvconnect() XTI function enables a calling transport user to determine the status of a previously sent connect request at a transport endpoint specified by a file descriptor returned by the t_o...

t_rcvdis(3) -- Retrieve disconnect information

The t_rcvdis() XTI connection-oriented function is used to identify the cause of a disconnect at a transport endpoint specified by a file descriptor returned by the t_open() function, and to retrieve ...

t_rcvrel(3) -- Acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication

The t_rcvrel() XTI function is used in connection-oriented mode to acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication at a transport endpoint. The released endpoint is specified by a file descriptor...

t_rcvreldata(3) -- Receive an orderly release indication or confirmation containing user data

The t_rcvreldata() function is an XTI connection mode service function that is used to receive an orderly release indication for the incoming direction of data transfer and to retrieve any user data s...

t_rcvudata(3) -- Receive a data unit

The t_rcvudata() function is an XTI connectionless service function that is used to receive a data unit from a remote transport provider user. By default, t_rcvudata() executes in the synchronous oper...

t_rcvuderr(3) -- Receive a unit data error indication

The t_rcvuderr() function is an XTI connectionless service function that is used to retrieve information about an error indication returned when a data unit was previously sent with a t_sndudata() cal...

t_rcvv(3) -- Receive data or expedited data sent over a connection

The t_rcvv() function receives data into the buffers specified by iov[0].iov_base, iov[1].iov_base, through iov[iovcount-1].iov_base, always filling one buffer before proceding to the next. Note The l...

t_rcvvudata(3) -- Receive data or expedited data sent over a

The t_rcvvudata() function is an XTI connectionless service function that is used to receive a data unit from another transport user. If the limit on iovcount is exceeded, the function fails with [TBA...

t_snd(3) -- Send normal data or expedited data over a connection

The t_snd() function is an XTI connection-oriented service function that is used to send normal or expedited data. The transport endpoint through which normal Transport Service Data Unit (TSDU) data o...

t_snddis(3) -- Send a user-initiated disconnect request

The t_snddis() XTI connection-oriented function is used to initiate an abortive disconnect at an established transport endpoint. The transport endpoint is specified by a file descriptor returned by th...

t_sndrel(3) -- Initiate an endpoint connect orderly release

The t_sndrel() XTI function is used in connection-oriented mode to initiate an orderly release at a transport endpoint specified by a file descriptor previously returned by the t_open() function. Afte...

t_sndreldata(3) -- Initiate or respond to an orderly release with user data

The t_sndreldata() function is an XTI connection mode service function that is used to initiate an orderly release of the outgoing direction of data transfer and to send user data with the release. Af...

t_sndudata(3) -- Send a data unit

The t_sndudata() function is an XTI connectionless service function that is used to send a data unit to a remote transport user. By default, t_sndudata() executes in the synchronous operating mode. Th...

t_sndv(3) -- Receive data or expedited data sent over a connection

The t_sndv() function sends data either normal or expedited data. The data is contained in buffers iov[0], iov[1], through iov[iovcount-1]. Note The limit on the total number of bytes available in all...

t_sndvudata(3) -- Send a data unit from one or more non-contiguous buffers

The t_sndvudata() function is an XTI connectionless service The data to be sent is identified by iov[0] through iov[iovcount-1]. Note The limit on the total number of bytes available in all buffers pa...

t_strerror(3) -- Produce an error message string

The t_strerror() function maps the error number in errnum that corresponds to an XTI error to a language-dependent error message string and returns a pointer to the string. The string pointed to will ...

t_sync(3) -- Synchronize transport library

The t_sync() XTI utility service function is used to synchronize data structures managed by the transport library with information from the underlying transport provider. The t_sync() function can be ...

t_sysconf(3) -- Initiate or respond to an orderly release with user data

The t_sysconf() routine provides a method for the application to determine the current value of configurable and implementation-dependent XTI limits or options. The the minimal set of XTI system varia...

t_unbind(3) -- Disable a transport endpoint.

The t_unbind() XTI service function is used in connectionoriented and connectionless modes to disable the transport endpoint, specified by the file descriptor that was previously bound by a t_bind() c...

ualarm(3) -- Sets or changes the timeout of interval timers.

Uil(3X) -- Invokes the UIL compiler from within an application

The Uil function provides a callable entry point for the UIL compiler. The Uil callable interface can be used to process a UIL source file and to generate UID files, as well as return a detailed descr...

UilDumpSymbolTable(3X) -- Dumps the contents of a named UIL symbol table to standard output

The UilDumpSymbolTable function dumps the contents of a UIL symbol table pointer to standard output. Specifies a pointer to the symbol table root entry. This value can be taken from the parse_tree_roo...

uitrunc(3) -- truncate a floating-point number

ulimit(3) -- Set and gets process limits

The ulimit() function controls process limits. During access to remote files, the process limits of the local node are used.

umount(3) -- Unmount a file system

The umount() function unmounts a previously-mounted file system contained on the block special file pointed to by the spec parameter. When the file system is unmounted, the directory mount point where...

unctrl(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

ungetc(3) -- Push a byte or wide-character code back into the input stream

The ungetc() function converts the byte specified by the c parameter into an unsigned char and inserts it into the buffer associated with the input stream specified by the stream parameter. This cause...

ungetch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

ungetwc(3) -- Push a byte or wide-character code back into the input stream

ungetwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

unget_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

unlockpt(3) -- Unlock a pseudoterminal master and slave pair

The unlockpt() function unlocks a slave pseudoterminal from its associated master counterpart. It does this by clearing a lock option so that the slave device can be opened.

unordered(3) -- Related miscellaneous IEEE arithmetic functions.

untouchwin(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

unwind(3) -- routines to unwind a context

UnwrapKey(3) -- Unwrap the wrapped key (CDSA)

UnwrapKeyP(3) -- Unwrap the wrapped keys with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_UnwrapKey(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the Application's privilege set (if the App...

use_env(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

usleep(3) -- Suspend execution for an interval of time

The usleep() function suspends the current process from execution for the number of microseconds specified by the useconds parameter. Because of other activity in the system, or because of the time sp...

usr2netname(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

utmpname(3) -- Access utmp file entries

valloc(3) -- Provide a memory allocator

varargs(3) -- Handle a variablelength parameter list

NOTE: When writing new code, it is recommended that you use stdarg instead of varargs. They both perform the same function, but stdarg is standards-compliant and varargs complies only with BSD convent...

va_arg(3) -- Handle a variablelength parameter list

va_end(3) -- Handle a variablelength parameter list

va_start(3) -- Handle a variablelength parameter list

VendorShell(3X) -- The VendorShell widget class

VendorShell is a Motif widget class used as a supporting superclass for all shell classes that are visible to the window manager and that are not override redirect. It contains resources that describe...

VerifyData(3) -- Verify input buffer data (CDSA)

VerifyDataFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged verify data function.

VerifyDataInit(3) -- Initialize the staged verify data (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged verify data function. For staged operations, a combination operation selecting both a digesting algorithm and a verification algorithm must be specified.

VerifyDataUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged verification (CDSA)

VerifyDevice(3) -- Cause the cryptographic module to perform a self verification and integrity check (CDSA)

This function triggers the cryptographic module to perform self verification and integrity checking.

VerifyMac(3) -- Verify the message authentication code (CDSA)

This function verifies the message authentication code over all data contained in the set of input buffers based on the input signature.

VerifyMacFinal(3) -- Finalize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function finalizes the staged message authentication code verification function.

VerifyMacInit(3) -- Initialize the staged message authentication code (CDSA)

This function initializes the staged message authentication code verification function.

VerifyMacUpdate(3) -- Continue the staged process of verifying the message authentication code (CDSA)

versw(3) -- Check the status of an operating system version switch on a single cluster member to determine wheth...

The VERSW() macro and versw() function check the status of a version switch on a single cluster member to determine whether the calling application can enable new features that are incompatible with t...

VERSW(3) -- Check the status of an operating system version switch on a single cluster member to determine wheth...

vfprintf(3) -- Format a variable number of parameters for output

The vprintf(), vfprintf(), vsnprintf(), and vsprintf() functions format and write stdarg parameter lists. These functions are the same as the printf(), fprintf(), snprintf(), and sprintf() functions, ...

vfwprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters from stdarg parameter list

The vwprintf(), vfwprintf(), and vswprintf() functions convert, format, and write stdarg parameter lists. These functions are the same as the wprintf(), fwprintf(), and swprintf() functions, respectiv...

vidattr(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

vidputs(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

vid_attr(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

vid_puts(3) -- Curses interfaces to the terminfo database

VirtualBindings(3X) -- Bindings for virtual mouse and key events

The 1/Motif manual pages describe translations in terms of virtual bindings, based on those described in the OSF/Motif Style Guide. Mouse events are described in terms of virtual buttons, and key even...

vline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

vline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

vprintf(3) -- Format a variable number of parameters for output

vsnprintf(3) -- Format a variable number of parameters for output

vsprintf(3) -- Format a variable number of parameters for output

vswprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters from stdarg parameter list

vwprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters from stdarg parameter list

vwprintw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

vwscanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

vw_printw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

vw_scanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

waddch(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

waddchnstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

waddchstr(3) -- Add string of characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

waddnstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

waddnwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

waddstr(3) -- Add a string of characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

waddwch(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

waddwchnstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

waddwchstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a Curses window

waddwstr(3) -- Add a string of wchar_t characters to a Curses window and advance cursor

wadd_wch(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

wadd_wchnstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

wadd_wchstr(3) -- Add an array of complex characters and rendition to a Curses window

wattroff(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

wattron(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

wattrset(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

wattr_get(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

wattr_off(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

wattr_on(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

wattr_set(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

wbkgd(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

wbkgdset(3) -- Routines for manipulating the background in a Curses window

wbkgrnd(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

wbkgrndset(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

wborder(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

wborder_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

wchgat(3) -- Change renditions of characters in a Curses window

wclear(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

wclrtobot(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

wclrtoeol(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

wcolor_set(3) -- Functions that control Curses window attributes

wcrtomb(3) -- Convert a wide character into a multibyte character

The wctomb() function converts a wide character into a multibyte character and stores the result in s. The wctomb() function stores no more than MB_CUR_MAX bytes in s and returns the number of bytes s...

wcscat(3) -- Perform operations on wide-character strings

The wcscat(), wcscmp(), and wcscpy() functions operate on null-terminated, wide-character strings. The string arguments to these functions are expected to contain a null wide character marking the end...

wcschr(3) -- Search for the first or last occurrence

The wcschr() function locates the first occurrence of the widecharacter parameter in the string pointed to by the wcstring parameter. The wcsrchr() function locates the last occurrence of the widechar...

wcscmp(3) -- Perform operations on wide-character strings

wcscoll(3) -- Compare wide-character strings by using collation information

The wcscoll() function compares the two wide-character strings pointed to by the wcs1 and wcs2 parameters based on the collation values specified by the LC_COLLATE category of the program's current l...

wcscpy(3) -- Perform operations on wide-character strings

wcscspn(3) -- Return the length of the initial segment

The wcsspn() and wcscspn() functions compute the number of wide characters in the initial segment of a wide-character string. The wcsspn() function considers the initial segment to consist of all wide...

wcsftime(3) -- Convert a date and time to a string

wcslen(3) -- Find length of wide-character string

The wcslen() function returns the number of wide characters, excluding the terminating null wide character, in the string pointed to by the wstr parameter.

wcsncat(3) -- Perform operations on widecharacter strings with a character count

The wcsncat(), wcsncmp(), and wcsncpy() functions operate on null-terminated, wide-character strings. The wcsncat() function appends wide characters from the wcstring2 parameter to the end of the wcst...

wcsncmp(3) -- Perform operations on widecharacter strings with a character count

wcsncpy(3) -- Perform operations on widecharacter strings with a character count

wcspbrk(3) -- Locate the first occurrence of a wide character

The wcspbrk() function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by the wcs1 parameter of any wide character from the string pointed to by the wcs2 parameter.

wcsrchr(3) -- Search for the first or last occurrence

wcsrtombs(3) -- Convert a wide-character string into

The wcstombs() function converts a wide-character string into a multibyte-character string and stores the result in a location pointed to by the s parameter. The wcstombs() function stores only the nu...

wcsspn(3) -- Return the length of the initial segment

wcsstr(3) -- Find a wide-character substring

The wcsstr() function locates the first occurrence in the wide-character string pointed to by the s1 parameter of the sequence of wide characters in the wide-character string pointed to by the s2 para...

wcstod(3) -- Convert a wide-character string to a double-precision value

The wcstod() function converts the initial portion of the wide-character string pointed to by the ws parameter to a double-precision floating-point value. The input widecharacter string is first broke...

wcstok(3) -- Split wide-character strings into tokens

The wcstok() function splits the wide-character string pointed to by the ws1 parameter into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide-character string pointed ...

wcstok_r(3) -- Split wide-character strings into tokens

wcstol(3) -- Convert a wide-character string to long integer

The wcstol() function converts the initial portion of the wide-character string pointed to by the nptr parameter to a long integer representation. The input wide-character string is first broken down ...

wcstold(3) -- Convert a wide-character string to a long double-precision value

The wcstold() function converts the initial portion of the wide-character string pointed to by the ws parameter to a long double-precision floating-point value. The input wide-character string is firs...

wcstombs(3) -- Convert a wide-character string into

wcstoul(3) -- Convert wide-character strings to unsigned long integer

The wcstoul() function converts the initial portion of the wide-character string pointed to by the nptr parameter to an unsigned long integer representation. The input widecharacter string is first br...

wcswcs(3) -- Searche for a substring in a wide-character string.

The wcswcs() function locates the first occurrence of a wide-character string in another wide-character string. The function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by the wcstring1 para...

wcswidth(3) -- Determine the display width of wide-character strings

The wcswidth() function determines the number of display columns to be occupied by the number of wide characters specified by the n parameter in the string pointed to by the pwcs parameter. The behavi...

wcsxfrm(3) -- Transform wide-character strings for collation in the current locale

The wcsxfrm() function is used to transform the wide-character string specified by the ws2 parameter into a string of wide-character codes based on the collation values of the wide characters in the c...

wctob(3) -- Convert a wide character to a single byte in

The wctob() function determines if a wide-character value constitutes a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state from a multibyte codeset. If so, the function returns the corresponding m...

wctomb(3) -- Convert a wide character into a multibyte character

wctrans(3) -- Map wide characters to a property

The wctrans() function constructs a wctrans_t value that maps wide characters in the current locale according to the specified property. Because all locales include ASCII letter characters through the...

wctype(3) -- Get a handle to classify wide characters

The wctype() function obtains a handle for valid property names for wide characters, as defined in the current locale. The handle can then be used as the wc_prop parameter in a subsequent call to the ...

wcursyncup(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

wcwidth(3) -- Determine the display width of wide characters

The wcwidth() function determines the number of display columns to be occupied by the wide character specified by the wc parameter. The behavior of the wcwidth() function is determined by the LC_CTYPE...

wdelch(3) -- Delete the character under the cursor in a Curses window

wdeleteln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

wechochar(3) -- Add a character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance the cursor

wechowchar(3) -- Add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a Curses window and advance cursor

wecho_wchar(3) -- Add a complex character and rendition to a Curses window and advance the cursor

werase(3) -- Clear all or part of a Curses window

wgetbkgrnd(3) -- Set or get background character and rendition by using a complex character

wgetch(3) -- Get (or push back) characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetnstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetnwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetn_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetstr(3) -- Get character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetwch(3) -- Get (or push back) wchar_t characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

wgetwstr(3) -- Get wchar_t character strings from a Curses terminal keyboard

wget_wch(3) -- Get (or push back) a wide character from Curses terminal keyboard

wget_wstr(3) -- Get an array of wide characters from a Curses terminal keyboard

whline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

whline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

winch(3) -- Get a character and its attributes from a Curses window

winchnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

winchstr(3) -- Get a string of characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

winnstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

winnwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

winsch(3) -- Insert a character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

winsdelln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

winsertln(3) -- Delete or insert lines in a Curses window

winsnstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

winsnwstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

winsstr(3) -- Insert a string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

winstr(3) -- Get a string of characters from a Curses window

winswch(3) -- Insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

winswstr(3) -- Insert a wchar_t string before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

wins_nwstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

wins_wch(3) -- Insert a complex character and rendition before the character under the cursor in a Curses window

wins_wstr(3) -- Insert a wide-character string into a Curses window

winwch(3) -- Get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a Curses window

winwchnstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

winwchstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a Curses window

winwstr(3) -- Get a string of wchar_t characters from a Curses window

win_wch(3) -- Input a complex character and rendition from a Curses window

These functions extract the complex character and rendition from the current or specified position in the current or specified window into the object pointed to by wcval.

win_wchnstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

win_wchstr(3) -- Input an array of complex characters and renditions from a Curses window

wmemchr(3) -- Perform

The wmemcpy(), wmemchr(), wmemcmp(), wmemset(), and wmemmove() functions operate on wide-character strings in memory areas. A memory area is a group of contiguous wide characters bound by a count and ...

wmemcmp(3) -- Perform

wmemcpy(3) -- Perform

wmemmove(3) -- Perform

wmemset(3) -- Perform

wmove(3) -- Move the Curses window cursor

WMShell(3X) -- The WMShell widget class

WMShell is a top-level widget that encapsulates the interaction with the window manager. Classes [Toc] [Back] WMShell inherits behavior and resources from Core, Composite, and Shell classes. The...

wnoutrefresh(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

wordexp(3) -- Perform word expansions

The wordexp() function performs word expansions equivalent to the word expansion that would be performed by the shell if the contents of the words parameter were arguments on the command line. The lis...

wordfree(3) -- Perform word expansions

wprintf(3) -- Print formatted output for wide characters

wprintw(3) -- Print formatted output in Curses windows

WrapKey(3) -- Wrap a key using the context (CDSA)

WrapKeyP(3) -- Wrap a key with privilege (CDSA)

This function is similar to CSSM_WrapKey(). It also accepts a USEE tag as a privilege request parameter. CSSM checks that either its own privilege set or the application's privilege set (if the appli...

wredrawln(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

wrefresh(3) -- Refresh Curses windows and lines

write_rnd(3) -- sets and returns IEEE dynamic rounding

wscanf(3) -- Convert formatted wide-character input

wscanw(3) -- Convert formatted input from a Curses window

wscrl(3) -- Scroll a Curses window

wsetscrreg(3) -- Routines for controlling output options for a Curses terminal

wstandend(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

wstandout(3) -- Curses character and window attribute control routines

wsyncdown(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

wsyncup(3) -- Routines that create Curses windows

wtimeout(3) -- Curses

wtouchln(3) -- Curses routines that control refresh

wunctrl(3) -- Miscellaneous utility routines for Curses

wvline(3) -- Create Curses borders, and horizontal and vertical lines

wvline_set(3) -- Draw borders or lines by using complex characters and renditions

Xau(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauFileName generates the default authorization file name by first checking the XAUTHORITY environment variable if set, else it returns $HOME/.Xauthority. This name is statically allocated and should ...

XauFileName(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauGetAuthByAddr(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauGetBestAuthByAddr(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauLockAuth(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauReadAuth(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauUnlockAuth(3X) -- X authority database routines

XauWriteAuth(3X) -- X authority database routines

xdr(3) -- library routines for external data representation

These routines allow C programmers to describe arbitrary data structures in a machine-independent fashion. Data for ONC remote procedure calls are transmitted using the following routines: A filter pr...

xdrmem_create(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdrrec_create(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdrrec_endofrecord(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdrrec_eof(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdrrec_skiprecord(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdrstdio_create(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_accepted_reply(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_array(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_authunix_parms(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_bool(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_bytes(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_callhdr(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_callmsg(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_char(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_destroy(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_double(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_enum(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_float(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_free(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_functions(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_getpos(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_hyper(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_inline(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_int(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_long(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_longlong_t(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_opaque(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_opaque_auth(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_pmap(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_pmaplist(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_pointer(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_reference(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_rejected_reply(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_replymsg(3) -- XDR library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xdr_setpos(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_short(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_string(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_union(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_char(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_hyper(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_int(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_long(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_longlong_t(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_u_short(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_vector(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_void(3) -- library routines for external data representation

xdr_wrapstring(3) -- library routines for external data representation

XmActivateProtocol(3X) -- A VendorShell function that activates a protocol

XmActivateProtocol activates a protocol. It updates the handlers and the property if the shell is realized. It is sometimes useful to allow a protocol's state information (callback lists, and so on) ...

XmActivateWMProtocol(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that activates a protocol

XmActivateWMProtocol is a convenience interface. It calls XmActivateProtocol with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the protocol pr...

XmAddProtocolCallback(3X) -- A VendorShell function that adds client callbacks for a protocol

XmAddProtocolCallback adds client callbacks for a protocol. It checks if the protocol is registered, and if it is not, calls XmAddProtocols. It then adds the callback to the internal list. These callb...

XmAddProtocols(3X) -- A VendorShell function that adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates the internal ta...

XmAddProtocols adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates the internal tables. XmAddWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocols with the property value set to the ato...

XmAddTabGroup(3X) -- A function that adds a manager or a primitive widget to the list of tab groups

This function is obsolete and its behavior is replaced by setting XmNnavigationType to XmEXCLUSIVE_TAB_GROUP. When using the keyboard to traverse through a widget hierarchy, primitive or manager widge...

XmAddWMProtocolCallback(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that adds client callbacks for a protocol

XmAddWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the proto...

XmAddWMProtocols(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates th...

XmAddWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the protocol property i...

XmArrowButton(3X) -- The ArrowButton widget class

ArrowButton consists of a directional arrow surrounded by a border shadow. When it is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the ArrowButton has been pressed in. When the ArrowButton...

XmArrowButtonGadget(3X) -- The ArrowButtonGadget widget class

ArrowButtonGadget consists of a directional arrow surrounded by a border shadow. When it is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the ArrowButtonGadget has been pressed in. When it ...

XmBulletinBoard(3X) -- The BulletinBoard widget class

BulletinBoard is a composite widget that provides simple geometry management for children widgets. It does not force positioning on its children, but can be set to reject geometry requests that result...

XmCascadeButton(3X) -- The CascadeButton widget class

CascadeButton links two MenuPanes or a MenuBar to a MenuPane. It is used in menu systems and must have a RowColumn parent with its XmNrowColumnType resource set to XmMENU_BAR, XmMENU_POPUP or XmMENU_P...

XmCascadeButtonGadget(3X) -- The CascadeButtonGadget widget class

CascadeButtonGadget links two MenuPanes, a MenuBar to a MenuPane, or an OptionMenu to a MenuPane. It is used in menu systems and must have a RowColumn parent with its XmNrowColumnType resource set to ...

XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight(3X) -- A CascadeButtonGadget function that sets the highlight state

XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight either draws or erases the shadow highlight around the CascadeButtonGadget. Specifies the CascadeButtonGadget to be highlighted or unhighlighted. Specifies whether to hi...

XmCascadeButtonHighlight(3X) -- A CascadeButton and CascadeButtonGadget function that sets the highlight state

XmCascadeButtonHighlight either draws or erases the shadow highlight around the CascadeButton or the CascadeButtonGadget. Specifies the CascadeButton or CascadeButtonGadget to be highlighted or unhigh...

XmChangeColor(3X) -- Recalculates all associated colors of a widget

XmChangeColor handles all color modifications for the specified widget when a new background pixel value is specified. The function recalculates the foreground, select, and shadow colors based on the ...

XmClipboardCancelCopy(3X) -- A clipboard function that cancels a copy to the clipboard

XmClipboardCancelCopy cancels the copy to clipboard that is in progress and frees up temporary storage. When a copy is to be performed, XmClipboardStartCopy allocates temporary storage for the clipboa...

XmClipboardCopy(3X) -- A clipboard function that copies a data item to temporary storage for later copying to clipboard

XmClipboardCopy copies a data item to temporary storage. The data item is moved from temporary storage to the clipboard data structure when a call to XmClipboardEndCopy is made. Additional calls to Xm...

XmClipboardCopyByName(3X) -- A clipboard function that copies a data item passed by name

XmClipboardCopyByName copies the actual data for a data item that was previously passed by name to the clipboard. Data is considered to be passed by name when a call to XmClipboardCopy is made with a ...

XmClipboardEndCopy(3X) -- A clipboard function that ends a copy to the clipboard

XmClipboardEndCopy locks the clipboard from access by other applications, places data in the clipboard data structure, and unlocks the clipboard. Data items copied to the clipboard by XmClipboardCopy ...

XmClipboardEndRetrieve(3X) -- A clipboard function that ends a copy from the clipboard

XmClipboardEndRetrieve suspends copying data incrementally from the clipboard. It tells the clipboard routines that the application is through copying an item from the clipboard. Until this function i...

XmClipboardInquireCount(3X) -- A clipboard function that returns the number of data item formats

XmClipboardInquireCount returns the number of data item formats available for the data item in the clipboard. This function also returns the maximum name-length for all formats in which the data item ...

XmClipboardInquireFormat(3X) -- A clipboard function that returns a specified format name

XmClipboardInquireFormat returns a specified format name for the data item in the clipboard. If the name must be truncated, the function returns a warning status. Specifies a pointer to the Display st...

XmClipboardInquireLength(3X) -- A clipboard function that returns the length of the stored data

XmClipboardInquireLength returns the length of the data stored under a specified format name for the clipboard data item. If no data is found for the specified format, or if there is no item on the cl...

XmClipboardInquirePendingItems(3X) -- A clipboard function that returns a list of data_id/private_id pairs

XmClipboardInquirePendingItems returns a list of data_id/private_id pairs for the specified format name. A data item is considered pending if the application originally passed it by name, the applicat...

XmClipboardLock(3X) -- A clipboard function that locks the clipboard

XmClipboardLock locks the clipboard from access by another application until XmClipboardUnlock is called. All clipboard functions lock and unlock the clipboard to prevent simultaneous access. This fun...

XmClipboardRegisterFormat(3X) -- A clipboard function that registers a new format

XmClipboardRegisterFormat registers a new format. Each format stored on the clipboard should have a length associated with it; this length must be known to the clipboard routines. Formats are known as...

XmClipboardRetrieve(3X) -- A clipboard function that retrieves a data item from the clipboard

XmClipboardRetrieve retrieves the current data item from clipboard storage. It returns a warning if the clipboard is locked; if there is no data on the clipboard; or if the data needs to be truncated ...

XmClipboardStartCopy(3X) -- A clipboard function that sets up a storage and data structure

XmClipboardStartCopy sets up storage and data structures to receive clipboard data. An application calls this function during a cut or copy operation. The data item that these structures receive then ...

XmClipboardStartRetrieve(3X) -- A clipboard function that starts a copy from the clipboard

XmClipboardStartRetrieve tells the clipboard routines that the application is ready to start copying an item from the clipboard. The clipboard is locked by this routine and stays locked until XmClipbo...

XmClipboardUndoCopy(3X) -- A clipboard function that deletes the last item placed on the clipboard

XmClipboardUndoCopy deletes the last item placed on the clipboard if the item was placed there by an application with the passed display and window arguments. Any data item deleted from the clipboard ...

XmClipboardUnlock(3X) -- A clipboard function that unlocks the clipboard

XmClipboardUnlock unlocks the clipboard, enabling it to be accessed by other applications. If multiple calls to XmClipboardLock have occurred, the same number of calls to XmClipboardUnlock is necessar...

XmClipboardWithdrawFormat(3X) -- A clipboard function that indicates that the application no longer wants to supply a data item

XmClipboardWithdrawFormat indicates that the application no longer supplies a data item to the clipboard that the application had previously passed by name. Specifies a pointer to the Display structur...

XmCommand(3X) -- The Command widget class

Command is a special-purpose composite widget for command entry that provides a built-in command-history mechanism. Command includes a command-line text-input field, a command-line prompt, and a comma...

XmCommandAppendValue(3X) -- A Command function that appends the passed XmString to the end of the string displayed in the comman...

XmCommandAppendValue appends the passed XmString to the end of the string displayed in the command area of the Command widget. Specifies the Command widget ID Specifies the passed XmString For a compl...

XmCommandError(3X) -- A Command function that displays an error message

XmCommandError displays an error message in the history area of the Command widget. The XmString error is displayed until the next command entered occurs. Specifies the Command widget ID Specifies the...

XmCommandGetChild(3X) -- A Command function that is used to access a component

XmCommandGetChild is used to access a component within a Command. The parameters given to the function are the Command widget and a value indicating which component to access. Specifies the Command wi...

XmCommandSetValue(3X) -- A Command function that replaces a displayed string

XmCommandSetValue replaces the string displayed in the command area of the Command widget with the passed XmString. Specifies the Command widget ID Specifies the passed XmString For a complete definit...

XmConvertUnits(3X) -- A function that converts a value in one unit type to another unit type

XmConvertUnits converts the value and returns it as the return value from the function. Specifies the widget for which the data is to be converted Specifies whether the converter uses the horizontal o...

XmCreateArrowButton(3X) -- The ArrowButton widget creation function

XmCreateArrowButton creates an instance of an ArrowButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument li...

XmCreateArrowButtonGadget(3X) -- The ArrowButtonGadget creation function

XmCreateArrowButtonGadget creates an instance of an ArrowButtonGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the...

XmCreateBulletinBoard(3X) -- The BulletinBoard widget creation function

XmCreateBulletinBoard creates an instance of a BulletinBoard widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument...

XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog(3X) -- The BulletinBoard BulletinBoardDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged BulletinBoard child of the DialogShell. A BulletinBoardDialog is used for interactions not su...

XmCreateCascadeButton(3X) -- The CascadeButton widget creation function

XmCreateCascadeButton creates an instance of a CascadeButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID. The parent must be a RowColumn widget. Specifies the name of t...

XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget(3X) -- The CascadeButtonGadget creation function

XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget creates an instance of a CascadeButtonGadget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID. The parent must be a RowColumn widget. Specifies the name...

XmCreateCommand(3X) -- The Command widget creation function

XmCreateCommand creates an instance of a Command widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specif...

XmCreateDialogShell(3X) -- The DialogShell widget creation function

XmCreateDialogShell creates an instance of a DialogShell widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument lis...

XmCreateDragIcon(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that creates a DragIcon widget

XmCreateDragIcon creates a DragIcon and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the ID of the widget that the function uses to access default values for visual attributes of the DragIcon. This wid...

XmCreateDrawingArea(3X) -- The DrawingArea widget creation function

XmCreateDrawingArea creates an instance of a DrawingArea widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument lis...

XmCreateDrawnButton(3X) -- The DrawnButton widget creation function

XmCreateDrawnButton creates an instance of a DrawnButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument lis...

XmCreateErrorDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox ErrorDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateErrorDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. An ErrorDialog warns the user of an invalid or potentially dange...

XmCreateFileSelectionBox(3X) -- The FileSelectionBox widget creation function

XmCreateFileSelectionBox creates an unmanaged FileSelectionBox. A FileSelectionBox is used to select a file and includes the following: An editable text field for the directory mask A scrolling list o...

XmCreateFileSelectionDialog(3X) -- The FileSelectionBox FileSelectionDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateFileSelectionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged FileSelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A FileSelectionDialog selects a file. It includes ...

XmCreateForm(3X) -- The Form widget creation function

XmCreateForm creates an instance of a Form widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies th...

XmCreateFormDialog(3X) -- A Form FormDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateFormDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged Form child of the DialogShell. A FormDialog is used for interactions not supported by the standard dia...

XmCreateFrame(3X) -- The Frame widget creation function

XmCreateFrame creates an instance of a Frame widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies ...

XmCreateInformationDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox InformationDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateInformationDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. An InformationDialog gives the user information, such as t...

XmCreateLabel(3X) -- The Label widget creation function

XmCreateLabel creates an instance of a Label widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies ...

XmCreateLabelGadget(3X) -- The LabelGadget creation function

XmCreateLabelGadget creates an instance of a LabelGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument lis...

XmCreateList(3X) -- The List widget creation function

XmCreateList creates an instance of a List widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies th...

XmCreateMainWindow(3X) -- The MainWindow widget creation function

XmCreateMainWindow creates an instance of a MainWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list ...

XmCreateMenuBar(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. It is provided as a convenience function for creating RowColumn widgets configured to...

XmCreateMenuShell(3X) -- The MenuShell widget creation function

XmCreateMenuShell creates an instance of a MenuShell widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Sp...

XmCreateMessageBox(3X) -- The MessageBox widget creation function

XmCreateMessageBox creates an unmanaged MessageBox. A MessageBox is used for common interaction tasks, which include giving information, asking questions, and reporting errors. It includes an optional...

XmCreateMessageDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox MessageDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateMessageDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A MessageDialog is used for common interaction tasks, which in...

XmCreateOptionMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. It is provided as a convenience function for creating a RowColumn widget config...

XmCreatePanedWindow(3X) -- The PanedWindow widget creation function

XmCreatePanedWindow creates an instance of a PanedWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument lis...

XmCreatePopupMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreatePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. When using this function to create the Popup MenuPane, a MenuShell widget is auto...

XmCreatePromptDialog(3X) -- The SelectionBox PromptDialog convenience creation function

XmCreatePromptDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged SelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A PromptDialog prompts the user for text input. It includes a...

XmCreatePulldownMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreatePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. When using this function to create the Pulldown MenuPane, a MenuShell widge...

XmCreatePushButton(3X) -- The PushButton widget creation function

XmCreatePushButton creates an instance of a PushButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list ...

XmCreatePushButtonGadget(3X) -- The PushButtonGadget creation function

XmCreatePushButtonGadget creates an instance of a PushButtonGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the ar...

XmCreateQuestionDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox QuestionDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateQuestionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A QuestionDialog is used to get the answer to a question from...

XmCreateRadioBox(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. Typically, this is a composite widget that contains multiple ToggleButtonGadgets. T...

XmCreateRowColumn(3X) -- The RowColumn widget creation function

XmCreateRowColumn creates an instance of a RowColumn widget and returns the associated widget ID. If XmNrowColumnType is not specified, then it is created with XmWORK_AREA, which is the default. If th...

XmCreateScale(3X) -- The Scale widget creation function

XmCreateScale creates an instance of a Scale widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies ...

XmCreateScrollBar(3X) -- The ScrollBar widget creation function

XmCreateScrollBar creates an instance of a ScrollBar widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Sp...

XmCreateScrolledList(3X) -- The List ScrolledList convenience creation function

XmCreateScrolledList creates an instance of a List widget that is contained within a ScrolledWindow. All ScrolledWindow subarea widgets are automatically created by this function. The ID returned by t...

XmCreateScrolledText(3X) -- The TextScrolledText convenience creation function

XmCreateScrolledText creates an instance of a Text widget that is contained within a ScrolledWindow. All ScrolledWindow subarea widgets are automatically created by this function. The ID returned by t...

XmCreateScrolledWindow(3X) -- The ScrolledWindow widget creation function

XmCreateScrolledWindow creates an instance of a ScrolledWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argume...

XmCreateSelectionBox(3X) -- The SelectionBox widget creation function

XmCreateSelectionBox creates an unmanaged SelectionBox. A SelectionBox is used to get a selection from a list of alternatives from the user and includes the following: A scrolling list of alternatives...

XmCreateSelectionDialog(3X) -- The SelectionBox SelectionDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateSelectionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged SelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A SelectionDialog offers the user a choice from a list of ...

XmCreateSeparator(3X) -- The Separator widget creation function

XmCreateSeparator creates an instance of a Separator widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Sp...

XmCreateSeparatorGadget(3X) -- The SeparatorGadget creation function

XmCreateSeparatorGadget creates an instance of a SeparatorGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argu...

XmCreateSimpleCheckBox(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimpleCheckBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a CheckBox and its ToggleButtonGadget children. A CheckB...

XmCreateSimpleMenuBar(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimpleMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a MenuBar and its CascadeButtonGadget children. The name o...

XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates an Option Menu and its submenu containing PushButton...

XmCreateSimplePopupMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimplePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a Popup MenuPane and its button children. The name of ...

XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a Pulldown MenuPane and its button children. The...

XmCreateSimpleRadioBox(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmCreateSimpleRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a Radio Box and its ToggleButtonGadget children. The nam...

XmCreateTemplateDialog(3X) -- A MessageBox TemplateDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateTemplateDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. The MessageBox widget's XmNdialogType resource is set to XmD...

XmCreateText(3X) -- The Text widget creation function

XmCreateText creates an instance of a Text widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Specifies th...

XmCreateTextField(3X) -- The TextField widget creation function

XmCreateTextField creates an instance of a TextField widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument list Sp...

XmCreateToggleButton(3X) -- The ToggleButton widget creation function

XmCreateToggleButton creates an instance of a ToggleButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argument l...

XmCreateToggleButtonGadget(3X) -- The ToggleButtonGadget creation function

XmCreateToggleButtonGadget creates an instance of a ToggleButtonGadget and returns the associated widget ID. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifies the name of the created widget Specifies the argum...

XmCreateWarningDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox WarningDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateWarningDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A WarningDialog warns users of action consequences and gives t...

XmCreateWorkArea(3X) -- A function that creates a RowColumn work area

XmCreateWorkArea creates an instance of a RowColumn widget and returns the associated widget ID. The widget is created with XmNrowColumnType set to XmWORK_AREA. Specifies the parent widget ID Specifie...

XmCreateWorkingDialog(3X) -- The MessageBox WorkingDialog convenience creation function

XmCreateWorkingDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A WorkingDialog informs users that there is a time-consuming o...

XmCvtCTToXmString(3X) -- A compound string function that converts compound text to a compound string

XmCvtCTToXmString converts a (char *) string in compound text format to a compound string. The application must call XtAppInitialize before calling this function. Conversion of compound text to compou...

XmCvtStringToUnitType(3X) -- A function that converts a string

XmCvtStringToUnitType converts a string to a unit type. Refer to the man pages for XmGadget(3X), XmManager(3X), or XmPrimitive(3X) for a description of the valid unit types. Use of this function as a ...

XmCvtXmStringToCT(3X) -- A compound string function that converts a compound string to compound text

XmCvtXmStringToCT converts a compound string to a (char *) string in compound text format. The application must call XtAppInitialize before calling this function. The converter uses the font list tag ...

XmDeactivateProtocol(3X) -- A VendorShell function that deactivates a protocol without removing it

XmDeactivateProtocol deactivates a protocol without removing it. It updates the handlers and the property, if the shell is realized. It is sometimes useful to allow a protocol's state information (ca...

XmDeactivateWMProtocol(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that deactivates a protocol without removing it

XmDeactivateWMProtocol is a convenience interface. It calls XmDeactivateProtocol with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the protoco...

XmDestroyPixmap(3X) -- A pixmap caching function that removes a pixmap from the pixmap cache

XmDestroyPixmap removes pixmaps that are no longer used. Pixmaps are completely freed only when there is no further reference to them. Specifies the display screen for which the pixmap was requested S...

XmDialogShell(3X) -- The DialogShell widget class

Modal and modeless dialogs use DialogShell as the Shell parent. DialogShell widgets cannot be iconified. Instead, all secondary DialogShell widgets associated with an ApplicationShell widget are iconi...

XmDisplay(3X) -- The Display widget class

The XmDisplay object is used by the Motif widgets to store information that is specific to a display. It also allows the toolkit to access certain information on widget hierarchies that would otherwis...

XmDragCancel(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that terminates a drag transaction

XmDragCancel terminates a drag operation and cancels any pending actions of the specified DragContext. This routine can only be called by the initiator client. Specifies the ID of the DragContext widg...

XmDragContext(3X) -- The DragContext widget class

DragContexts are special widgets used in drag and drop transactions. A DragContext is implemented as a widget, but a client does not explicitly create a DragContext widget. Instead, a client initiates...

XmDragIcon(3X) -- The DragIcon widget class

A DragIcon is a component of the visual used to represent the source data in a drag and drop transaction. During a drag operation, a real or simulated X cursor provides drag-over visuals consisting of...

XmDragStart(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that initiates a drag and drop transaction

XmDragStart initiates a drag operation. This routine returns the DragContext widget that it initializes for the associated drag transaction. The toolkit is responsible for freeing the DragContext when...

XmDrawingArea(3X) -- The DrawingArea widget class

DrawingArea is an empty widget that is easily adaptable to a variety of purposes. It does no drawing and defines no behavior except for invoking callbacks. Callbacks notify the application when graphi...

XmDrawnButton(3X) -- The DrawnButton widget class

The DrawnButton widget consists of an empty widget window surrounded by a shadow border. It provides the application developer with a graphics area that can have PushButton input semantics. Callback t...

XmDropSite(3X) -- The DropSite Registry

A client registers a widget or gadget as a drop site using the XmDropSiteRegister function. In addition, this routine defines the behavior and capabilities of a drop site by specifying appropriate res...

XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that reorders a stack of widgets that are registered drop sites

XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder changes the stacking order of the drop site specified by widget. The stacking order controls the manner in which drag-under effects are clipped by overlapping siblings...

XmDropSiteEndUpdate(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that facilitates processing updates to multiple drop sites

XmDropSiteEndUpdate is used in conjunction with XmDropSiteStartUpdate to process updates to multiple drop sites within the same hierarchy. XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate signal the begi...

XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that returns the parent, a list of children, and the number of children for...

XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder obtains the parent, a list of children registered as drop sites, and the number of children registered as drop sites for a given widget. The children are listed in current...

XmDropSiteRegister(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that identifies a drop site and assigns resources that specify its behavior

XmDropSiteRegister identifies the specified widget or gadget as a drop site and sets resource values that define the drop site's behavior. The routine assigns default values to any resources that are...

XmDropSiteRetrieve(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that retrieves resource values set on a drop site

XmDropSiteRetrieve extracts values for the given resources from the drop site specified by widget. An initiator can also obtain information about the current drop site by passing the associated DragCo...

XmDropSiteStartUpdate(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that facilitates processing updates to multiple drop sites

XmDropSiteStartUpdate is used in conjunction with XmDropSiteEndUpdate to process updates to multiple drop sites within the same shell widget. XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate signal the b...

XmDropSiteUnregister(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that frees drop site information

XmDropSiteUnregister informs the toolkit that the specified widget is no longer a registered drop site. The function frees all associated drop site information. Specifies the ID of the widget, registe...

XmDropSiteUpdate(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that sets resource values for a drop site

XmDropSiteUpdate modifies drop site resources associated with the specified widget. This routine updates the drop site resources specified in the arglist. Specifies the ID of the widget registered as ...

XmDropTransfer(3X) -- The DropTransfer widget class

DropTransfer provides a set of resources that identifies the procedures and associated information required by the toolkit in order to process and complete a drop transaction. Clients should not expli...

XmDropTransferAdd(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that enables additional drop transfer entries to be processed after initiat...

XmDropTransferAdd identifies a list of additional drop transfer entries to be processed after a drop transfer is started. Specifies the ID of the DropTransfer widget returned by XmDropTransferStart Sp...

XmDropTransferStart(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that initiates a drop transfer

XmDropTransferStart initiates a drop transfer and uses the specified argument list to initialize an XmDropTransfer object. The DropTransfer object can be manipulated with XtSetValues and XtGetValues u...

XmFileSelectionBox(3X) -- The FileSelectionBox widget class

FileSelectionBox traverses through directories, views the files and subdirectories in them, and then selects files. A FileSelectionBox has five main areas: A text input field for displaying and editin...

XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild(3X) -- A FileSelectionBox function used to access a component

XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a FileSelectionBox. The parameters given to the function are the FileSelectionBox widget and a value indicating which component to acces...

XmFileSelectionDoSearch(3X) -- A FileSelectionBox function that initiates a directory search

XmFileSelectionDoSearch initiates a directory and file search in a FileSelectionBox widget. For a description of the actions that the FileSelectionBox takes when doing a search, see XmFileSelectionBox...

XmFontList(3X) -- Data type for a font list

XmFontList is the data type for a font list. A font list consists of font list entries, each of which contains a font or a font set (a group of fonts) and is identified with a tag. The font list entry...

XmFontListAdd(3X) -- A font list function that creates a new font list

XmFontListAdd creates a new font list consisting of the contents of the oldlist and the new font-list element being added. This function deallocates the oldlist after extracting the required informati...

XmFontListAppendEntry(3X) -- A font list function that appends an entry to a font list

XmFontListAppendEntry creates a new font list that contains the contents of oldlist. This function copies the contents of the font list entry being added into this new font list. If oldlist is NULL, X...

XmFontListCopy(3X) -- A font list function that copies a font list

XmFontListCopy creates a new font list consisting of the contents of the fontlist argument. Specifies a font list to be copied

XmFontListCreate(3X) -- A font list function that creates a font list

XmFontListCreate creates a new font list with a single element specified by the provided font and character set. It also allocates the space for the font list. Note This function is obsolete and exist...

XmFontListEntryCreate(3X) -- A font list function that creates a font list entry

XmFontListEntryCreate creates a font list entry that contains either a font or font set and is identified by a tag. Specifies a NULL terminated string for the tag of the font list entry. The tag may b...

XmFontListEntryFree(3X) -- A font list function that recovers memory used by a font list entry

XmFontListEntryFree recovers memory used by a font list entry. This routine does not free the XFontSet or XFontStruct associated with the font list entry. Specifies the font list entry to be freed

XmFontListEntryGetFont(3X) -- A font list function that retrieves font information from a font list entry

XmFontListEntryGetFont retrieves font information for a specified font list entry. If the font list entry contains a font, type_return returns XmFONT_IS_FONT and the function returns a pointer to an X...

XmFontListEntryGetTag(3X) -- A font list function that retrieves the tag of a font list entry

XmFontListEntryGetTag retrieves a copy of the tag of the specified font list entry. This routine allocates memory for the tag string that must be freed by the application. Specifies the font list entr...

XmFontListEntryLoad(3X) -- A font list function that loads a font or creates a font set and creates an accompanying font list e...

XmFontListEntryLoad loads a font or creates a font set based on the value of the type argument. It creates and returns a font list entry that contains the font or font set and the specified tag. If th...

XmFontListFree(3X) -- A font list function that recovers memory used by a font list

XmFontListFree recovers memory used by a font list. This routine does not free the XFontSet or XFontStruct associated with the specified font list. Specifies the font list to be freed

XmFontListFreeFontContext(3X) -- A font list function that instructs the toolkit that the font list context is no longer needed

XmFontListFreeFontContext instructs the toolkit that the context is no longer needed and will not be used without reinitialization. Specifies the font list context structure that was allocated by the ...

XmFontListGetNextFont(3X) -- A font list function that allows applications to access the fonts and character sets in a font list

XmFontListGetNextFont accesses the character set and font for the next entry of the font list. The application first uses the XmFontListInitFontContext routine to create a font list context. The appli...

XmFontListInitFontContext(3X) -- A font list function that allows applications to access the entries in a font list

XmFontListInitFontContext establishes a context to allow applications to access the contents of a font list. This context is used when reading the font list entry tag, font, or font set associated wit...

XmFontListNextEntry(3X) -- A font list function that returns the next entry in a font list

XmFontListNextEntry returns the next entry in the font list. The application uses the XmFontListInitFontContext routine to create a font list context. The first call to XmFontListNextEntry sets the co...

XmFontListRemoveEntry(3X) -- A font list function that removes a font list entry from a font list

XmFontListRemoveEntry creates a new font list that contains the contents of oldlist minus those entries specified in entry. The routine removes any entries from oldlist that match the components (tag,...

XmForm(3X) -- The Form widget class

Form is a container widget with no input semantics of its own. Constraints are placed on children of the Form to define attachments for each of the child's four sides. These attachments can be to the...

XmFrame(3X) -- The Frame widget class

Frame is a very simple manager used to enclose a single work area child in a border drawn by Frame. It uses the Manager class resources for border drawing and performs geometry management so that its ...

XmGadget(3X) -- The Gadget widget class

Gadget is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other gadget classes. It handles shadow-border drawing and highlighting, traversal activation and deactivation, and various callback lists ...

XmGetAtomName(3X) -- A function that returns the string representation for an atom

XmGetAtomName returns the string representation for an atom. It mirrors the Xlib interfaces for atom management but provides client-side caching. When and where caching is provided in Xlib, the routin...

XmGetColorCalculation(3X) -- A function to get the procedure used for default color calculation

XmGetColorCalculation returns the procedure being used to calculate default colors. For a description of XmColorProc, see XmSetColorCalculation(3X).

XmGetColors(3X) -- A function that generates foreground, select, and shadow colors

XmGetColors takes a screen, a colormap, and a background pixel, and it returns pixel values for foreground, select, and shadow colors. Specifies the screen for which these colors should be allocated. ...

XmGetDestination(3X) -- A function that returns the widget ID of the widget to be used as the current destination for quick ...

XmGetDestination returns the widget that is the current destination on the specified display. The destination is generally the last editable widget on which a select, edit, insert, or paste operation ...

XmGetDragContext(3X) -- A Drag and Drop function that retrieves the DragContext widget ID associated with a timestamp

XmGetDragContext returns the widget ID of the active DragContext associated with a given display and timestamp. A timestamp uniquely identifies which DragContext is active when more than one drag and ...

XmGetFocusWidget(3X) -- Returns the ID of the widget that has keyboard focus

XmGetFocusWidget examines the hierarchy that contains the specified widget and returns the ID of the widget that has keyboard focus. The function extracts the widget ID from the associated Shell widge...

XmGetMenuCursor(3X) -- A function that returns the cursor ID for the current menu cursor

XmGetMenuCursor queries the menu cursor currently being used by this client on the specified display and returns the cursor ID. This function returns the menu cursor for the default screen of the disp...

XmGetPixmap(3X) -- A pixmap caching function that generates a pixmap, stores it in a pixmap cache, and returns the pixm...

XmGetPixmap uses the parameter data to perform a lookup in the pixmap cache to see if a pixmap has already been generated that matches the data. If one is found, a reference count is incremented and t...

XmGetPixmapByDepth(3X) -- A pixmap caching function that generates a pixmap, stores it in a pixmap cache, and returns the pixm...

XmGetPixmapByDepth uses the parameter data to perform a lookup in the pixmap cache to see if a pixmap has already been generated that matches the data. If one is found, a reference count is incremente...

XmGetPostedFromWidget(3X) -- A RowColumn function that returns the widget from which a menu was posted

XmGetPostedFromWidget returns the widget from which a menu was posted. For torn-off menus, this function returns the widget from which the menu was originally torn. An application can use this routine...

XmGetSecondaryResourceData(3X) -- A function that provides access to secondary widget resource data

Some Motif widget classes (such as Gadget, Text, and VendorShell) have resources that are not accessible via the functions XtGetResourceList and XtGetConstraintResourceList. To retrieve the descriptio...

XmGetTabGroup(3X) -- Returns the widget ID of a tab group

XmGetTabGroup returns the widget ID of the tab group that contains the specified widget. Specifies a widget ID within a tab group

XmGetTearOffControl(3X) -- A RowColumn function that obtains

XmGetTearOffControl provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID of the internally created tear-off control in a tear-off menu. RowColumn creates a tear-off control for a Pulldo...

XmGetVisibility(3X) -- A function that determines if a widget is visible

XmGetVisibility returns the visibility state of the specified widget. Specifies the ID of the widget

XmGetXmDisplay(3X) -- A Display function that returns the XmDisplay object ID for a specified display

Display resources by using XtGetValues. Specifies the display for which the XmDisplay object ID is to be returned For a complete definition of Display and its associated resources, see XmDisplay(3X).

XmGetXmScreen(3X) -- A Screen function that returns the XmScreen object ID for a specified screen

XmGetXmScreen returns the XmScreen object ID associated with a screen. The application can access and manipulate Screen resources by using XtGetValues and XtSetValues. Specifies the screen for which t...

XmInstallImage(3X) -- A pixmap caching function that adds an image to the pixmap cache

XmInstallImage stores an image in an image cache that can later be used to generate a pixmap. Part of the installation process is to extend the resource converter used to reference these images. The r...

XmInternAtom(3X) -- A function that returns an atom for a given name

XmInternAtom returns an atom for a given name. It mirrors the Xlib interfaces for atom management, but provides client-side caching. When and where caching is provided in Xlib, the routines will becom...

XmIsMotifWMRunning(3X) -- A function that determines whether the window manager is running

XmIsMotifWMRunning lets a user know whether the Motif Window Manager is running on a screen that contains a specific widget hierarchy. This function first sees whether the _MOTIF_WM_INFO property is p...

XmIsTraversable(3X) -- A function that identifies whether a widget can be traversed

XmIsTraversable determines whether the specified widget is eligible to receive focus through keyboard traversal. In general, a widget is eligible to receive focus when all of the following conditions ...

XmLabel(3X) -- The Label widget class

Label is an instantiable widget and is also used as a superclass for other button widgets, such as PushButton and ToggleButton. The Label widget does not accept any button or key input, and the help c...

XmLabelGadget(3X) -- The LabelGadget widget class

LabelGadget is an instantiable widget and is also used as a superclass for other button gadgets, such as PushButtonGadget and ToggleButtonGadget. LabelGadget can contain either text or a pixmap. Label...

XmList(3X) -- The List widget class

List allows a user to select one or more items from a group of choices. Items are selected from the list in a variety of ways, using both the pointer and the keyboard. List operates on an array of com...

XmListAddItem(3X) -- A List function that adds an item to the list

XmListAddItem adds an item to the list at the given position. When the item is inserted into the list, it is compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If the new item matches an item on the sel...

XmListAddItems(3X) -- A List function that adds items to the list

XmListAddItems adds the specified items to the list at the given position. The first item_count items of the items array are added to the list. When the items are inserted into the list, they are comp...

XmListAddItemsUnselected(3X) -- A List function that adds items to a list

XmListAddItemsUnselected adds the specified items to the list at the given position. The inserted items remain unselected, even if they currently appear in the XmNselectedItems list. Specifies the ID ...

XmListAddItemUnselected(3X) -- A List function that adds an item to the list

XmListAddItemUnselected adds an item to the list at the given position. The item does not appear selected, even if it matches an item in the current XmNselectedItems list. Specifies the ID of the List...

XmListDeleteAllItems(3X) -- A List function that deletes all items from the list

XmListDeleteAllItems deletes all items from the list. Specifies the ID of the List from whose list the items are deleted For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3X).

XmListDeleteItem(3X) -- A List function that deletes an item from the list

XmListDeleteItem deletes the first item in the list that matches item. A warning message appears if the item does not exist. Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deleted Specifies t...

XmListDeleteItems(3X) -- A List function that deletes items from the list

XmListDeleteItems deletes the specified items from the list. For each element of items, the first item in the list that matches that element is deleted. A warning message appears if any of the items d...

XmListDeleteItemsPos(3X) -- A List function that deletes items from the list starting at the given position

XmListDeleteItemsPos deletes the specified number of items from the list starting at the specified position. Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deleted. Specifies the number of it...

XmListDeletePos(3X) -- A List function that deletes an item from a list at a specified position

XmListDeletePos deletes an item at a specified position. A warning message appears if the position does not exist. Specifies the ID of the List from which an item is to be deleted. Specifies the posit...

XmListDeletePositions(3X) -- A List function that deletes items from a list based on an array of positions

XmListDeletePositions deletes noncontiguous items from a list. The function deletes all items whose corresponding positions appear in the position_list array. A warning message is displayed if a speci...

XmListDeselectAllItems(3X) -- A List function that unhighlights and removes all items from the selected list

XmListDeselectAllItems unhighlights and removes all items from the selected list. Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list all selected items are deselected For a complete definition of Lis...

XmListDeselectItem(3X) -- A List function that deselects the specified item from the selected list

XmListDeselectItem unhighlights and removes from the selected list the first item in the list that matches item. Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deselected Specifies the item t...

XmListDeselectPos(3X) -- A List function that deselects an item at a specified position in the list

XmListDeselectPos unhighlights the item at the specified position and deletes it from the list of selected items. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies the position of the item to be deselecte...

XmListGetKbdItemPos(3X) -- A List function that returns the position of the item at the location cursor

XmListGetKbdItemPos returns the position of the list item at the location cursor. Specifies the ID of the List widget For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3X).

XmListGetMatchPos(3X) -- A List function that returns all instances of an item in the list

XmListGetMatchPos is a Boolean function that returns an array of positions where a specified item is found in a List. Specifies the ID of the List widget. Specifies the item to search for. Returns an ...

XmListGetSelectedPos(3X) -- A List function that returns the position of every selected item in the list

XmListGetSelectedPos is a Boolean function that returns an array of the positions of the selected items in a List. Specifies the ID of the List widget. Returns an array of the positions of the selecte...

XmListItemExists(3X) -- A List function that checks if a specified item is in the list

XmListItemExists is a Boolean function that checks if a specified item is present in the list. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies the item whose presence is checked For a complete definitio...

XmListItemPos(3X) -- A List function that returns the position of an item in the list

XmListItemPos returns the position of the first instance of the specified item in a List. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies the item whose position is returned For a complete definition of...

XmListPosSelected(3X) -- A List function that determines if the list item at a specified position is selected

XmPosSelected determines if the list item at the specified position is selected or not. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies the position of the list item. A value of 1 indicates the first it...

XmListPosToBounds(3X) -- A List function that returns the bounding box of an item at a specified position in a list

XmListPosToBounds returns the coordinates of an item within a list and the dimensions of its bounding box. The function returns the associated x and y coordinates of the upper left corner of the bound...

XmListReplaceItems(3X) -- A List function that replaces the specified elements in the list

XmListReplaceItems replaces each specified item of the list with a corresponding new item. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If any o...

XmListReplaceItemsPos(3X) -- A List function that replaces the specified elements in the list

XmListReplaceItemsPos replaces the specified number of items of the List with new items, starting at the specified position in the List. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared wi...

XmListReplaceItemsPosUnselected(3X) -- A List function that replaces items in a list without selecting the replacement items

XmListReplaceItemsPosUnselected replaces the specified number of items in the list with new items, starting at the given position. The replacement items remain unselected, even if they currently appea...

XmListReplaceItemsUnselected(3X) -- A List function that replaces items in a list

XmListReplaceItemsUnselected replaces each specified item in the list with a corresponding new item. The replacement items remain unselected, even if they currently appear in the XmNselectedItems list...

XmListReplacePositions(3X) -- A List function that replaces items in a list based on position

XmListReplacePositions replaces noncontiguous items in a list. The item at each position specified in position_list is replaced with the corresponding entry in item_list. When the items are inserted i...

XmListSelectItem(3X) -- A List function that selects an item in the list

XmListSelectItem highlights and adds to the selected list the first item in the list that matches item. Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is selected Specifies the item to be...

XmListSelectPos(3X) -- A List function that selects an item at a specified position in the list

XmListSelectPos highlights a List item at the specified position and adds it to the list of selected items. Specifies the ID of the List widget. Specifies the position of the item to be selected. A va...

XmListSetAddMode(3X) -- A List function that sets add mode in the list

XmListSetAddMode allows applications control over Add Mode in the extended selection model. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies whether to activate or deactivate Add Mode. If state is True, ...

XmListSetBottomItem(3X) -- A List function that makes an existing item the last visible item in the list

XmListSetBottomItem makes the first item in the list that matches item the last visible item in the list. Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is made the last visible Specifies...

XmListSetBottomPos(3X) -- A List function that makes a specified item the last visible item in the list

XmListSetBottomPos makes the item at the specified position the last visible item in the List. Specifies the ID of the List widget. Specifies the position of the item to be made the last visible item ...

XmListSetHorizPos(3X) -- A List function that scrolls to the specified position in the list

XmListSetHorizPos sets the XmNvalue resource of the horizontal ScrollBar to the specified position and updates the visible portion of the list with the new value if the List widget's XmNlistSizePolic...

XmListSetItem(3X) -- A List function that makes an existing item the first visible item in the list

XmListSetItem makes the first item in the list that matches item the first visible item in the list. Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is made the first visible Specifies the...

XmListSetKbdItemPos(3X) -- A List function that sets the location cursor at a specified position

XmListSetKbdItemPos sets the location cursor at the item specified by position. This function does not determine if the item at the specified position is selected or not. Specifies the ID of the List ...

XmListSetPos(3X) -- A List function that makes the item at the given position the first visible position in the list

XmListSetPos makes the item at the given position the first visible position in the List. Specifies the ID of the List widget. Specifies the position of the item to be made the first visible item in t...

XmListUpdateSelectedList(3X) -- A List function that updates the XmNselectedItems resource

XmListUpdateSelectedList frees the contents of the current XmNselectedItems list. The routine traverses the XmNitems list and adds each currently selected item to the XmNselectedItems list. For each s...

XmListYToPos(3X) -- A List function that returns the position of the item at a specified y coordinate

XmListYToPos returns the position of the item at the given y coordinate within the list. Specifies the ID of the List widget Specifies the y coordinate in the list's coordinate system For a complete ...

XmMainWindow(3X) -- The MainWindow widget class

MainWindow provides a standard layout for the primary window of an application. This layout includes a MenuBar, a CommandWindow, a work region, a MessageWindow, and ScrollBars. Any or all of these are...

XmMainWindowSep1(3X) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the first Separator widget

XmMainWindowSep1 returns the widget ID of the first Separator widget in the MainWindow. The first Separator widget is located between the MenuBar and the Command widget. This Separator is visible only...

XmMainWindowSep2(3X) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the second Separator widget

XmMainWindowSep2 returns the widget ID of the second Separator widget in the MainWindow. The second Separator widget is located between the Command widget and the ScrolledWindow. This Separator is vis...

XmMainWindowSep3(3X) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the third Separator widget

XmMainWindowSep3 returns the widget ID of the third Separator widget in the MainWindow. The third Separator widget is located between the message window and the widget above it. This Separator is visi...

XmMainWindowSetAreas(3X) -- A MainWindow function that identifies manageable children for each area

XmMainWindowSetAreas identifies which of the valid children for each area (such as the MenuBar and work region) are to be actively managed by MainWindow. This function also sets up or adds the MenuBar...

XmManager(3X) -- The Manager widget class

Manager is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. It supports the visual resources, graphics contexts, and traversal resources necessary for the graphics and traversa...

XmMapSegmentEncoding(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the compound text encoding format associated with the specif...

XmMapSegmentEncoding searches the segment encoding registry for an entry that matches the specified font list tag and returns a copy of the associated compound text encoding format. The application is...

XmMenuPosition(3X) -- A RowColumn function that positions a Popup MenuPane

XmMenuPosition positions a Popup MenuPane using the information in the specified event. Unless an application is positioning the MenuPane itself, it must first invoke this function before managing the...

XmMenuShell(3X) -- The MenuShell widget class

The MenuShell widget is a custom OverrideShell widget. An OverrideShell widget bypasses mwm when displaying itself. It is designed specifically to contain Popup or Pulldown MenuPanes. Most application...

XmMessageBox(3X) -- The MessageBox widget class

MessageBox is a dialog class used for creating simple message dialogs. Convenience dialogs based on MessageBox are provided for several common interaction tasks, which include giving information, aski...

XmMessageBoxGetChild(3X) -- A MessageBox function that is used to access a component

XmMessageBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a MessageBox. The parameters given to the function are the MessageBox widget and a value indicating which component to access. Specifies the M...

XmOptionButtonGadget(3X) -- A RowColumn function that obtains the widget ID for the CascadeButtonGadget in an OptionMenu

XmOptionButtonGadget provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID for the internally created CascadeButtonGadget. Once the application has obtained the widget ID, it can adjust ...

XmOptionLabelGadget(3X) -- A RowColumn function that obtains the widget ID for the LabelGadget in an OptionMenu

XmOptionLabelGadget provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID for the internally created LabelGadget. Once the application has obtained the widget ID, it can adjust the visua...

XmPanedWindow(3X) -- The PanedWindow widget class

PanedWindow is a composite widget that lays out children in a vertically tiled format. Children appear in top-tobottom fashion, with the first child inserted appearing at the top of the PanedWindow an...

XmPrimitive(3X) -- The Primitive widget class

Primitive is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. It handles border drawing and highlighting, traversal activation and deactivation, and various callback lists need...

XmProcessTraversal(3X) -- A function that determines which component receives keyboard events when a widget has the focus

XmProcessTraversal determines which component of a hierarchy receives keyboard events when the hierarchy that contains the given widget has keyboard focus. Using XmProcessTraversal to traverse to Menu...

XmPushButton(3X) -- The PushButton widget class

PushButton issues commands within an application. It consists of a text label or pixmap surrounded by a border shadow. When a PushButton is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that it ...

XmPushButtonGadget(3X) -- The PushButtonGadget widget class

PushButtonGadget issues commands within an application. It consists of a text label or pixmap surrounded by a border shadow. When PushButtonGadget is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearanc...

XmRegisterSegmentEncoding(3X) -- A compound string function that registers a compound text encoding format for a specified font list ...

XmRegisterSegmentEncoding registers a compound text encoding format with the specified font list element tag. The XmCvtXmStringToCT function uses this registry to map the font list tags of compound st...

XmRemoveProtocolCallback(3X) -- A VendorShell function that removes a callback from the internal list

XmRemoveProtocolCallback removes a callback from the internal list. XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom ret...

XmRemoveProtocols(3X) -- A VendorShell function that removes the protocols from the protocol manager and deallocates the inte...

XmRemoveProtocols removes the protocols from the protocol manager and deallocates the internal tables. If any of the protocols are active, it will update the handlers and update the property if shell ...

XmRemoveTabGroup(3X) -- A function that removes a tab group

This function is obsolete and its behavior is replaced by setting XmNnavigationType to XmNONE. XmRemoveTabGroup removes a widget from the list of tab groups associated with a particular widget hierarc...

XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that removes a callback from the internal list

XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the...

XmRemoveWMProtocols(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that removes the protocols from the protocol manager and dealloc...

XmRemoveWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the protocol prop...

XmRepTypeAddReverse(3X) -- A representation type manager function that installs the reverse converter for a previously register...

XmRepTypeAddReverse installs the reverse converter for a previously registered representation type. The reverse converter takes a numerical representation type value and returns its corresponding stri...

XmRepTypeGetId(3X) -- A representation type manager function that retrieves the identification number of a representation ...

XmRepTypeGetId searches the registration list for the specified representation type and returns the associated identification number. Specifies the representation type for which an identification numb...

XmRepTypeGetNameList(3X) -- A representation type manager function that generates a list of values for a representation type

XmRepTypeGetNameList generates a null-terminated list of the value names associated with the specified representation type. Each value name is a null-terminated string. This routine allocates memory f...

XmRepTypeGetRecord(3X) -- A representation type manager function that returns information about a representation type

XmRepTypeGetRecord retrieves information about a particular representation type that is registered with the representation type manager. This routine allocates memory for the returned data. The applic...

XmRepTypeGetRegistered(3X) -- A representation type manager function that returns a copy of the registration list

XmRepTypeGetRegistered retrieves information about all representation types that are registered with the representation type manager. The registration list is an array of structures, each of which con...

XmRepTypeInstallTearOffModelConverter(3X) -- A representation type manager function that installs the resource converter for XmNtearOffModel.

XmRepTypeInstallTearOffModelConverter installs the resource converter that allows values for the XmNtearOffModel resource to be specified in resource default files.

XmRepTypeRegister(3X) -- A representation type manager function that registers a representation type resource

XmRepTypeRegister registers a representation type resource with the representation type manager. All features of the representation type management facility become available for the specified represen...

XmRepTypeValidValue(3X) -- A representation type manager function that tests the validity of a numerical value of a representat...

XmRepTypeValidValue tests the validity of a numerical value for a given representation type resource. The function generates a default warning message if the value is invalid and the enable_default_wa...

XmResolveAllPartOffsets(3X) -- A function that allows writing

The use of offset records requires two extra global variables per widget class. The variables consist of pointers to arrays of offsets into the widget record and constraint record for each part of the...

XmResolvePartOffsets(3X) -- A function that allows writing of

The use of offset records requires one extra global variable per widget class. The variable consists of a pointer to an array of offsets into the widget record for each part of the widget structure. T...

XmRowColumn(3X) -- The RowColumn widget class

The RowColumn widget is a general purpose RowColumn manager capable of containing any widget type as a child. In general, it requires no special knowledge about how its children function and provides ...

XmScale(3X) -- The Scale widget class

Scale is used by an application to indicate a value from within a range of values, and it allows the user to input or modify a value from the same range. A Scale has an elongated rectangular region si...

XmScaleGetValue(3X) -- A Scale function that returns the current slider position

XmScaleGetValue returns the current slider position value displayed in the scale. Specifies the Scale widget ID Returns the current slider position value For a complete definition of Scale and its ass...

XmScaleSetValue(3X) -- A Scale function that sets a slider value

XmScaleSetValue sets the slider value within the Scale widget. Specifies the Scale widget ID. Specifies the slider position along the scale. This sets the XmNvalue resource. For a complete definition ...

XmScreen(3X) -- The Screen widget class

The XmScreen object is used by Motif widgets to store information that is specific to a screen. It also allows the toolkit to store certain information on widget hierarchies that would otherwise be un...

XmScrollBar(3X) -- The ScrollBar widget class

The ScrollBar widget allows the user to view data that is too large to be displayed all at once. ScrollBars are usually located inside a ScrolledWindow and adjacent to the widget that contains the dat...

XmScrollBarGetValues(3X) -- A ScrollBar function that returns the ScrollBar's increment values

XmScrollBarGetValues returns the ScrollBar's increment values. The scroll region is overlaid with a slider bar that is adjusted in size and position using the main ScrollBar or set slider function at...

XmScrollBarSetValues(3X) -- A ScrollBar function that changes ScrollBar's increment values and the slider's size and position

XmSetScrollBarValues changes the ScrollBar's increment values and the slider's size and position. The scroll region is overlaid with a slider bar that is adjusted in size and position using the main...

XmScrolledWindow(3X) -- The ScrolledWindow widget class

The ScrolledWindow widget combines one or two ScrollBar widgets and a viewing area to implement a visible window onto some other (usually larger) data display. The visible part of the window can be sc...

XmScrolledWindowSetAreas(3X) -- A ScrolledWindow function that adds or changes a window work region and a horizontal or vertical Scr...

XmScrolledWindowSetAreas adds or changes a window work region and a horizontal or vertical ScrollBar widget to the ScrolledWindow widget for the application. Each widget is optional and may be passed ...

XmScrollVisible(3X) -- A ScrolledWindow function that makes an invisible descendant of a ScrolledWindow work area visible

XmScrollVisible makes an obscured or partially obscured widget or gadget descendant of a ScrolledWindow work area visible. The function repositions the work area and sets the specified margins between...

XmSelectionBox(3X) -- The SelectionBox widget class

SelectionBox is a general dialog widget that allows the user to select one item from a list. By default a SelectionBox includes the following: A scrolling list of alternatives An editable text field f...

XmSelectionBoxGetChild(3X) -- A SelectionBox function that is used to access a component

XmSelectionBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a SelectionBox. The parameters given to the function are the SelectionBox widget and a value indicating which component to access. Specifies...

XmSeparator(3X) -- The Separator widget class

Separator is a primitive widget that separates items in a display. Several different line drawing styles are provided, as well as horizontal or vertical orientation. The Separator line drawing is auto...

XmSeparatorGadget(3X) -- The SeparatorGadget widget class

SeparatorGadget separates items in a display. Several line drawing styles are provided, as well as horizontal or vertical orientation. Lines drawn within the SeparatorGadget are automatically centered...

XmSetColorCalculation(3X) -- A function to set the procedure used for default color calculation

XmSetColorCalculation sets the procedure to calculate default colors. This procedure is used to calculate the foreground, top shadow, bottom shadow, and select colors on the basis of a given backgroun...

XmSetFontUnit(3X) -- A function that sets the font unit value for a display

XmSetFontUnit provides an external function to initialize font unit values. Applications may want to specify resolution-independent data based on a global font size. See the XmNunitType resource descr...

XmSetFontUnits(3X) -- A function that sets the font unit value for a display

XmSetFontUnits provides an external function to initialize font unit values. Applications may want to specify resolution-independent data based on a global font size. This function must be called befo...

XmSetMenuCursor(3X) -- A function that modifies the menu cursor for a client

XmSetMenuCursor programmatically modifies the menu cursor for a client; after the cursor has been created by the client, this function registers the cursor with the menu system. After calling this fun...

XmSetProtocolHooks(3X) -- A VendorShell function that allows pre and post actions to be executed when a protocol message is re...

XmSetProtocolHooks is used by shells that want to have pre and post actions executed when a protocol message is received from MWM. Since there is no guaranteed ordering in execution of event handlers ...

XmSetWMProtocolHooks(3X) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that allows pre and post actions to be executed when a protocol ...

XmSetWMProtocolHooks is a convenience interface. It calls XmSetProtocolHooks with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. Specifies the widget with which the protocol pr...

XmString(3X) -- Data type for a compound string

XmString is the data type for a compound string. Compound strings include one or more segments, each of which may contain a font list element tag, string direction, and text component. When a compound...

XmStringBaseline(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the number of pixels between the top of the character box an...

XmStringBaseline returns the number of pixels between the top of the character box and the baseline of the first line of text in the provided compound string. Specifies the font list Specifies the str...

XmStringByteCompare(3X) -- A compound string function that

XmStringByteCompare returns a Boolean indicating the results of a byte-by-byte comparison of two compound strings. In general, if two compound strings are created with the same (char *) string using X...

XmStringCompare(3X) -- A compound string function that compares two strings

XmStringCompare returns a Boolean value indicating the results of a semantically equivalent comparison of two compound strings. Semantically equivalent means that the strings have the same text compon...

XmStringConcat(3X) -- A compound string function that appends one string to another

XmStringConcat copies s2 to the end of s1 and returns a copy of the resulting compound string. The original strings are preserved. The space for the resulting compound string is allocated within the f...

XmStringCopy(3X) -- A compound string function that makes a copy of a string

XmStringCopy makes a copy of a compound string. The space for the resulting compound string is allocated within the function. The application is responsible for managing the allocated space. The memor...

XmStringCreate(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string

XmStringCreate creates a compound string with two components: text and a font list element tag. Specifies a null-terminated string to be used as the text component of the compound string. Specifies th...

XmStringCreateLocalized(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string in the current locale

XmStringCreateLocalized creates a compound string containing the specified text and assigns XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG as the font list entry tag. An identical compound string would result from the functi...

XmStringCreateLtoR(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string

XmStringCreateLtoR creates a compound string with two components: text and a font list element tag. This function imposes the semantic of scanning for \n characters in the text. When one is found, th...

XmStringCreateSimple(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string in the language environment of a widget

XmStringCreateSimple creates a compound string with two components: text and a character set. It derives the character set from the current language environment. The routine attempts to derive a chara...

XmStringDirection(3X) -- Data type for the direction of display in a string

XmStringDirection is the data type for specifying the direction in which the system displays characters of a string, or characters of a segment of a compound string. This is an enumeration with two po...

XmStringDirectionCreate(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string

XmStringDirectionCreate creates a compound string with a single component, a direction with the given value. Specifies the value of the directional component

XmStringDraw(3X) -- A compound string function that draws a compound string in an X window

XmStringDraw draws a compound string in an X Window. If a compound string segment uses a font list entry that defines a font set, the graphic context passed to this routine will have the GC font membe...

XmStringDrawImage(3X) -- A compound string function that draws a compound string in an X Window and creates an image

XmStringDrawImage draws a compound string in an X Window and paints both the foreground and background bits of each character. If a compound string segment uses a font list entry that defines a font s...

XmStringDrawUnderline(3X) -- A compound string function that underlines a string drawn in an X Window

XmStringDrawUnderline draws a compound string in an X Window. If the substring identified by underline can be matched in string, the substring will be underlined. Once a match has occurred, no further...

XmStringEmpty(3X) -- A compound string function that provides

XmStringEmpty returns a Boolean value indicating whether any non-zero length text components exist in the provided compound string. It returns True if there are no text segments in the string. If this...

XmStringExtent(3X) -- A compound string function that determines the size of the smallest rectangle that will enclose the ...

XmStringExtent determines the width and height, in pixels, of the smallest rectangle that will enclose the provided compound string. Specifies the font list Specifies the string Specifies a pointer to...

XmStringFree(3X) -- A compound string function that recovers memory

XmStringFree recovers memory used by a compound string. Specifies the compound string to be freed

XmStringFreeContext(3X) -- A compound string function that instructs the toolkit that the context is no longer needed

XmStringFreeContext instructs the toolkit that the context is no longer needed and will not be used without reinitialization. Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the XmStringI...

XmStringGetLtoR(3X) -- A compound string function that searches for a text segment in the input compound string

XmStringGetLtoR searches for a text segment in the input compound string that matches the given font list element tag. Specifies the compound string. Specifies the font list element tag associated wit...

XmStringGetNextComponent(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the type and value of the next component in a compound strin...

XmStringGetNextComponent returns the type and value of the next component in the compound string identified by context. It is a low-level component function. Components are returned one at a time. On ...

XmStringGetNextSegment(3X) -- A compound string function that fetches the octets in the next segment of a compound string

XmStringGetNextSegment fetches the octets in the next segment; repeated calls fetch sequential segments. The text, tag, and direction of the fetched segment are returned each time. A Boolean status is...

XmStringHasSubstring(3X) -- A compound string function that indicates whether one compound string is contained within another

XmStringHasSubstring indicates whether or not one compound string is contained within another. Specifies the compound string to be searched Specifies the compound string to be searched for

XmStringHeight(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the line height of the given compound string

XmStringHeight returns the height, in pixels, of the sum of all the line heights of the given compound string. Separator components delimit lines. Specifies the font list Specifies the string

XmStringInitContext(3X) -- A compound string function that allows applications to read out the content segment by segment

XmStringInitContext maintains a context to allow applications to read out the contents of a compound string segment by segment. This function establishes the context for this read out. This context is...

XmStringLength(3X) -- A compound string function that obtains the length of a compound string

XmStringLength obtains the length of a compound string. It returns the number of bytes in s1 including all tags, direction indicators, and separators. If the compound string has an invalid structure, ...

XmStringLineCount(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the number of separators plus one in the provided compound s...

XmStringLineCount returns the number of separators plus one in the provided compound string. In effect, it counts the lines of text. Specifies the string.

XmStringNConcat(3X) -- A compound string function that appends a specified number of bytes to a compound string

XmStringNConcat appends a specified number of bytes from s2 to the end of s1, including tags, directional indicators, and separators. It then returns the resulting compound string. The original string...

XmStringNCopy(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a copy of a compound string

XmStringNCopy creates a copy of s1 that contains a specified number of bytes, including tags, directional indicators, and separators. It then returns the resulting compound string. The original string...

XmStringPeekNextComponent(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the component type of the next component fetched

XmStringPeekNextComponent examines the next component that would be fetched by XmStringGetNextComponent and returns the component type. Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the...

XmStringSegmentCreate(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string

XmStringSegmentCreate is a high-level function that assembles a compound string consisting of a font list element tag, a direction component, a text component, and an optional separator component. Spe...

XmStringSeparatorCreate(3X) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string

XmStringSeparatorCreate creates a compound string with a single component, a separator.

XmStringTable(3X) -- Data type for an array of compound strings

XmStringTable is the data type for an array of compound strings (objects of type XmString).

XmStringWidth(3X) -- A compound string function that returns the width of the longest sequence of text components in a co...

XmStringWidth returns the width, in pixels, of the longest sequence of text components in the provided compound string. Separator components are used to delimit sequences of text components. Specifies...

XmTargetsAreCompatible(3X) -- A function that tests whether the target types match between a drop site and source object

XmTargetsAreCompatible determines whether the import targets of the destination match any of the export targets of a source. If there is at least one target in common, the function returns True. Speci...

XmText(3X) -- The Text widget class

Text provides a single-line and multiline text editor for customizing both user and programmatic interfaces. It can be used for single-line string entry, forms entry with verification procedures, and ...

XmTextClearSelection(3X) -- A Text function that clears the primary selection

XmTextClearSelection clears the primary selection in the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID. Specifies the server time at which the selection value is desired. This should be the time of the ev...

XmTextCopy(3X) -- A Text function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard

XmTextCopy copies the primary selected text to the clipboard. Specifies the Text widget ID. Specifies the server time at which the selection value is to be modified. This should be the time of the eve...

XmTextCut(3X) -- A Text function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard and deletes the selected text

XmTextCut copies the primary selected text to the clipboard and then deletes the primary selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNm...

XmTextDisableRedisplay(3X) -- A Text function that temporarily prevents visual update of the Text widget

XmTextDisableRedisplay prevents redisplay of the specified Text widget even though its visual attributes have been modified. The visual appearance of the widget remains unchanged until XmTextEnableRed...

XmTextEnableRedisplay(3X) -- A Text function that forces the visual update of a Text widget

XmTextEnableRedisplay is used in conjunction with XmTextDisableRedisplay, which suppresses visual update of the Text widget. When XmTextEnableRedisplay is called, it determines if any visual attribute...

XmTextField(3X) -- The TextField class

TextField widget provides a single line text editor for customizing both user and programmatic interfaces. It is used for single-line string entry, and forms entry with verification procedures. It pro...

XmTextFieldClearSelection(3X) -- A TextField function that clears the primary selection

XmTextFieldClearSelection clears the primary selection in the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID. Specifies the time at which the selection value is desired. This should be the time o...

XmTextFieldCopy(3X) -- A TextField function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard

XmTextFieldCopy copies the primary selected text to the clipboard. Specifies the TextField widget ID. Specifies the time at which the selection value is to be modified. This should be the time of the ...

XmTextFieldCut(3X) -- A TextField function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard and deletes the selected tex...

XmTextFieldCut copies the primary selected text to the clipboard and then deletes the primary selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either...

XmTextFieldGetBaseline(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the x position of the first baseline

XmTextFieldGetBaseline accesses the x position of the first baseline in the TextField widget, relative to the x position of the top of the widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete defi...

XmTextFieldGetEditable(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the edit permission state

XmTextFieldGetEditable accesses the edit permission state of the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextFiel...

XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the insertion cursor

XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition accesses the insertion cursor position of the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, s...

XmTextFieldGetLastPosition(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the last text character

XmTextFieldGetLastPosition accesses the position of the last character in the text buffer of the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its asso...

XmTextFieldGetMaxLength(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text strin...

XmTextFieldGetMaxLength accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the TextField widget entered from the keyboard. The maximum allowable length prevents the user ...

XmTextFieldGetSelection(3X) -- A TextField function that retrieves the value of the primary selection

XmTextFieldGetSelection retrieves the value of the primary selection. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated ...

XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the primary selection

XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition accesses the left and right position of the primary selection in the text buffer of the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID Specifies the pointer in whi...

XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that retrieves the value of a wide character encoded primary selection

XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs retrieves the value of the primary selection, encoded in a wide character format. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsi...

XmTextFieldGetString(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the string value

XmTextFieldGetString accesses the string value of the TextField widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. Specifies the TextField wid...

XmTextFieldGetStringWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of a TextField widget

XmTextFieldGetStringWcs retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of the TextField widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree...

XmTextFieldGetSubstring(3X) -- A TextField function that retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer

XmTextFieldGetSubstring retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a TextField widget. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the interna...

XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that retrieves a portion of a wide character internal text buffer

XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a TextField widget that is stored in a wide character format. The function copies a specified number of characte...

XmTextFieldInsert(3X) -- A TextField function that inserts a character string into a text string

XmTextFieldInsert inserts a character string into the text string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For examp...

XmTextFieldInsertWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that inserts a wide character string into a TextField widget

XmTextFieldInsertWcs inserts a wide character string into the TextField widget at a specified location. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the te...

XmTextFieldPaste(3X) -- A TextField function that inserts the clipboard selection

XmTextFieldPaste inserts the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor of the destination widget. If XmNpendingDelete is True and the insertion cursor is inside the current selection, the clipboard ...

XmTextFieldPosToXY(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the x and y position of a character position

XmTextFieldPosToXY accesses the x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the TextField widget, of a given character position in the text buffer. Specifies the TextField widget ID Specifi...

XmTextFieldRemove(3X) -- A TextField function that deletes the primary selection

XmTextFieldRemove deletes the primary selected text. If there is a selection, this routine also calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback o...

XmTextFieldReplace(3X) -- A TextField function that replaces part of a text string

XmTextFieldReplace replaces part of the text string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replace...

XmTextFieldReplaceWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that replaces part of a wide character string in a TextField widget

XmTextFieldReplaceWcs replaces part of the wide character string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example...

XmTextFieldSetAddMode(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the state of Add Mode

XmTextFieldSetAddMode controls whether or not the TextField widget is in Add Mode. When the widget is in Add Mode, the insert cursor can be moved without disturbing the primary selection. Specifies th...

XmTextFieldSetEditable(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the edit permission

XmTextFieldSetEditable sets the edit permission state of the TextField widget. When set to True, the text string can be edited. Specifies the TextField widget ID Specifies a Boolean value that when Tr...

XmTextFieldSetHighlight(3X) -- A TextField function that highlights text

XmTextFieldSetHighlight highlights text between the two specified character positions. The mode parameter determines the type of highlighting. Highlighting text merely changes the visual appearance of...

XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the position of the insertion cursor

XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition sets the insertion cursor position of the TextField widget. This routine also calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks if the insertion cursor position cha...

XmTextFieldSetMaxLength(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string en...

XmTextFieldSetMaxLength sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the TextField widget. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string fr...

XmTextFieldSetSelection(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the primary selection of the text

XmTextFieldSetSelection sets the primary selection of the text in the widget. It also sets the insertion cursor position to the last position of the selection and calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCa...

XmTextFieldSetString(3X) -- A TextField function that sets the string value

XmTextFieldSetString sets the string value of the TextField widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVeri...

XmTextFieldSetStringWcs(3X) -- A TextField function that sets a wide character string value

XmTextFieldSetStringWcs sets the wide character string value of the TextField widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallbac...

XmTextFieldShowPosition(3X) -- A TextField function that forces text at a given position to be displayed

XmTextFieldShowPosition forces text at the specified position to be displayed. If the XmNautoShowCursorPosition resource is True, the application should also set the insert cursor to this position. Sp...

XmTextFieldXYToPos(3X) -- A TextField function that accesses the character position nearest an x and y position

XmTextFieldXYToPos accesses the character position nearest to the specified x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the TextField widget. Specifies the TextField widget ID Specifies the...

XmTextFindString(3X) -- A Text function that finds the beginning position of a text string

XmTextFindString locates the beginning position of a specified text string. This routine searches forward or backward for the first occurrence of the string starting from the given start position. If ...

XmTextFindStringWcs(3X) -- A Text function that finds the beginning position of a wide character text string

XmTextFindStringWcs locates the beginning position of a specified wide character text string. This routine searches forward or backward for the first occurrence of the string, starting from the given ...

XmTextGetBaseline(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the x position of the first baseline

XmTextGetBaseline accesses the x position of the first baseline in the Text widget, relative to the x position of the top of the widget. Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text ...

XmTextGetEditable(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the edit permission state

XmTextGetEditable accesses the edit permission state of the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3X).

XmTextGetInsertionPosition(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the insert cursor

XmTextGetInsertionPosition accesses the insertion cursor position of the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3X).

XmTextGetLastPosition(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the last position in the text

XmTextGetLastPosition accesses the last position in the text buffer of the Text widget. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the buffer, and represents the position following ...

XmTextGetMaxLength(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string ent...

XmTextGetMaxLength accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the Text widget entered from the keyboard. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from enter...

XmTextGetSelection(3X) -- A Text function that retrieves the value of the primary selection

XmTextGetSelection retrieves the value of the primary selection. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with ...

XmTextGetSelectionPosition(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the primary selection

XmTextGetSelectionPosition accesses the left and right position of the primary selection in the text buffer of the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID Specifies the pointer in which the position...

XmTextGetSelectionWcs(3X) -- A Text function that retrieves the value of a wide character encoded primary selection

XmTextGetSelectionWcs retrieves the value of the primary selection that is encoded in a wide character format. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is respon...

XmTextGetSource(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the source of the widget

XmTextGetSource accesses the source of the Text widget. Text widgets can share sources of text so that editing in one widget is reflected in another. This function accesses the source of one widget so...

XmTextGetString(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the string value

XmTextGetString accesses the string value of the Text widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. Specifies the Text widget ID For a co...

XmTextGetStringWcs(3X) -- A Text function that retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of a Text widget

XmTextGetStringWcs retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of the Text widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. Specifie...

XmTextGetSubstring(3X) -- A Text function that retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer

XmTextGetSubstring retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a Text widget. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the internal text buf...

XmTextGetSubstringWcs(3X) -- A Text function that retrieves a portion of a wide character internal text buffer

XmTextGetSubstringWcs retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a Text widget that is stored in a wide character format. The function copies a specified number of characters from a ...

XmTextGetTopCharacter(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the first character displayed

XmTextGetTopCharacter accesses the position of the text at the top of the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3X).

XmTextInsert(3X) -- A Text function that inserts a character string into a text string

XmTextInsert inserts a character string into the text string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For example, to ins...

XmTextInsertWcs(3X) -- A Text function that inserts a wide character string into a Text widget

XmTextInsertWcs inserts a wide character string into the Text widget at a specified location. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For ex...

XmTextPaste(3X) -- A Text function that inserts the clipboard selection

XmTextPaste inserts the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor of the destination widget. If XmNpendingDelete is True and the insertion cursor is inside the current selection, the clipboard selec...

XmTextPosition(3X) -- Data type for a character position within a text string

XmTextPosition is the data type for a character position within a text string. The text position is an integer representing the number of characters from the beginning of the string. The first charact...

XmTextPosToXY(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the x and y position of a character position

XmTextPosToXY accesses the x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the Text widget, of a given character position in the text buffer. Specifies the Text widget ID Specifies the characte...

XmTextRemove(3X) -- A Text function that deletes the primary selection

XmTextRemove deletes the primary selected text. If there is a selection, this routine also calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmN...

XmTextReplace(3X) -- A Text function that replaces part of a text string

XmTextReplace replaces part of the text string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replacement would...

XmTextReplaceWcs(3X) -- A Text function that replaces part of a wide character string in a Text widget

XmTextReplaceWcs replaces part of the wide character string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text repl...

XmTextScroll(3X) -- A Text function that scrolls text

XmTextScroll scrolls text in a Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID Specifies the number of lines of text to scroll. A positive value causes text to scroll upward; a negative value causes text to...

XmTextSetAddMode(3X) -- A Text function that sets the state of Add Mode

XmTextSetAddMode controls whether or not the Text widget is in Add Mode. When the widget is in Add Mode, the insert cursor can be moved without disturbing the primary selection. Specifies the Text wid...

XmTextSetEditable(3X) -- A Text function that sets the edit permission

XmTextSetEditable sets the edit permission state of the Text widget. When set to True, the text string can be edited. Specifies the Text widget ID Specifies a Boolean value that when True allows text ...

XmTextSetHighlight(3X) -- A Text function that highlights text

XmTextSetHighlight highlights text between the two specified character positions. The mode parameter determines the type of highlighting. Highlighting text merely changes the visual appearance of the ...

XmTextSetInsertionPosition(3X) -- A Text function that sets the position of the insert cursor

XmTextSetInsertionPosition sets the insertion cursor position of the Text widget. This routine also calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks if the insertion cursor position changes. Spec...

XmTextSetMaxLength(3X) -- A Text function that sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string entered...

XmTextSetMaxLength sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the Text widget. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string from the key...

XmTextSetSelection(3X) -- A Text function that sets the primary selection of the text

XmTextSetSelection sets the primary selection of the text in the widget. It also sets the insertion cursor position to the last position of the selection and calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallbac...

XmTextSetSource(3X) -- A Text function that sets the source of the widget

XmTextSetSource sets the source of the Text widget. Text widgets can share sources of text so that editing in one widget is reflected in another. This function sets the source of one widget so that it...

XmTextSetString(3X) -- A Text function that sets the string value

XmTextSetString sets the string value of the Text widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallback...

XmTextSetStringWcs(3X) -- A Text function that sets a wide character string value

XmTextSetStringWcs sets the wide character string value of the Text widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmo...

XmTextSetTopCharacter(3X) -- A Text function that sets the position of the first character displayed

XmTextSetTopCharacter sets the position of the text at the top of the Text widget. If the XmNeditMode is XmMULTI_LINE_EDIT, the line of text that contains top_character is displayed at the top of the ...

XmTextShowPosition(3X) -- A Text function that forces text at a given position to be displayed

XmTextShowPosition forces text at the specified position to be displayed. If the XmNautoShowCursorPosition resource is True, the application should also set the insert cursor to this position. Specifi...

XmTextXYToPos(3X) -- A Text function that accesses the character position nearest an x and y position

XmTextXYToPos accesses the character position nearest to the specified x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the Text widget. Specifies the Text widget ID Specifies the x position, re...

XmToggleButton(3X) -- The ToggleButton widget class

ToggleButton sets nontransitory state data within an application. Usually this widget consists of an indicator (square or diamond) with either text or a pixmap on one side of it. However, it can also ...

XmToggleButtonGadget(3X) -- The ToggleButtonGadget widget class

ToggleButtonGadget sets nontransitory state data within an application. Usually this gadget consists of an indicator (square or diamond-shaped) with either text or a pixmap on one side of it. However,...

XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState(3X) -- A ToggleButtonGadget function that obtains the state of a ToggleButtonGadget

XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState obtains the state of a ToggleButtonGadget. Specifies the ToggleButtonGadget ID For a complete definition of ToggleButtonGadget and its associated resources, see XmToggleBu...

XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState(3X) -- A ToggleButtonGadget function that sets or changes the current state

XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState sets or changes the ToggleButtonGadget's current state. Specifies the ToggleButtonGadget widget ID. Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the ToggleButtonGadge...

XmToggleButtonGetState(3X) -- A ToggleButton function that obtains the state of a ToggleButton

XmToggleButtonGetState obtains the state of a ToggleButton. Specifies the ToggleButton widget ID For a complete definition of ToggleButton and its associated resources, see XmToggleButton(3X).

XmToggleButtonSetState(3X) -- A ToggleButton function that sets or changes the current state

XmToggleButtonSetState sets or changes the ToggleButton's current state. Specifies the ToggleButton widget ID. Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the ToggleButton state is selected or u...

XmTrackingEvent(3X) -- A Toolkit function that provides a modal interaction

XmTrackingEvent provides a modal interface for selection of a component. It is intended to support context help. The function grabs the pointer and discards succeeding events until BSelect is released...

XmTrackingLocate(3X) -- A Toolkit function that provides a modal interaction

XmTrackingLocate provides a modal interface for selection of a component. It is intended to support context help. The function grabs the pointer and discards succeeding events until BSelect is release...

XmTranslateKey(3X) -- The default keycode-to-keysym translator

XmTranslateKey is the default XtKeyProc translation procedure for Motif applications. The function takes a keycode and modifiers and returns the corresponding keysym. XmTranslateKey serves two main pu...

XmUninstallImage(3X) -- A pixmap caching function that removes an image from the image cache

XmUninstallImage removes an image from the image cache. Points to the image structure given to the XmInstallImage() routine

XmUpdateDisplay(3X) -- A function that processes all pending exposure events immediately

XmUpdateDisplay provides the application with a mechanism for forcing all pending exposure events to be removed from the input queue and processed immediately. When a user selects a button within a Me...

XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) callin...

XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling ...

XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variablelength argument list (varargs) cal...

XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) call...

XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs...

XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox(3X) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function

XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) callin...

XmWidgetGetBaselines(3X) -- Retrieves baseline information for a widget

XmWidgetGetBaselines returns an array that contains one or more baseline values associated with the specified widget. The baseline of any given line of text is a vertical offset in pixels from the ori...

XmWidgetGetDisplayRect(3X) -- Retrieves display rectangle information for a widget

XmWidgetGetDisplayRect returns the width, height and the x and y coordinates of the upper left corner of the display rectangle of the specified widget. The display rectangle is the smallest rectangle ...

xprt_register(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

xprt_unregister(3) -- miscellaneous library routines for ONC remote procedure calls

y0(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

y1(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

yn(3) -- Compute Bessel functions

ypclnt(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

This package of functions provides an interface to the Network Information Service (NIS) database lookup service. The package can be loaded from the standard library, /lib/libc.a. Refer to ypfiles(4) ...

yperr_string(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yppasswd(3) -- Update user password in Network Information Service (NIS) password map.

The yppasswd() routine uses Remote Procedure Call (RPC) and External Data Representation (XDR) routines to update a user password in an Network Information Service (NIS) password map. The RPC and XDR ...

ypprot_err(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_all(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_bind(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_first(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_get_default_domain(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_master(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_match(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_next(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_order(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

yp_unbind(3) -- Network Information Service (NIS) client package

_BASE_ADDRESS(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_cobol_main(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_DYNAMIC(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_DYNAMIC_LINK(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_ebss(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_edata(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_end(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_etext(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_fbss(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_fdata(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_ftext(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_getlong(3) -- Retrieves 32-bit quantities from a byte stream

The _getlong() function gets 32-bit quantities from the byte stream or arbitrary byte boundaries. The _getlong() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resolver, a set of functions that...

_getshort(3) -- Retrieves short quantities from a byte stream

the _getshort() function gets 16-bit quantities from the byte stream or arbitrary byte boundaries. The _getshort() function is one of a set of subroutines that form the resolver, a set of functions th...

_GOT_OFFSET(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_longjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

_procedure_string_table(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_procedure_table(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_procedure_table_size(3) -- locations in program and definitions

_setjmp(3) -- Save and restores the current execution context

_sia_isagroup(3) -- checks a list of known

__sia_isagroup() is a utility routine for the sia_get_groups() routines to determine whether a given group is already in the known list of groups.

_tolower(3) -- Translate characters

_toupper(3) -- Translate characters

__exc_last_chance(3) -- support routines for unhandled exceptions

__fstart(3) -- locations in program and definitions

__istart(3) -- locations in program and definitions

__sia_isagroup(3) -- checks a list of known

__sia_isagroup() is a utility routine for the sia_get_groups() routines to determine whether a given group is already in the known list of groups.

newsletter delivery service